JP2024031614A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase the convenience of test signals.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game control means for controlling the progress of a game and provision means for providing predetermined amount of game value on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition and capable of setting a game impossible state in which it is impossible to proceed with a game on the basis of a fact that a difference amount which is the difference between the amount of game value related to provision by the provision means from the start of calculation and the amount of game value used in the game reaches a first specific amount. The game machine further includes test signal controlling means capable of generating a test signal that can be output to the outside of the game machine and indicates a difference amount is a second specific amount or more which is less than the first specific amount. Setting is made so that the generation of the test signal is continued after the game impossible state is set, when the game impossible state is set while the test signal is generated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, this type of gaming machine has been a pachinko machine that performs a special game in which a jackpot is drawn on the condition that a game ball enters the starting prize opening, and if a jackpot is won in this lottery, the jackpot is opened. Slot machines are known in which a winning combination is drawn by inserting game medals and operating a start switch, and a bonus game can be executed when a bonus is won in the winning combination. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a winning hole such as a starting winning hole or a big winning hole opened during a special game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out corresponding to each winning hole. (A predetermined amount of gaming value is given). In a slot machine, when a small winning combination is won, a predetermined number of game medals predetermined in accordance with the type of small winning combination are paid out (a predetermined amount of gaming value is given).
Furthermore, in order to increase the player's interest, these gaming machines generally execute a specific performance that suggests the results of the jackpot lottery or the winning combination lottery.
Furthermore, in recent years, gaming machines such as those described above have been designed to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming too high due to the acquisition of a large number of gaming balls (gaming medals). ) and the number of game balls (game medals) used in the game, which stops the game when the difference ball reaches a specific number (see Patent Document 1). .
Here, for game machines newly introduced into the market, a type test is conducted to determine whether or not they conform to a predetermined memory. Therefore, in the gaming machine, it is possible to generate a test signal that is used for a model test and indicates the progress of the game, and to output the test signal to the outside of the gaming machine (see Patent Document 2). In the type test, the above-mentioned judgment is made by connecting a test computer to the gaming machine and inputting test signals generated and output by the gaming machine to the computer.

JP2020-81211A JP2019-72277A

Although a gaming machine that can generate and output test signals can efficiently proceed with type testing, there are problems such as the emergence of gaming machines that stop the game based on the difference ball as described above. In recent years, as the functions of test signals have become more diverse, it has been desired to further improve the convenience of test signals.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the convenience of test signals.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is configured as follows.

(1) The present invention includes a game control means that controls the progress of the game, and an awarding means that gives a predetermined amount of gaming value based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and the game control means has a predetermined amount of game value. The progress of the game is determined based on the fact that the difference amount, which is the difference between the amount of gaming value given by the giving means and the amount of gaming value used in the game, reaches a first specific amount from the start of calculation. The gaming machine is capable of setting a game-disabled state in which the game is disabled, the gaming machine is capable of outputting to the outside of the gaming machine, and the difference amount is equal to or greater than a second specific amount that is smaller than the first specific amount. The present invention is characterized by comprising a test signal control means capable of generating a test signal indicating a test signal, and when the game-disabled state is set while the test signal is being generated, the generation of the test signal is continued after the game-disabled state is set. shall be.
Here, the game value refers to physical game media such as game balls and game medals, as well as data that has the same value as the game media, and is numerical data that stores a value equivalent to the number of game media. It is a meaning that includes. Additionally, giving gaming value refers to actually paying out a corresponding amount of gaming media such as game balls and game medals (executing physical paying out of gaming media) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. In addition, the meaning includes adding a corresponding amount to the above-mentioned numerical data based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention actually pays out a corresponding amount of game media such as game balls and game medals based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (executes the physical payout of game media). ) In addition to gaming machines that provide gaming value by means of This includes a gaming machine that, instead of making a payout, adds a corresponding amount to the above-mentioned numerical data based on the establishment of a predetermined condition to give a gaming value.
In addition, if the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, the predetermined conditions include that the ball enters a winning opening (starting winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) provided in a gaming area where the game ball can flow down. can be mentioned. In addition, if the gaming machine is a slot machine, a small winning combination is won in the winning lottery, and when all rotating reels stop, the symbol combination corresponding to the won small winning combination is displayed on the active line. etc.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game-disabled state is set during the generation of the test signal indicating that the difference amount is equal to or greater than the second specific amount, which is smaller than the first specific amount, the game-disabled state is set. Since the generation of the test signal continues after the setting, even after the game-disabled state is set, there is no fraud related to the difference amount before the game-disabled state is set, and there is no doubt that the difference amount is the first one. It becomes possible to know from the test signal that the amount exceeds the specified amount. Thereby, the convenience of the test signal can be improved.
Further, since there is no need to execute the process of terminating the generation of the test signal based on the setting of the game-disabled state, it is possible to reduce the processing load on hardware resources such as the CPU when the game-disabled state is set.

(2) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes an external signal generating means capable of generating an external signal that is a signal different from the test signal and can be outputted to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external signal generating means is , the external signal can be generated based on the game-disabled state being set, and if the game-disabled state is set while the test signal is being generated, a power outage occurs during the game-disabled state; In this case, the generation of the test signal is not restarted after recovering from the power outage, and when the power outage occurs during the gaming disabled state, the generation of the external signal is restarted after recovering from the power outage. It's okay.
(3) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a suggestion means capable of executing a specific suggestion, and when a power outage occurs, the suggestion means waits for a predetermined preparation period after recovering from the power outage. The specific suggestion can be executed until the time elapses, and the difference amount is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and if a power outage occurs before the game-disabled state is set, the power outage is The memory of the difference amount in the storage unit at the time of occurrence may be maintained even after recovery from the power outage, and if the power outage occurs while the test signal is being generated and before the gaming disabled state is set. When this occurs, the test signal may be generated at least until a predetermined preparation period elapses after recovery from the power outage.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the convenience of test signals.

It is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front door opened. It is a front schematic view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is an external perspective view of the inner rail of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a backflow prevention part of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of the backflow prevention part when the rotation base of a pachinko machine is in a non-rotation state. It is a front schematic diagram of the backflow prevention part when the rotation base of a pachinko machine is in a rotation state. It is a front schematic diagram of the backflow prevention part when the rotation base of a pachinko machine is in the rotating state. It is a front enlarged view of the rotating valve in the backflow prevention part when the rotating base of the pachinko machine is in the rotating state. It is a schematic diagram of the back side of a pachinko machine. It is an external perspective view of the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a winning symbol random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a reach group determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a reach mode determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a reach mode determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern lottery table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable time determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view of a special electric accessory operation table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a game state setting table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a winning determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view of the second starting prize opening control table of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram regarding a control state that is set when the pachinko machine returns from a power outage. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram regarding a control state that is set when the pachinko machine returns from a power outage. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the power interruption evacuation process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of main processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process at the time of power failure recovery in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of difference ball control reset processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of processing at the time of sensor detection in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of gate detection processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the first starting winning hole detection process in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the process at the time of second starting winning hole detection in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of processing when detecting a big winning opening in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the process at the time of general winning opening detection in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of processing when an out is detected in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special figure related control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special symbol variation start processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of jackpot lottery processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of a variable performance pattern determination process in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special game control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special game end processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the general pattern related control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of normal symbol fluctuation start processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of normal symbol lottery processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal symbol stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of movable piece control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of solenoid control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of difference ball related command set processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of difference ball judgment control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of setting-related processing on the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of various performances and various suggestions of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable performance determination table of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the volume setting image of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of main processing in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of standby state start command reception processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of start winning command reception processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of rotation operation command reception processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the variation command reception process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of position correction processing at the time of a fluctuation start in a sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of difference ball related command reception processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of accessory control processing at the time of activation state setting in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of prize ball designation command reception processing in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of error suggestion command reception processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of error cancellation command reception processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of operation control processing in a standby state in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of demonstration display control processing on the sub-control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of power saving state control processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the current speaker volume change process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the volume adjustment process before activation warning in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of a sound volume adjustment process during activation warning/notice on the sub-control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the volume adjustment process during activation in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The game machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses game balls as game media. Although not particularly shown in the figure, in a gaming hall where pachinko machines P are installed, a plurality of pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in a gaming machine installation area called an island, and a game machine for renting game balls is installed. A ball lending device is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Further, each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding game ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R is capable of inserting a storage medium (card) in which value information necessary for inserting banknotes and renting out game balls is stored. Then, by inserting banknotes (or inserting a card) into the game ball lending device R and performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P, you can receive the lending of game balls from the game ball lending device R. It is now possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 1 or 2, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment includes a machine frame 1, which is a rectangular frame fixed to an island and has a hollow part (not particularly shown). A main body frame 2, which is a rectangular frame that is attached to the machine frame 1 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and has a hollow part (not particularly shown); A front door 3 is attached to 2 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and has an opening (not particularly shown) formed in the front.

As shown in FIG. 2, a speaker serving as an audio output device 10 is provided at the lower left portion of the machine frame 1. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, a game board 11 for forming a game area 12 is accommodated in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. The front door 3 also includes a transparent plate 4 attached to the opening, a transparent thin plate-like light guide plate GB arranged on the back side of the transparent plate 4 (in front of the game board 11) and covering the entire surface of the game board 11, A light guide plate lamp BL capable of irradiating light onto the end face of the light plate GB, an upper plate 6 and a saucer 7 located below the transparent plate 4 capable of receiving game balls, and an upper plate 6 and a saucer 7 attached to the right side of the saucer 7 for receiving game balls. An operating handle 5 for performing a firing operation and speakers serving as an audio output device 10 are provided, one each attached to the upper left and right sides of the transparent plate 4.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, a front door display lamp DL is provided on the outer periphery of the front door 3 to produce effects by emitting light in various colors and patterns. is provided with a status notification lamp EL that notifies various conditions caused by the establishment of predetermined conditions by emitting light in various colors. Both the front door display lamp DL and the status notification lamp EL are constructed of LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main body frame 2 is closed to the machine frame 1 and the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 and the light guide plate LB are positioned in front of the game board 11 with a gap in between. . Thereby, the game board 11 located at the rear can be visually recognized through the transparent plate 4 and the light guide plate LB.
Further, a latent image showing a predetermined character, logo, etc. is formed on the light guide plate GB. The light guide plate lamp BL is composed of LEDs that can emit light in multiple colors. When the light from the light guide plate lamp BL irradiated onto the end face of the light guide plate GB enters the inside of the light guide plate GB, a latent image is emitted (visualized) and an illumination display of the latent image is performed on the light guide plate GB. It has become.

Furthermore, game balls lent out by the game ball lending device R and prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine P are guided to the upper tray 6. The upper tray 6 is capable of receiving a predetermined amount of game balls, but when the upper tray 6 is full of game balls, game balls that are subsequently lent or paid out are guided to a receiving tray 7. It looks like this. Furthermore, although not particularly shown in the drawings, the bottom surface of the saucer 7 is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game balls and an opening/closing plate that can open and close the discharge hole. In normal conditions, the discharge hole is closed by the opening/closing plate, but by moving the opening/closing lever 8 (see Fig. 1), which is attached integrally with the opening/closing plate, laterally, the opening/closing plate also moves in the same direction, and the discharge hole is closed. The hole is opened. Thereby, the game ball can be dropped from the discharge hole and discharged to the outside of the tray 7.

Further, the operating handle 5 is formed so that the player can rotate it in a predetermined direction. Then, when the player rotates the operating handle 5, the game ball received in the upper tray 6 is sent to a firing device (not particularly shown), and the game ball is sent with an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 5. A game ball is fired toward the game area 12 by the firing device. The game ball launched in this way is guided by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, rises, and reaches the game area 12.

The game area 12 includes a pair of rails fixed to the game board 11 in a space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 when the main body frame 2 and front door 3 are closed with respect to the machine frame 1. It is a section partitioned into a substantially circular shape by 13a and 13b, and is an area in which a game ball can flow down.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the gaming area 12 includes a first gaming area 12a, which is an area on the left side when viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P, and a first gaming area 12a, which is an area on the right side when viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P. and a second gaming area 12b. These two game areas 12 have different possibilities of entry of game balls depending on the firing strength of the firing device. Specifically, if the firing strength of the firing device is less than a predetermined strength (the strength is such that the game ball fired by the firing device does not reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball is sent to the first game area. Enter 12a. On the other hand, when the firing strength of the firing device is equal to or higher than the predetermined strength (strength that allows the game ball fired by the firing device to reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball is sent to the second game area 12b. enter.

Here, the rails 13a and 13b will be explained in detail.
The game board 11 is a plate-like member that is generally rectangular in front view (see FIG. 3A), and as described above, the board surface of the game board 11 is provided with a pair of rails 13a and 13b. In addition, in the following, the rail 13a located on the outside of the rails 13a and 13b (the rail near the outer periphery of the game board 11) is also referred to as the outer rail 13a, and the rail 13b located on the inside (the rail near the outer periphery of the game board 11) is also referred to as the outer rail 13a. The rail further away from the inner rail 13b is also referred to as the inner rail 13b.

The outer rail 13a is a long metal thin plate member having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 3A), and is a rail base (not particularly shown) installed on the board surface of the game board 11. It is designed to be attached (supported) along the base surface of the The rail base is a plate-like member that is approximately C-shaped when viewed from the front, and opens toward the lower right when installed on the board surface of the game board 11, and is located approximately at the center of the game area 12 (game board 11). It is cut out to form an arc shape centered at (that is, an arc shape convex toward the left). The cutout surface formed by this cutout becomes the base surface. By being attached to the base surface, the outer rail 13a starts from a position to the left of the lower center of the game board 11, and extends to the left end, upper end, and upper right end of the game board 11 in an arc shape convex to the left. (See Figure 2).

The inner rail 13b is a long thin plate-like member made of synthetic resin and has almost the same width as the outer rail 13a. They are erected on the board surface, and are arranged in an arc shape starting from a position slightly to the left of the lower center of the game board 11 and convex to the left near the left end and near the upper left end of the game board 11.
The front surface of the space sandwiched between the outer rail 13a and the inner rail 13b faces the back surface of the transparent plate 4b, thereby forming a guide path 640 through which the game balls fired by the firing device can pass. (See Figures 3D-3G). This guide path 640 communicates with the game area 12 and guides the game ball fired by the firing device to the game area 12.
In addition, the upper end of the inner rail 13b (the tip of the inner rail 13b, in other words, the boundary between the guide path 640 and the game area 12) is provided to prevent the game balls that have entered the game area 12 from returning to the guide path 640. A backflow prevention section 700 is provided to prevent the backflow.

As shown in FIGS. 3B and 3C, the backflow prevention section 700 includes a rotating section 710, a case section 730 in which the rotating section 710 is arranged, and a cover that covers the case section 730 with the rotating section 710 arranged. The rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750 so that it can rotate while being sandwiched between the case part 730 and the cover plate 750. .

The case portion 730 includes a thin base plate 731 made of synthetic resin that is fixed to the game board 11, and approximately the right half of the outer peripheral edge of the base plate 731 (approximately the right half of the base plate 731 fixed to the game board 11). ), and the base plate 731 and the side plate 732 form a space S that opens in the front direction of the game board 11 and in the direction of the guide passage 640. (See Figure 3C).
The base plate 731 has a cylindrical boss 731a located at its upper end (the upper end of the base plate 731 fixed to the game board 11) and erected from the base plate 731, and a cylindrical boss 731a located below the boss 731a (the upper end of the base plate 731 fixed to the game board 11). A cylindrical base-side bearing part 731b is located at a position (slightly above the center of the base plate 731) and stands upright from the base plate 731; A substantially fan-shaped guide groove 731c that penetrates through the guide groove 731c, and an elongated rod-shaped engagement pin 731d that is located below the guide groove 731c (at the lower end of the base plate 731) and stands upright from the base plate 731 are provided (see FIG. (See 3C).

The cover plate 750 is a thin plate-like member made of synthetic resin that covers the opening in the front direction of the game board 11 in the case portion 730. The cover plate 750 has a screw hole 750a that is arranged at a position corresponding to the boss 731a of the base plate 731 while covering the above-mentioned opening, and passes through the cover plate 750, and a screw hole 750a that covers the above-mentioned opening. A cylindrical cover-side bearing part 750b is disposed at a position corresponding to the base-side bearing part 731b of the base plate 731 on the surface facing the base plate 731 in a state where the cover plate 731 is covered, and stands upright from the back surface of the cover plate 750. and an engagement hole 750c that extends through the cover plate 750 and is disposed at a position corresponding to the engagement pin 731d of the base plate 731 while covering the above-mentioned opening (see FIG. 3C).

The rotating part 710 is a member having a dogleg-shaped outer shape, and includes a rotating base 711 made of synthetic resin and having a substantially elliptical columnar shape that is rotatably attached to the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750. 711 (near the upper end of the rotary base 711 attached to the case portion 730), a thin plate-shaped rotary valve 712 made of synthetic resin is provided (see FIG. 3C). When the rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730, the rotating base 711 is located in the space S of the case part 730, and moves inside this space S while being sandwiched between the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750. The rotary valve 712 protrudes outside the space S through an opening in the direction of the guide passage 640 in the case portion 730, and is rotatable along with the rotary base 711.

The rotating base 711 has a substantially elliptical base bottom surface 711a that faces the base plate 731 when attached to the case part 730, a base side surface 711b that stands up from the outer peripheral edge of the base bottom surface 711a, and a base side surface 711b that stands upright from the outer peripheral edge of the base bottom surface 711a. A substantially elliptical base top surface 711c is located at the installed end and faces the base bottom surface 711a with the base side surface 711b in between (see FIG. 3C).
In addition, in the rotating base 711 attached to the case part 730, at a position corresponding to the base side bearing part 731b of the base plate 731 and the cover side bearing part 750b of the cover plate 750, from the base top surface 711c to the base bottom surface. A shaft hole 711d penetrating to the base plate 711a is provided, and a guide pin (not particularly shown) protrudes from the base bottom surface 711a toward the base plate 731 at a position corresponding to the guide groove 731c of the base plate 731. is provided.
Further, the length from the base bottom surface 711a to the base top surface 711c is slightly shorter than the length from the surface of the base plate 731 of the case portion 730 to the upright end of the side plate 732, and as a result, the rotating portion 710 When attached to the case portion 730, the rotating base portion 711 is housed in the space S while being sandwiched between the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750.

The rotary valve 712 is a substantially rectangular thin plate member that extends vertically upward from the upper left end of the base side surface 711b of the rotary base 711 when attached to the case portion 730, and faces the direction of the guide passage 640 (the guide passage 640 A guiding passage side surface 712a (facing the guiding passage side surface 712a), a gaming area side surface 712b facing the guiding passage side surface 712a and facing the gaming area 12 (facing the gaming area 12), and a gaming area side surface 712b starting from the upper end edge of the guiding passage side surface 712a. It includes an upper end surface 712c that slopes downward toward the upper edge, and a protruding piece 712d that protrudes toward the gaming area 12 from approximately the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the gaming area side surface 712b (see FIG. 3C). ).
The length from the base side surface 711b to the upper edge of the guide passage side surface 712a is longer than the length from the base side surface 711b to the upper edge of the game area side surface 712b.
Further, when the rotating base 711 is attached to the case part 730, the rotating valve 712 protrudes from the space S into the guiding passage 640 through the opening in the direction of the guiding passage 640 in the case part 730. 640 and extends vertically upward, with the tip of the rotary valve 712 positioned slightly below the outer rail 13a (see FIG. 3D). That is, the length from the base side surface 711b of the rotary base 711 to the tip of the rotary valve 712 is such that it can almost shield the guide passage 640 when the rotary base 711 is attached to the case part 730. .

When attaching the rotating part 710 to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750, first, the base side bearing part 731b of the base plate 731 and the shaft hole 711d of the rotating base 711 are aligned, and the rotating base 711 The rotating part 710 is arranged in the case part 730 so that the guide pin of the base plate 731 is inserted into the guide groove 731c of the base plate 731. Next, an elongated rod-shaped shaft pin 760 having a length extending from the base side bearing portion 731b to the cover side bearing portion 750b of the cover plate 750 is inserted into the shaft hole 711d of the rotation base 711, and then the shaft pin 760 of the base plate 731 is 731a and the screw hole 750a of the cover plate 750, and the cover side bearing part 750b and the tip of the shaft pin 760 protruding from the shaft hole 711d of the rotation base 711, and further, the engagement of the base plate 731 is made to match. The cover plate 750 is arranged so that the dowel pin 731d is inserted into the engagement hole 750c of the cover plate 750. Finally, by screwing the screws 764 into the boss 731a and the screw hole 750a from the surface of the cover plate 750 (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 750), the rotating base 711 is attached to the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750. The rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750 in a sandwiched state (with the cover plate 750 covering the opening in the front direction of the game board 11 in the case part 730) (FIGS. 3C and 3D). etc.).

As described above, when the rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750, one end of the shaft pin 760 is locked to the base side bearing part 731b, and the other end is locked to the cover side bearing part 750b. By being locked, the rotation base 711 is supported while being sandwiched between the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750 so as to be rotatable about the shaft pin 760.
Here, as described above, the rotating base 711 is a substantially elliptical columnar member, the rotating valve 712 extending from the rotating base 711 is a thin plate-like member, and the rotating base 711 is a rotating valve member. It is a heavier member than 712.
As a result, when the rotating portion 710 is attached to the case portion 730 and the cover plate 750, the rotating base portion 711 is normally attached to rotate counterclockwise about the shaft pin 760 due to its own weight. However, the guide pin inserted into the guide groove 731c of the base plate 731 remains in contact with the left end of the guide groove 731c. At this time, the rotary valve 712 extends vertically upward within the guide passage 640, and the guide passage 640 is substantially blocked by the rotary valve 712 (see FIG. 3D).
On the other hand, when the game ball launched by the firing device and rising in the guide path 640 comes into contact with the guide path side surface 712a of the rotating piece 712, the rotating base 711 moves against the rotating piece 712 against its own weight. The player rotates clockwise about the shaft pin 760 until the side surface 712b of the game area comes into contact with the side surface of the boss 731a on the base plate 731. In addition, when the game area side surface 712b is in contact with the side surface of the boss 731a, the rotary valve 712 is in a state of extending toward the upper right (towards the upper end of the game area 12), and the guide passage 640 is opened. (See Figure 3E).

Next, the rotation of the rotary valve 712 and the prevention of backflow of game balls that have entered the game area 12 into the guide path 640 by the rotary valve 712 will be described in detail. Note that in the following, the normal state when the rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750 (the state in which the rotating valve 712 extends vertically upward) is referred to as a "non-rotating state". The state in which the rotating base 711 rotates and the game area 712b is in contact with the side surface of the boss 731a is sometimes referred to as a "rotating state", and the rotating base 711 changes from a non-rotating state to a rotating state. The state up to this point (the state in which the rotating base 711 is rotating) may be referred to as a "rotating state."

As described above, in the non-rotating state, the rotary valve 712 extends vertically upward in the guide passage 640, and at this time, from the tip of the rotary valve 712 (the upper edge of the guide passage side surface 712a) to the outer rail 13a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and furthermore, the distance from the tip of the rotary valve 712 to the outer rail 13a between the non-rotating state and the rotating state is shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It is the shortest.
In addition, as described above, in the rotating state, the rotating valve 712 is in a state extending upward to the right, and the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a at this time is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, it is the longest distance from the tip of the rotary valve 712 to the outer rail 13a from the non-rotating state to the rotating state.

In the non-rotating state, when a game ball fired by the firing device and rising in the guide path 640 comes into contact with the guide path side surface 712a of the rotating piece 712, the rotating base 711 rotates until it reaches the rotating state. As described above, in this rotating state, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is longer than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 640 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has come into contact with the guide path side surface 712a enters the game area 12.
After the game ball enters the game area 12, the force generated by the game ball contacting the guide path side surface 712a is released, so that the rotating base 711 quickly rebounds due to its own weight. It rotates clockwise and is in a non-rotating state. In this non-rotating state, the guide pin is in contact with the left end of the guide groove 731c, so the rotating base 711 cannot rotate counterclockwise any further, and the tip of the rotating valve 712 The distance to the outer rail 13a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 640 is almost blocked by the rotary valve 712. Then, even if the game ball that has entered the game area 12 contacts a windmill or a nail and heads from the game area 12 toward the guide path 640, it will come into contact with the game area side surface 712b of the rotary valve 712, and the ball will come into contact with the guide path 640. access is blocked. In this way, in the non-rotating state, the rotary valve 712 prevents the game ball that has entered the game area 12 from returning to the guide path 640.

In addition, in the rotating state on the way from the rotating state to the non-rotating state, a game ball BB that has entered the gaming area 12 but tries to return to the guide path 640 (hereinafter also referred to as a returning game ball), A state in which a game ball (hereinafter also referred to as an entering game ball) that is launched by a firing device, ascends within the guide path 640, and is about to enter the game area 12 is in contact with the BG (hereinafter also referred to as a rotating contact state). (See FIGS. 3F and 3G).

In this rotational contact state, the advancing game ball BG is in contact with the guiding passage side surface 712a of the rotation valve 712, the outer rail 13a, and the returning game ball BB, and the returning game ball BB is rotated. It is in contact with the tip of the valve 712, the outer rail 13a, and the entering game ball BG (see FIGS. 3F and 3G).
In addition, in this contact state during rotation, the distance from the tip of the rotary valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is longer than the distance from the tip of the rotary valve 712 to the outer rail 13a in the non-rotation state, and It is shorter than the distance from the tip of the rotary valve 712 to the outer rail 13a in the state, and furthermore, the distance D1 from the tip of the rotary valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB. It is shorter than the distance D2 from to the outer rail 13a (see FIG. 3G).
Furthermore, in this rotating contact state, the tip of the rotating piece 712 is located on the upper left side of the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB (that is, above the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB). , and on the left side) (see Figure 3G).

If the returning game ball BB tries to return to the guiding path 640 after the entering game ball BG and the returning game ball BB come into contact in this rotating contact state, the returning game ball BB will move in the direction of the gaming area 12. Since the tip of the rotary valve 712 contacts the tip of the rotary valve 712, the rotary valve 712 that has contacted the game ball BB during this return rotates counterclockwise, thereby attempting to be displaced to a non-rotating state. Then, with the displacement toward the non-rotating state, the distance from the tip of the rotary valve 712 to the outer rail 13a becomes gradually shorter, and the guide passage 640 is gradually blocked by the rotary valve 712. Therefore, in this case, although the entering game ball BG that is ascending through the guide passage 640 flows down (reversely flows) through the ascending guide passage 640, the returning game ball BB does not return into the guide passage 640. It becomes difficult. In this way, if a contact state occurs during rotation and the entering game ball BG and the returning game ball BB come into contact at the boundary between the guide path 640 and the gaming area 112, the returning game ball BB It is possible to prevent the ball from returning to the guide path 640, and it is possible to prevent both the game ball BG during the approach and the game ball BB during the return from flowing down the guide path 640.

In addition, in the above-mentioned contact state during rotation, the distance D1 from the tip of the rotation valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is longer than the distance D2 from the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB to the outer rail 13a. If so, after the entering game ball BG and the returning game ball BB come into contact, the returning game ball BB will easily enter the gap between the tip of the rotary valve 712 and the outer guide rail 13a. When the returning game ball BB enters the gap, the rotating valve 712 rotates clockwise due to the returning game ball BB, thereby attempting to be displaced to the rotating state. Then, with the displacement toward the rotating state, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a gradually becomes longer, and the guiding passage 640 opens, so that the game ball BB is returned to the guiding passage. A situation may occur in which the number returns to 640.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the contact state during rotation described above, the distance D1 from the tip of the rotation valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is the same as the distance D1 from the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB to the outer rail 13a. Since the distance is shorter than the distance D2, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned situation from occurring.

The description of the gaming area 12 will now be returned to.
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3A, the gaming area 12 includes a windmill and a large number of nails to make the downward direction of the gaming balls irregular, a general prize opening 14 into which gaming balls can enter, and a starting hole. A first starting prize opening 15 and a second starting winning opening 16 as areas, a gate 20 through which a game ball can pass, an attacker device 17 that operates when a predetermined condition is met, and a game ball guided outside the gaming area 12. Out port 19, a performance display device 21 that performs various performances and various suggestions (notifications) as the game progresses, a board performance lamp GL, a right-hand hit notification lamp RL (not particularly shown), and a role performance device. YS is provided.

The general winning hole 14 is provided at the lower left side of the gaming area 12, as shown in FIG. 3A. When game balls enter the general winning hole 14, a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment) of prize balls are paid out. Note that the number and position of the general winning holes 14 are not particularly limited.

The first starting prize opening 15 is provided at a position slightly below the center of the gaming area 12, as shown in FIG. 3A. A game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and a game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can hardly enter the ball. On the other hand, the second starting prize opening 16 is provided at a position to the right of the center of the gaming area 12 (that is, within the second gaming area 12b), as shown in FIG. 3A. A game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16, and a game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can hardly enter the ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3A, the second starting prize opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (normal electric accessory) that can be opened and closed from side to side. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second starting prize opening 16 is in a closed state, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b opens, the second starting prize opening 16 becomes open, and this movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 16. This makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Further, the configuration of the movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and may include, for example, a pair of blade members that rotate in the left and right directions around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 to open and close the second starting prize opening 16. , it may be constituted by a lid member that opens and closes the second starting prize opening 16 by rotating back and forth around a horizontal axis, or it may be configured by a lid member that opens and closes the second starting winning opening 16 by sliding in the vertical direction. It may also be configured by a shutter member.
Note that the installation positions of the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16 are not particularly limited. For example, the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16 can be installed in any of the gaming areas 12 ( The game balls flowing down the first game area 12a, second game area 12b) may also be placed at positions where the balls can easily enter.

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out, and a jackpot lottery is held, and one of a plurality of predetermined special symbols is drawn. One of the special symbols is determined from the above. Each special symbol is associated with whether or not a special game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and the game state that will be set after the special game ends. It is possible to receive gaming profits such as execution.
In addition, the prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 are not particularly limited as long as they are one or more, and any number of balls may be paid out. good. In addition, the number of prize balls is the same in the starting winning hole (second starting winning hole 16) where the movable piece 16b is provided and the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole 15) where the movable piece 16b is not provided. It may be different, or it may be different. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is three. The number of prize balls paid out is one.

The gate 20 is provided above the second starting prize opening 16, as shown in FIG. 3A. When a game ball passes through this gate 20, a lottery of normal symbols, which will be described later, is carried out. If the result of the lottery is a win, the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting prize opening 16 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

The attacker device 17 is provided below the second starting prize opening 16, as shown in FIG. 3A. This attacker device 17 includes a grand prize opening 18 into which game balls can enter, and an opening/closing door 18b that opens and closes this grand prize opening 18. This opening/closing door 18b is movable between an open position where the big prize opening 18 is opened and a closed position where the big winning opening 18 is closed.
In the normal state, the opening/closing door 18b is located in the closed position (that is, the opening/closing door 18b is closed) and the grand prize opening 18 is closed, so the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening 18. However, when the above-mentioned special game is executed, the opening/closing door 18b is located in the open position (that is, the opening/closing door 18b is opened), the big prize opening 18 is opened, and the opening/closing door 18b is closed to the game. By functioning as a saucer member that guides the ball to the grand prize opening 18, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 18.
Moreover, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 18, a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in this embodiment) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 3A, the out opening 19 is provided at the lowest part of the gaming area 12, and can be placed in any of the general winning opening 14, the first starting winning opening 15, the second starting winning opening 16, and the big winning opening 18. It also accepts game balls that have not entered the ball.
The game ball received in the out port 19 and each of the above-mentioned winning holes (general winning hole 14, first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16, big winning hole 18) are all transferred to the out passage ( (not particularly shown), and is led to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

The effect display device 21 is provided approximately at the center of the gaming area 12, as shown in FIG. 3A. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 21. The effect display device 21 is provided with a display section 21a for displaying images such as moving images and still images.
In the display section 21a, in addition to displaying a background image, a variable effect is performed in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols. In this variable performance, the performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the jackpot lottery is informed (suggested) to the player by the stop display mode of each performance symbol 50.
Also, during the special game, the display section 21a displays an opening effect executed at the start of the special game, a round game effect executed during the round game described later, and a round game effect executed after all the round games (at the end of the special game). ) is performed (hereinafter, the opening performance, the round game performance, and the ending performance are collectively referred to as the special mid-game performance). An opening image is displayed in the opening performance, a round game image is displayed in the round game performance, and an ending image is displayed in the ending performance.
Note that the effect display device 21 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device; for example, a drum-type display device or the like that performs various displays using a plurality of drums with patterns attached to the outer periphery may be used.

As shown in FIG. 2, the board effect lamp GL is provided at the upper part of the gaming area 12, and is a device that provides effects and suggestions by emitting light in various colors and light emission patterns. The board display lamp GL is composed of LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors. Note that the installation position and the number of installation lamps GL are not particularly limited.
Although not particularly shown, the right-hander notification lamp RL is provided on the right side of the effect display device 21, and is composed of an LED that can be turned on and off.

The accessory production device YS is a device that performs production by operating in a predetermined manner.
The accessory production device YS of this embodiment has a disk-shaped structure as shown in FIG. It can be vertically displaced (moved) within a range from the position to a movable position corresponding to an area above the center of the gaming area 12. In addition, the accessory performance device YS can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in the movable position by a rotary motor RM (not particularly shown). The accessory production device YS normally remains at the initial position, and is displaced to a movable position at various timings (for example, when executing a reach development production described later), and in this movable position, it rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. A rotating effect of the accessory rotating (operating in a predetermined manner) is performed.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned initial position is a position above the center upper end of the effect display device 21, and the above-mentioned movable position is a position above the center upper end of the effect display device 21. There is. That is, although the accessory performance device YS does not overlap with the performance display device 21 in the initial position where it normally remains, it overlaps with the performance display device 21 in front with a predetermined gap in the movable position. It has become. Thereby, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the variable performance executed by the performance display device 21 from being obstructed by the accessory performance device YS, and to ensure the visibility of the variable performance. On the other hand, since the role object rotation performance is performed by displacing the role object performance device YS to a movable position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the role object rotation performance. Furthermore, when the accessory production device YS is in the movable position, the activation warning character image displayed on the display section 21a, which will be described later, overlaps in front thereof, and the activation warning character image is displayed by the accessory production device YS. It becomes difficult or impossible to see.
Note that the performance executed by the accessory performance device YS is not limited to the rotation performance of the accessory. For example, the accessory performance device YS may be provided with a lamp such as an LED, so that a performance can be performed in which the lamp lights up in a predetermined manner.

At the front position of the upper tray 6, there is provided a production operation device 9 which can be operated by a player to advance or switch productions executed during a game or while on standby. The production operation device 9 is composed of an operation dial 9a that can be rotated and an operation button 9b that can be pressed. When a predetermined performance is being executed by the performance display device 21, if the operation dial 9a is rotated or the operation button 9b is pressed, various performances such as a variable performance will progress or a different display will be displayed. It is becoming more and more common.
Note that the operation button 9b may be provided with a dedicated lamp (for example, an LED capable of emitting light of multiple colors) and turned on in a predetermined manner at a predetermined timing to improve the presentation effect.

A cross key 25 that can be operated by the player is provided on the right side of the performance operation device 9 on the upper plate 6 (see FIG. 1). The cross key 25 includes an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, by pressing the up key or the down key on the cross key 25, the volume of the audio output device 10 (that is, the volume of the audio or music output from the audio output device 10) can be adjusted. It can be changed within the range of multiple stages described below.
The volume of the audio output device 10 may be changed not by pressing the cross key 25 but by operating the effect operation device 9 described above. Further, a touch panel that can be touched by the player is provided, and a button part for changing the volume of the audio output device 10 is displayed on the touch panel, and the volume of the audio output device 10 can be changed by touching the button part. You may also set it so that it can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3A, at the lower right of the game board 11 and outside the game area 12, there is a first special symbol display device 30 as a device for displaying various situations regarding the game. , a second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol retention display device 38, a second special symbol retention display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol retention display device 33 are provided.

Further, as described above, the game ball lending device R is electrically connected to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, but operations on the game ball lending device R, such as lending out game balls and ejecting cards, It is designed to be accepted by pachinko machine P. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine P includes a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored in the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a ball rental button 36 that can be pressed. A card return button 37 that allows the user to return the card is provided.

In addition, on the back side of the game board 11, as shown in FIG. 4, a main control board 100 that stores setting values and the control state of the pachinko machine P, which will be described later, and controls the basic operations of the game of the pachinko machine P. is installed while being housed in a transparent box-shaped main control board case 150, and a launch payout control board 200 that controls the launch of game balls and payout of prize balls is attached to the transparent box-shaped launch payout control board case 250. The sub-control board 300 that controls various effects is installed while being housed in a transparent box-shaped sub-control board case 350, and relays operations to the game ball lending device R. A game ball rental control board 400 is housed and attached to a transparent box-shaped game ball rental control board case 450.

Further, on the back side of the game board 11, a power supply board 600 for supplying power to each board is provided, and this power supply board 600 is provided with a power switch 650.
The power switch 650 can be turned on or off, and when the power switch 650 is turned on, power is supplied from the power board 600 to each board, and when the power switch 650 is turned off, power is supplied from the power board 600 to each board. power supply is interrupted.
Note that in this specification, turning on the power switch 650 and supplying power is also referred to as "power on", and turning off the power switch 650 and stopping the supply of power is also referred to as "power is off". It is also referred to as "off".

(Configuration of control means of pachinko machine P)
Next, a control means for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine P will be explained.
The above-mentioned control means, as shown in FIG. 6, is composed of a main control board 100, a firing and payout control board 200, a sub-control board 300, a game ball lending control board 400, and a power supply board 600.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a firing payout control board 200 and a sub-control board 300 are connected to the main control board 100, and a game ball lending control board 400 is connected to the firing payout control board 200. There is. The main control board 100 and the firing and payout control board 200 also transmit various external signals (hereinafter also referred to as external information) related to game progress to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a hall computer in a game hall, etc.). An external information terminal board 500 is connected thereto. Further, a power supply board 600 is connected to each board.

(Overview of main control board 100)
As described above, the main control board 100 stores setting values, the control state of the pachinko machine P, etc., and controls the games played in the pachinko machine P. Specifically, a special figure game is started when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, and a special figure game is started when the game ball passes through the gate 20. Controls the general game, the above-mentioned special game, etc.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple stages from setting value 1 to setting value 6 are determined as settings regarding the ball output, and the probability of winning a jackpot, which will be described later, differs depending on the setting value. It looks like this. For example, the setting value 6 is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the setting value 1. If the probability of winning the jackpot is high, the possibility of winning the prize ball is also high, so the setting value By changing , the expected payout amount of prize balls in the pachinko machine P changes. In addition, a jackpot determination random number determination table 110 that determines the probability of winning a jackpot, which will be described later, is provided corresponding to each of setting values 1 to 6, and when the setting value is changed, a jackpot determination random number determination table 110 is provided for each setting value. The entire jackpot determination random number determination table 110 will be changed.
Note that the set values may be set in two to five stages instead of six levels, or may be set in only one set value.

Furthermore, when the power is on, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is in a playable state in which a game can be executed, a setting confirmation state in which the set setting values can be checked, and a setting confirmation state in which the set setting values can be checked. The player stays in one of four control states: a setting change state in which changes can be made, and a game stop state in which it is impossible to execute a game or check or change setting values.
Then, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the setting change state, the set value can be changed (switched) by performing a predetermined operation.
Storage and change of set values, control states set when the power is turned on, etc. will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 in this embodiment is a rectangular plate-shaped board, and is a single-sided board (single-layer board) in which a wiring pattern is provided only on one side. Note that the main control board 100 may be a double-sided board (two-layer board) in which wiring patterns are provided on both sides.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the surface of the main control board 100, there are a one-chip main IC 104 that integrates a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103 and other multiple ICs, a main information display device 105, and a connector. 106, a test-only output terminal 107, a setting switch 108, a RAM clear switch 109, etc. are provided.

The main CPU 101 is a device that performs various calculation processes. The main ROM 102 also contains spec codes that indicate the specs of the pachinko machine P (types of jackpot winning probabilities, methods for determining the gaming state after special games, etc.), control programs necessary for gaming, tables, etc. (described later). This device (Read Only Memory) is equipped with a storage area for storing jackpot determination random number determination table 110, winning symbol random number determination table 111, etc.). In addition, the main RAM 103 can store the above-mentioned setting values, the control status of the pachinko machine P, various data related to the progress of the game, etc., and is also used to temporarily store data during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 101. This is a device (Read Write Memory) that has a storage area that can be read and written.
The main CPU 101 reads control programs and tables stored in the main ROM 102 based on signals from various sensors and timers, which will be described later, and performs calculation processing, and also controls various devices connected to the main CPU 101 and performs calculations. Processes such as sending commands to other boards (such as the sub-control board 300) are performed based on the processing results.

Although not particularly shown, the storage area of the main RAM 103 in this embodiment is roughly divided into a predetermined start address (for example, F00H (alphanumeric characters with an "H" at the end are expressed in hexadecimal notation. Hereinafter, ) to a predetermined final address (for example, F200H), and a specific start address (for example, F300H) to a specific final address (for example, F400H) and an unused area.

Furthermore, although not particularly illustrated, four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, are arranged in order in the used area from a predetermined start address to a predetermined final address. ing.
The first area contains setting values, gaming machine status flags that indicate the control status during the stay (playable status, setting confirmation status, setting change status, gaming stop status), test signal information (described later), and activation security information (described later). be remembered. Note that the test signal information and activation security information may not be stored in the first area, but may be stored in, for example, a fourth area or an unused area.
The second area contains the checksum of the main RAM 103 calculated at the time the power is turned off, and a backup flag for determining whether there is an abnormality in the backup processing of the main RAM 103 performed at the time the power is turned off. be remembered.
In the third area, information on errors occurring in the pachinko machine P, etc. is stored.
The fourth area includes various data related to the progress of the game (information on special symbols that are changing as will be described later), the launch position of the game ball (game area 12 where the game ball is launched), the number of reserved first special symbols, and the second special symbol. The number of pending, the number of definite variations, the number of time reductions, the execution phase data indicating the progress status of the special symbol game, the number of pending regular symbols, the regular pattern execution phase data indicating the progress status of the regular symbol game, and the information that the special symbol is not changing. information, etc.) are stored. Note that the data stored in the fourth area is not limited to these; for example, it is set so that a special fluctuation pattern is determined when the number of fluctuations after a special game ends reaches a specific number. In the pachinko machine P, information on the above-mentioned specific number of times, etc. may be stored.

Further, in the unused area, data such as the number of balls fired and the number of prize balls paid out since the start of the game is stored in an initial state such as after shipment from the factory. Specifically, the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 14, the first starting winning hole 15, the second starting winning hole 16, and the big winning hole 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of winning balls) ), the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the grand prize opening 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of special electric accessory prize balls), the first starting prize opening 15, the second starting prize opening 16, and the grand prize. The total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the mouth 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total prize ball number of accessories), etc. are stored.
In this out-of-use area, information related to the game, such as the ball payout rate, special electric accessory ratio, and accessory ratio, is calculated based on the data such as the number of balls fired and the number of prize balls mentioned above. ing.
Here, the ball output rate is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, and is a value calculated by the total number of prize balls/number of fired balls. Further, the special electric accessory ratio is the ratio of the total number of special electric accessory balls to the total number of prize balls, and is a value calculated from the formula: special electric accessory total number of prize balls/total number of prize balls. Further, the accessory ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls, and is a value calculated by the total number of prize balls/total number of prize balls.

Note that the data stored in the unused area is not limited to these, and for example, the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 14, etc. may be stored. .
In addition, in this specification, data such as the number of fired balls stored in the above-mentioned unused area and the number of prize balls paid out are also referred to as "gaming performance data", and the data such as the above-mentioned ball output rate etc. This information is also referred to as "gaming performance display information."

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a difference ball count value used for operation stop control based on the number of difference balls (hereinafter also referred to as difference ball operation stop control) to be described later is stored in a specific area in the out-of-use area; , difference ball action stop control phase data for setting various states related to the difference ball action stop control (a pre-activation warning state, an activation warning state, an activation notice state, and an activation state, which will be described later) are stored. Note that the differential pitch count value and the differential pitch operation stop control phase data may be stored in any of the first to fourth regions described above, instead of being stored in the unused area.
The differential ball operation stop control will be described in detail later.

The main information display device 105 is a device that displays various information, and is composed of four 7-segment displays with decimal points arranged side by side. The main information display device 105 in this embodiment does not include a processing device such as a CPU that independently performs arithmetic processing on the received data, and only performs display based on the data received from the main IC 104.
Specifically, during the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, the setting values stored in the used area (first area) of the main RAM 103 are displayed. Furthermore, while the game is enabled, the game performance display information stored in the unused area of the main RAM 103 is displayed. Furthermore, when the game is in a stopped state or when an error occurs in the pachinko machine P, a code indicating this is displayed.
Note that the main information display device 105 may be configured not by a 7-segment display but by a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. Further, the main information display device 105 may have other devices built-in therein unless it has a built-in device for independently processing the data received from the main IC 104. For example, for controlling the operation of the main information display device 105, It is also possible to incorporate a driver circuit or the like.

The connectors 106 are for connecting various harnesses, cables, etc., and a plurality of connectors 106 are provided on the surface of the main control board 100.
Further, the test-only output terminal 107 is a terminal for outputting a test signal used in a type test, and is provided on the surface of the main control board 100. Here, the type test is a test to determine whether the pachinko machine P complies with predetermined rules, and the test signal is a signal used during the type test. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, various test signals are generated by the main CPU 101 at various timings, and the generated test signals can be output from the test-dedicated output terminal 107 to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Specifically, a test computer (not particularly shown) is used for the type test, and this test computer has a dedicated receiving terminal that can be connected to the test output terminal 107. (not particularly shown) is provided. Then, when the above-mentioned receiving terminal is connected to the test-only output terminal 107, the test signal generated by the main CPU 101 and output from the test-only output terminal 107 is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P for testing. entered into the computer.
The output of the test signal will be described in detail later.

Further, the setting switch 108 is referred to when the power is turned on to set the control state (playable state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, game stop state). The setting switch 108 is provided with an operation section (not particularly shown) having a keyhole, and is configured to be rotatable when a predetermined key is inserted into the keyhole. In normal conditions, the setting switch 108 is off, but when a rotational operation is performed, the setting switch 108 is turned on.
Further, the RAM clear switch 109 is used to clear various data stored in the main RAM 103 and change set values. This RAM clear switch 109 is provided with a press button 109a (see FIG. 5) that can be pressed, and when this press button 109a is not pressed, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned off. However, when the push button 109a is pressed, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the power is turned on from off (recovering from a power outage), the control state in which it was staying before the power was turned off (immediately before the power outage occurred) is turned on. On or off of the setting switch 108 at the time (when the power is restored), on or off of the RAM clear switch 109, on or off of the body frame open detection sensor 2a (that is, opening or closing of the body frame 2), which will be described later. One of the control states is set depending on whether an abnormality occurs in the backup process of the main RAM 103 performed at the time when the main RAM 103 is turned off, and whether an abnormality occurs in the main RAM 103.
Then, by operating the push button 109a (RAM clear switch 109 is turned on) during the setting change state, the set value can be changed (switched). As mentioned above, the set values are stored in the used area of the main RAM 103, and when the set values are changed, the set values stored in the used area of the main RAM 103 are changed. becomes.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming performance data and setting values, various data related to the progress of the game (the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the progress status of the special symbol game, which will be described later). (Execution phase data indicating the number of Futou drawings pending, Futou drawing execution phase data indicating the progress status of the Futou drawing game, etc.) are stored.
Note that the devices and electronic components provided on the surface of the main control board 100 are not limited to those described above, and, for example, display various information on the main information display device 105 and switch display contents. A switch or the like may be provided for this purpose.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, clearing of data stored in the main RAM 103 and changing of setting values are both performed by operating the RAM clear switch 109; It is not limited. For example, a setting change switch separate from the RAM clear switch 109 is provided, and the RAM clear switch 109 is set to be used for clearing data stored in the main RAM 103, and the setting change switch is set to be used for changing setting values. It may be set to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 includes a general winning hole detection sensor 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 14, and a general winning hole detection sensor 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the first starting winning hole 15. The first starting winning hole detection sensor 15a detects that the ball has hit the ball, the second starting winning hole detecting sensor 16a detects that the game ball has entered the second starting winning hole 16, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 18. A big prize opening detection sensor 18a that detects that a ball has entered the gate, a gate detection sensor 20a that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 20, a setting switch 108, a RAM clear switch 109, and a gate for the game board 11. a magnetic detection sensor 70a that detects the magnetism that is generated, and a radio wave detection sensor 71a that detects radio waves irradiated to specific locations on the game board 11 (first starting prize opening 15, second starting winning opening 16, big winning opening 18, etc.) and a vibration detection sensor 72 that detects vibrations caused by fraudulent activities such as shaking the pachinko machine P.
Detection signals output from each of these detection sensors and signals indicating whether each switch is on or off are input to the main control board 100.

Note that the magnetic detection sensor 70a is turned on when detecting magnetism and outputs a magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100, and the magnetic detection signal is continuously output while detecting magnetism. When the magnetic detection sensor 70a stops detecting magnetism, it turns off and stops outputting the magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100. Furthermore, when a magnetic detection signal is input from the magnetic detection sensor 70a, the main control board 100 determines that a main control magnetic error has occurred.
Further, when the radio wave detection sensor 71a detects a radio wave, it turns on and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100, and the radio wave detection signal is continuously output while detecting the radio wave. When the radio wave detection sensor 71a stops detecting radio waves, it turns off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100. Furthermore, when a radio wave detection signal is input from the radio wave detection sensor 71a, the main control board 100 determines that a main control radio wave error has occurred.
Further, when the vibration detection sensor 72 detects that the pachinko machine P is vibrating, it is turned on and outputs a vibration detection signal to the main control board 100, and while the vibration is being detected, the vibration detection signal is continuously output. . When the vibration detection sensor 72 no longer detects vibrations of the pachinko machine P, it turns off and stops outputting the vibration detection signal to the main control board 100. Furthermore, when a vibration detection signal is input from the vibration detection sensor 72, the main control board 100 determines that a main control vibration error has occurred.

Moreover, the big winning hole detection sensor 18a is provided in the middle of the path from the big winning hole 18 to the big winning hole outlet. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 18 to when the game ball is detected by the grand prize opening detection sensor 18a is approximately 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 includes, as devices to be controlled, a starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 to open and close, and a starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18 to open and close. Big prize opening solenoid 18c, first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol retention display device 38, second special symbol retention display device 39 , the normal symbol holding display device 33, and the main information display device 105 are connected.
By driving each solenoid, the main control board 100 controls the opening and closing of the second starting prize opening 16 and the big prize opening 18, and also controls the display of each display device. .

(Overview of firing and dispensing control board 200)
The firing and payout control board 200 mainly controls the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into various prize openings, the payout of game balls lent out based on predetermined operations by the player, and the firing of game balls. It is something.
As shown in FIG. 6, the firing payout control board 200 includes a payout CPU 201, a payout ROM 202, and a payout RAM 203, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the firing and payout control board 200 includes a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5 as a device for controlling the firing of game balls, and a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5. an operation volume 5b that detects the operating angle (rotation angle) of the game ball, a firing stop switch 5c that stops firing the game ball, and sends the game ball received in the upper tray 6 to a firing device (not shown). A ball feeding solenoid 60, a shooting motor 61 that shoots a game ball, and a shooting ball detection sensor 64 that detects that a game ball is shot by the shooting motor 61 are connected, and the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b are connected to each other. A control signal output from the firing stop switch 5c is input to the firing and dispensing control board 200.

Then, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the playable state and the state related to the differential ball operation stop control described later is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notice state, the player operates the pachinko machine P. When you touch the handle 5 and perform a rotation operation, a control signal (hereinafter also referred to as a rotation operation signal) from the touch sensor 5a and operation volume 5b is input to the firing and dispensing control board 200, which controls the ball feed solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61. Control is performed to energize and fire game balls. Then, when the player releases the contact with the operating handle 5 or stops rotating the operating handle 5, the input of the rotational operation signal to the firing and payout control board 200 is stopped, and the game ball is fired. Control also stops.
Further, even if the rotation operation signal is input to the firing and dispensing control board 200, a control signal from the firing stop switch 5c (hereinafter also referred to as a firing stop control signal) is input to the firing and dispensing control board 200. Then, control is performed to stop the ball feeding solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 from being energized to stop firing the game balls.
Note that when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the game stop state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the playable state and the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control is in the activated state, Even if the rotational operation signal is input to the firing and payout control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 are not energized, and control to fire the game balls is not performed.
Furthermore, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the game stop state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the playable state, regardless of the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control (that is, the state regarding the difference ball action stop control). Regardless of whether the state is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, or activation state), when the rotation operation signal is input, the firing and dispensing control board 200 sends the handle operation command to the main control board 100. When the input of the rotation operation signal is stopped, the transmission of the handle operation command to the main control board 100 is stopped. That is, while the rotation operation signal is being input (while the player is touching the operation handle 5 and performing the rotation operation), the handle operation commands are continuously transmitted to the main control board 100.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the firing and payout control board 200 is equipped with a device for controlling the payout of game balls, which pays out game balls stored in a game ball storage section (not particularly shown). A payout motor 62 for dispensing balls and a payout counting switch 63 for detecting and counting the paid out game balls are connected. Further, although not particularly illustrated, the payout counting switch 63 has a built-in payout radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves irradiated to the switch.
When the firing and payout control board 200 receives the prize ball designation command transmitted from the main control board 100, the firing and payout control board 200 issues a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on this prize ball designation command. The payout motor 62 is controlled to payout. At this time, the number of game balls that have been paid out is counted by the payout counting switch 63, making it possible to determine whether a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out.

The firing and payout control board 200 in this embodiment also sends an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P when the game balls are actually paid out by the payout motor 62 (the game balls are counted by the payout counting switch 63). A payout prize ball signal based on this is transmitted to the external information terminal board 500. As a result, the payout prize ball signal is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500 (external information display device, hall computer, etc. that displays information such as the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots), and In a device external to P, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls actually paid out.
Note that the external signal regarding the payout of game balls (prize balls) is not limited to the payout prize ball signal. For example, a received prize ball signal based on receiving a prize ball designation command from the main control board 100 may be transmitted to the external information terminal board 500 instead of a signal based on the actual payout of game balls. good. Thereby, even in a device external to the pachinko machine P, it may be possible to grasp the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out based on the received prize ball designation command.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6, the firing and dispensing control board 200 includes a main body frame open detection sensor 2a that detects the open state of the main body frame 2, and a front door open detection sensor 3a that detects the open state of the front door 3. , a saucer full detection sensor 7a that detects the full state of the saucer 7, and detects game balls that are received into the out port 19 or enter each winning port and are led to the back side of the game board 11 through the out passage. The out sensor 19a and an out port radio wave detection sensor 71b that detects radio waves irradiated to the out port 19 are connected.

The main body frame open detection sensor 2a turns on when it detects that the main body frame 2 is opened, and outputs a main body frame open detection signal to the firing and dispensing control board 200. , the main body frame open detection signal is output continuously. Then, when the main body frame opening detection signal is input, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits a main body frame opening command to the main control board 100.
On the other hand, the body frame open detection sensor 2a turns off when it no longer detects that the body frame 2 is open, and stops outputting the body frame open detection signal. When the input of the main body frame opening detection signal stops, the firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that the main body frame 2 is closed, and stops sending the main body frame opening command to the main control board 100.

The front door open detection sensor 3a is turned on when it detects that the front door 3 is open, and outputs a door open detection signal to the firing and dispensing control board 200, and while the front door 3 is open, Door open detection signal is output continuously. Then, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits a door opening command to the main control board 100 when the door opening detection signal is input.
On the other hand, the front door open detection sensor 3a turns off when it no longer detects that the front door 3 is open, and stops outputting the door open detection signal. When the input of the door open detection signal stops, the firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed, and stops transmitting the door open command to the main control board 100.

The saucer full detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position on the saucer 7. When a predetermined amount or more of game balls to be paid out as prize balls are stored in the saucer 7 and the tray becomes full, the stored game balls will reach the above-mentioned predetermined position.
The saucer full detection sensor 7a is turned on when it detects that the game balls have reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and outputs a saucer detection signal to the firing and payout control board 200, so that the stored game balls can reach the above-mentioned predetermined position. While reaching the predetermined position, the saucer detection signal is continuously output. Then, when the saucer detection signal is input, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits a saucer full command to the main control board 100.
On the other hand, when the saucer full detection sensor 7a no longer detects that the game balls have reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, it is turned off and stops outputting the saucer detection signal to the firing and payout control board 200. Then, when the input of the saucer detection signal stops, the firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that the saucer 7 is no longer full, and stops sending the saucer full command to the main control board 100.

The out sensor 19a is provided in the out passage. Further, the out sensor 19a is turned on every time it detects a game ball that is received by the out port 19 or enters each winning port and passes through the out passage, and outputs an out signal to the firing and payout control board 200. It has become. Then, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits an out command to the main control board 100 every time an out signal is input.

The outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b is provided at a predetermined position around the outlet 19.
In addition, the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b turns on when it detects a radio wave, and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the firing and dispensing control board 200. While detecting radio waves, the radio wave detection signal continues. is output. On the other hand, when the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b stops detecting radio waves, it is turned off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the firing and dispensing control board 200.

The payout radio wave detection sensor is built into the payout counting switch 63 as described above.
In addition, the payout radio wave detection sensor turns on when it detects a radio wave and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the launch payout control board 200. While detecting radio waves, the radio wave detection signal is continuously output. be done. On the other hand, when the payout radio wave detection sensor stops detecting radio waves, it is turned off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the launch payout control board 200.

Further, as described above, the game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R is connected to the firing and payout control board 200. As shown in FIG. 6, the firing and payout control board 200 includes, via the game ball lending control board 400, a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a that detects the pressing operation of the ball lending button 36, and a card return control board 200. A card return switch 37a that detects a pressing operation of the button 37 is connected.
In addition, these devices may be connected directly to the firing payout control board 200 instead of connecting to the firing payout control board 200 via the game ball lending control board 400.

Then, when a card storing value information that allows game balls to be rented out (that is, a card with a balance) is inserted into the game ball lending device R and recognized, a value information signal indicating the value information is sent to the firing payout. It is transmitted from the game ball lending device R to the value information display device 35 via the control board 200 and the game ball lending control board 400. As a result, value information corresponding to the received value information signal is displayed on the value information display device 35.

Further, when a card storing value information that allows game balls to be rented is inserted into the game ball lending device R and the ball lending button 36 is pressed while being recognized, the ball lending switch 36a outputs the card. The detection signal is transmitted to the game ball lending device R via the game ball lending control board 400 and the firing and payout control board 200.
Upon receiving the above-mentioned detection signal, the game ball lending device R performs a process of subtracting predetermined value information from the stored value information, and displays the number of balls corresponding to the subtracted value information on the firing and payout control board 200 (for example, A rental ball payout command for paying out 125 game balls as rental balls is sent, and the subtracted value information is sent to the value information display device 35 via the firing and payout control board 200 and the game ball rental control board 400. Send the corresponding subtraction command.
When the rental ball payout command is received, the firing and payout control board 200 performs control to pay out the number of game balls (for example, 125) corresponding to the subtracted value information. Further, when the subtraction command is received, the value information display device 35 updates and displays the value information after the subtraction.

Further, when the card return button 37 is pressed, a detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the firing payout control board 200, and the firing payout control board 200 controls the game ball lending device R. Send a return request signal requesting return of the card. When the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, the game ball lending device R controls ejecting the card.

Note that when a card that does not store value information that allows game balls to be rented out (that is, a card with no balance) is inserted into the game ball lending device R, or when the ball lending button 36 is pressed, the predetermined value information is Even when all the value information stored on the card is lost as a result of the subtraction (that is, when the card has no remaining balance), the game ball lending device R may control the ejection of the card.

As described above, in the launch payout control board 200, the game ball is based on the entry of game balls into various winning holes (general winning hole 14, first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16, big winning hole 18). Both the payout of prize balls and the payout of game balls (rental balls) lent out based on operations by the player are controlled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, errors related to the equipment connected to the firing and payout control board 200 (hereinafter also referred to as payout related errors) include a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, and a ball out of ball error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, A clogging error, an excessive prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, a payout motor error, and a door opening error may occur.
Then, in the firing and dispensing control board 200, the operating status of the above-mentioned switch connected to the firing and dispensing control board 200 and the above-mentioned sensor connected to the firing and dispensing control board 200 are output to the firing and dispensing control board 200. Based on various signals, etc., determines the occurrence of out-of-ball errors, full-filled errors, payout counting switch errors, jammed balls errors, excessive prize balls errors, payout radio wave errors, and payout motor errors among payout-related errors (detection of occurrence) ) is now being carried out.
In this specification, the determination of the occurrence of an error specifically refers to the determination of the occurrence of an error based on the operating status of the switch and detection by various sensors (e.g., payout radio wave detection sensor, body frame open detection sensor 2a, etc.). This means not only the determination but also the detection of the operating status of the switch and the detection by various sensors.

The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when no game balls are stored in the game ball storage section. In the firing and payout control board 200, a ball out error occurs when the game balls are not counted by the payout counting switch 63 for a predetermined period of time even though the payout motor 62 is operating to pay out game balls. It is determined that the When a ball out error occurs, a ball out error command indicating this is sent from the firing/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, so that the main control board 100 can grasp the occurrence of the ball out error. .

The full tank error is an error that occurs when the saucer 7 is full. The firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that a full tank error has occurred when the saucer detection signal is input. When a full tank error occurs, a full tank error command indicating this is sent from the firing and dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, so that the main control board 100 can grasp the occurrence of the full tank error.

The payout counting switch error is an error that occurs when the payout counting switch 63 does not operate due to a disconnection of the harness or the like. The firing and payout control board 200 determines that a payout counting switch error has occurred when the operation of the payout counting switch 63 cannot be confirmed. When a payout counting switch error occurs, a payout counting switch error command indicating this is sent from the firing payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, so that the main control board 100 can grasp the occurrence of the payout counting switch error. It has become.

The ball jamming error is an error that occurs when the dispensing motor 62 malfunctions. The firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that a ball clogging error has occurred when the dispensing motor 62 receives the activation signal but does not operate. When a ball jamming error occurs, a ball jamming error command indicating the fact is sent from the firing and dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, so that the main control board 100 can grasp the occurrence of the ball jamming error. .

Excessive prize balls error occurs when game balls are paid out even though no prize ball designation command has been received, or when more game balls are paid out than the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out based on the received prize ball designation command. This is an error that occurs when a ball is paid out. The firing and payout control board 200 determines that an excessive prize ball error has occurred when the number of game balls that have been paid out despite not being scheduled reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). When an excessive prize ball error occurs, an excessive prize ball error command indicating this is sent from the firing and payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, so that the main control board 100 can grasp the occurrence of the excessive prize ball error. It has become.

The payout radio wave error is an error that occurs when radio wave irradiation is detected. The firing and payout control board 200 determines that a payout radio wave error has occurred when a radio wave detection signal is input from the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b or the payout radio wave detection sensor. When a payout radio wave error occurs, a payout radio wave error command indicating this is transmitted from the launch payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, so that the main control board 100 can grasp the occurrence of the payout radio wave error. .

The payout motor error is an error that occurs when the payout motor 62 does not operate due to a disconnection of the harness or the like. The firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that a dispensing motor error has occurred when the operation of the dispensing motor 62 cannot be confirmed. When a dispensing motor error occurs, a dispensing motor error command indicating this is sent from the firing dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, so that the main control board 100 can grasp the occurrence of the dispensing motor error. .

Further, among the payout-related errors, a door open error is an error that occurs when the main body frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened.
Here, as described above, both the main body frame open detection sensor 2a that detects the open of the main body frame 2 and the front door open detection sensor 3a that detects the open of the front door 3 are connected to the firing and dispensing control board 200. However, the determination of the occurrence of a door opening error is made by the main control board 100, not by the firing and dispensing control board 200.
Specifically, a main body frame open command is sent from the launch payout control board 200 when a main body frame open detection signal is input to the launch payout control board 200, or a front door open detection signal is sent to the launch payout control board 200. When at least one of the front door opening commands transmitted from the firing and dispensing control board 200 is received, the main control board 100 determines that a door opening error has occurred.
If it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the main control board 100 transmits a payout stop command to the firing payout control board 200 to stop controlling the payout operation of game balls. As a result, while the door opening error is occurring, the firing and payout control board 200 performs control to stop the payout operation of game balls.

Note that among the payout-related errors, the errors whose occurrence is determined by the main control board 100 are not limited to the door opening error, and even if the occurrence of other errors is determined by the main control board 100. good.

In addition, in the main control board 100, errors related to devices connected to the main control board 100 (the above-mentioned main control radio wave error, main control magnetic error, main control vibration error, first starting prize opening 15, 2. Abnormal winning error that occurs when too many game balls enter the starting winning hole 16 and the big winning hole 18, and an unauthorized winning error that occurs when a gaming ball enters the big winning hole 18 other than when a special game is being executed. The occurrence of errors (hereinafter also referred to as main control related errors) is also determined.
When the main control board 100 detects the occurrence of a payout-related error other than a door opening error, or when it is determined that a door opening error or a main control-related error has occurred, the main CPU 101 An error suggestion command indicating the error that occurred is sent to the sub control board 300. As a result, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of various errors on the sub-control board 300 as well, display an error suggestion image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the production display device 21, and display various lamps in a manner corresponding to the error that has occurred. The error that has occurred is indicated by lighting up the panel display lamp GL, front door display lamp DL, and status notification lamp EL, or by outputting an error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that has occurred from the audio output device 10. It has become so.
In addition, when the cause of the error disappears and the error that has occurred is canceled, the main control board 100 may not be able to grasp the cancellation of the error that has occurred or A judgment is made. Then, when it is determined that the error that has occurred has been canceled, or when it is determined that the error that has occurred has been canceled, the main CPU 101 sends an error cancellation command indicating cancellation of the error to the sub control board 300. Send to. This makes it possible for the sub control board 300 to ascertain the cancellation of the error that has occurred, as well as to end the suggestion of the error that has occurred.

(Summary of sub-control board 300)
The sub-control board 300 controls effects performed during gaming, standby, and the like.
As shown in FIG. 6, this sub-control board 300 includes a sub-CPU 301 that performs various calculation processes, a sub-ROM 302 that stores control programs for executing effects, data and tables necessary for executing effects, and a sub-ROM 302 for storing data and tables necessary for executing effects. A sub-RAM 303 used as a temporary storage area during processing, etc., and is connected to enable communication in one direction from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.

Further, the sub CPU 301 reads a control program stored in the sub ROM 302 based on commands transmitted from the main control board 100 and signals from a timer and performs arithmetic processing, and performs image control for controlling image display. A board (not particularly shown), an audio control board (not particularly shown) for controlling audio output, an illumination control board (not particularly shown) for controlling lighting of various lamps, etc. ), a command for performance execution is transmitted to an operation control board (not particularly shown) for controlling the displacement of the role-playing device YS and the rotation performance of the role-playing object.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the audio control board and the illumination control board are provided separately, but the functions of these boards are integrated into one board (the audio illumination control board). ), and both the audio output and the lighting of the lighting may be controlled by the board.

Furthermore, the effect display device 21 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via an image control board, and the audio output device 10 and a cross-key detection sensor 25a that detects a pressing operation of the cross-key 25 are connected to the sub-control board 300 via an audio control board. It is connected. The sub-control board 300 also includes various lamps (front door display lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, panel display lamp GL, right-hand drive notification lamp RL), a light guide plate lamp BL, and an operation control board via an illumination control board. A rotational operation detection sensor 9c that detects a rotational operation of the dial 9a and a press operation detection sensor 9d that detects a press operation of the operation button 9b are connected. Further, a drive motor M and a rotation motor RM are connected to the sub-control board 300 via an operation control board.

Although not particularly shown, the image control board includes an image CPU, an image ROM, an image RAM, and the like. The image ROM of this image control board stores image data such as symbols and backgrounds to be displayed on the effect display device 21. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls image display by the effect display device 21 by storing the image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

Although not particularly shown, the audio control board includes a sound CPU (sound chip) that executes various processes related to audio output, audio output from the audio output device 10, and sound data such as BGM (hereinafter also referred to as audio etc.). A decoder that decodes sound data, a sound RAM that is used as a temporary storage area when executing various processes related to audio output, and a sound that measures the time when executing various processes related to audio output. Equipped with timer counter etc.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the voice control board receives a command from the sub-control board 300 (commands related to the execution of various performances and various suggestions, etc.), the decoder generates a sound corresponding to the received command. Data is read from the sound ROM and decoded. This decoder is equipped with a predetermined number (40 in this embodiment) of channels for outputting audio, etc., and can output a predetermined number of types of audio, etc. independently and simultaneously. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, each type of audio, etc. output in various performances and various suggestions, is associated with a channel used for outputting the audio, etc. in advance. As a result, audio and the like are output through channels that have been associated in advance. Then, the sound data decoded in each channel of the decoder is converted into analog data, and based on this analog data, predetermined audio etc. are output from the audio output device 10 via the output interface.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, each type of audio, etc. output in various performances and various suggestions, is associated in advance with a channel used for outputting the audio, etc. As a result, even if multiple types of audio, etc. are output at the same time at a given time, each audio, etc. is output using a separate channel. It is possible to prevent a situation in which audio, etc. is not output from occurring, and it is possible to reliably output multiple types of audio, etc. at the same time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described later, in addition to being able to set the volume of the audio output device 10 (hereinafter also referred to as speaker volume), when outputting audio etc. for each channel, The volume can be adjusted. Thereby, the audio etc. associated with each channel are output at the speaker volume adjusted for each channel.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, one of a plurality of channel adjustment values of "0", "1", and "2" can be set for each channel. When the channel adjustment value is "2", audio etc. are output at the currently set speaker volume (hereinafter also referred to as current speaker volume). Furthermore, when the channel adjustment value is "1", audio etc. are output at a volume that is 75% lower than the current speaker volume (25% of the current speaker volume). Furthermore, when the channel adjustment value is "0", audio etc. are output at a volume that is 100% lower than the current speaker volume (0% volume of the current speaker volume).
In other words, in a given channel, when the channel adjustment value is "1", the audio etc. associated with the channel is output at a lower volume than when the channel adjustment value is "2", so the channel adjustment value It is difficult to hear voices etc. compared to when the value is "2". Additionally, when the channel adjustment value is "0" for a given channel, the audio associated with the channel is output silently, so although the audio is being output, it is not possible to hear the audio. Can not.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine P recovers from a power outage, "2" is set as the initial value of the channel adjustment value for each channel. Further, data of the currently set channel adjustment value (hereinafter also referred to as current channel adjustment value) is stored in the sound RAM of the audio control board.
Note that the channel adjustment values that can be set are not limited to those described above, and it may be possible to set channel adjustment values in more stages so that the volume can be adjusted in more stages. good.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned speaker volume can be changed, by pressing the upper key or the lower key of the cross key 25, the speaker volume can be adjusted within a predetermined range of multiple levels. It can be changed within. Specifically, by pressing the up key, you can increase the speaker volume step by step until you reach the maximum volume in multiple stages, and by pressing the down key, you can increase the speaker volume in stages until it reaches the maximum volume in multiple stages. The speaker volume can be decreased in stages until the In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the speaker volume can be set within eight levels from "0" to "7"("0" is the minimum volume, "7" is the maximum volume). However, the range that can be set by operating the cross key 25 (hereinafter also referred to as the settable range) is preset in five levels from "3" to "7".
Further, various data related to the speaker volume are stored in the sub RAM 303 of the sub control board 300.

The illumination control board controls various lamps (front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, panel performance lamp GL, right-hand drive lamp, etc.) based on commands from the sub-control board 300 (commands related to execution of various effects and various suggestions, etc.). Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the notification lamp RL) and the light guide plate lamp BL. The illumination control board also receives a rotational operation detection signal outputted from the rotational operation detection sensor 9c based on the rotational operation of the operation dial 9a, or a pressdown outputted from the pressdown operation detection sensor 9d based on the pressed operation of the operation button 9b. When the operation detection signal is input, a predetermined command is sent to the sub control board 300.

The operation control board controls the driving of the drive motor M and the rotary motor RM based on commands from the sub-control board 300. Then, by driving the drive motor M, the performance accessory device YS is vertically displaced within the range between the initial position and the movable position, and by driving the rotary motor RM, the performance accessory device YS is moved to the movable position. A rotating effect (a rotating effect clockwise or counterclockwise) will be performed.

(Overview of power supply board 600)
The power supply board 600 supplies power to each board such as the main control board 100, the firing and dispensing control board 200, and the sub-control board 300. This power supply board 600 is provided with a backup power supply. Furthermore, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is provided with a power failure detection circuit for detecting the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply board 600. This power supply detection circuit detects that a power outage has occurred when the voltage value of the supplied power falls below a predetermined value (for example, when the power switch 650 is turned off or an unexpected power outage occurs). After making a judgment, a power outage occurrence signal is sent to the main control board 100. In addition, if the voltage value becomes larger than a predetermined value (for example, when the power switch 650 is turned on or when the power is restored from an unexpected power cut), it is determined that the power has recovered from the power cut, and the main control board The transmission of the power outage occurrence signal to 100 is stopped.

Then, when the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 detects a power outage occurrence signal (a power outage occurs), it prohibits access to the main RAM 103 and checks the main RAM 103 (used area and unused area). In addition to calculating the sum and setting the backup flag, various data stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103 (setting values, gaming machine status flag indicating the control status, test signal information, checksum, backup flag, error information) , various data related to the progress of the game (first number of reserved special symbols, number of second reserved symbols, execution phase data indicating the progress of the special symbol game, number of reserved symbols, general symbol indicating the progress status of the regular symbol game) Performs backup processing to maintain execution phase data), gaming performance data, and so on. If the power outage signal is no longer detected (recovered from the power outage), compare the checksum calculated at the time of the power outage with the checksum calculated at the time of recovery from the power outage, and check the occurrence of the power outage. By checking the backup flag set at the time, it is possible to determine whether there is a mismatch between the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of the power outage and the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of recovery from the power outage (i.e., It is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the backup process described above, and then the process at the time of power failure recovery is executed.

Here, in order to prevent the processing when a power outage occurs from becoming complicated, the sub control board 300 in this embodiment is not provided with a power outage detection circuit, and the sub control board 300 is equipped with the above-mentioned power outage detection circuit. No backup processing is performed. Therefore, when the power is restored from a power outage, the sub CPU 301 controls the effects based on the various commands described above sent from the main CPU 101, so that an appropriate effect can be executed at that time.

In addition, when the main CPU 101 no longer detects the power outage occurrence signal (recovers from the power outage), when the game-enabled state or setting change state described below is set, at this point, the main CPU 101 also changes the setting confirmation state described below. When set, an initial processing execution signal for executing an initial processing for stopping the accessory presentation device YS at the initial position is transmitted to the sub control board 300 when the setting confirmation state is completed. When this initial processing execution signal is received, the sub control board 300 executes the initial processing of the accessory presentation device YS.
Specifically, when this initial process is executed, the accessory performance device YS moves to the movable position and then moves to the initial position. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the time from the start to the end of the initial process is 25 seconds.

(Summary of games on pachinko machine P)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be explained based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the special figure game and the regular figure game proceed in parallel. The gaming states when playing these two games are either a low probability gaming state (so-called non-probability variable state) or a high probability gaming state (so-called probability variable state), and a non-time-saving gaming state or time-saving gaming state. Any gaming state that is a combination of any one of the gaming states is set.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state), or a gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state). One of the gaming states (referred to as a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) is set.

Here, the low probability gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set to a predetermined value in a jackpot lottery to be described later. Further, the high probability gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery is set to a higher value than in the low probability gaming state. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot through a jackpot lottery during a high probability gaming state than during a low probability gaming state.
In addition, the non-time-saving gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable piece 16b is difficult to open (that is, the second starting prize opening 16 is difficult to open) and the game ball is difficult to enter the second starting winning opening 16. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is easier to open than in the non-time-saving game state (that is, the second starting prize opening 16 is more likely to be in the open state), and the game ball is easier to enter the second starting winning opening 16. state.
Note that the normal gaming state is set immediately after factory shipment or in the initial state after reset.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a firing device (not shown) and flowing down the gaming area 12 enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, a jackpot is won. A lottery will be held. When a jackpot is won in this jackpot lottery, a special game is executed in which the jackpot 18 is opened and a game ball can be entered into the jackpot 18, and furthermore, after the special game ends, The gaming state is set to a high probability time saving gaming state.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15. In addition, the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big prize opening 18, pass through the gate 20, and enter the second starting prize opening 16. During the normal gaming state, the player is made to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, and During the probability time saving game state and the special game, the player is asked to enter the second starting prize opening so that the game ball enters the big winning opening 18 or the gaming ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the second starting winning opening 16. A game ball is launched toward the game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit).
Specifically, during the high probability time-saving game state and the special game, a display instructing to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b is displayed on the effect display device 21, and the normal game state is set. Then, a display is displayed on the effect display device 21 instructing to launch a game ball toward the first game area 12a. In addition, the right-hand hitting notification lamp RL is turned on during the high probability time-saving game state and the special game, and the right-hand hitting notification lamp RL is turned off during the normal game state.

In addition, the jackpot lottery is based on various random numbers obtained when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, and the random number stored in the main ROM 102. This is done based on various tables for determination.
Here, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment uses, as random numbers used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot determination random number used to determine a jackpot, a winning symbol random number used to determine the type of special symbol, and the above-mentioned variable production. (hereinafter referred to as a variable performance pattern), a reach group determination random number, a reach mode determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern number.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a hardware random number built into the main control board 100 is used as the above-mentioned jackpot determining random number. This jackpot determination random number is updated according to certain rules, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the random number sequence goes around, and the starting value is changed every time the system is reset.
In addition, the random numbers used to determine the fluctuation performance pattern are not limited to the three types mentioned above. For example, other random numbers may be used in addition to these random numbers, or any one of these random numbers may be used. Alternatively, a plurality of random numbers may be used.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a random value is acquired for each of the above-mentioned random numbers, and each random value is stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103. It looks like this.
This reservation storage area includes a first reservation storage area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as a first special figure random number) obtained by entering a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and It is composed of a second reserved storage area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as a second special figure random number) obtained by entering a game ball into the second starting winning hole 16. Each of these reserved storage areas is composed of a total of four storage sections, from the first storage section to the fourth storage section, and stores a total of 4 sets of first special pattern random numbers and a total of 4 sets of second special pattern random numbers. Sets can be stored.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15, the first special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage part of the first reservation storage area. It has become. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is not stored in any of the storage units of the first reservation storage area, the game ball is acquired using this as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the first storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part of the first reservation storage area, the game ball is acquired using this as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the second storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part and the second storage part of the first reservation storage area, this The first special figure random number acquired at this opportunity is stored in the third storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part to the third storage part of the first reservation storage area, this The first special figure random number acquired at this opportunity is stored in the fourth storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first reservation storage area, this input The first special figure random number related to the ball is not stored.

Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the second special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage part of the second reservation storage area. The specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special figure random number described above, so the explanation will be omitted.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of sets of first special figure random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the first special figure reserve number) stored in the first reserve storage area is stored in the first special figure reserve number counter ( The number of sets of second special figure random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the second special figure reserve number) stored in the second reserve storage area (not particularly shown) is stored in the second special figure reserve number counter ( (not particularly shown).
In addition, in this specification, as mentioned above, storing the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number in the pending storage area is also referred to as "holding" or "holding memory", and The number of reserved figures and the number of second special figures reserved are also simply referred to as the "number of reserved figures."

In addition, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a jackpot determination random number determination table 110, a winning symbol random number determination table 111, a reach group determination random number determination table 112, a reach mode determination random number determination table 113, and tables related to the jackpot lottery. , and has a variable pattern lottery table 114.
Note that the table related to the jackpot lottery is not limited to these, and other tables may be provided as appropriate if it is necessary to make judgments or decisions based on random numbers.

The jackpot determination random number determination table 110 is for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and is roughly divided into a low probability determination table that is referred to in a low probability gaming state, and a high probability determination table that is referred to in a high probability gaming state. It is equipped with a judgment table.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 7(a) to (l), each of the low probability determination table and the high probability determination table is provided with six types depending on the setting values being set.
Specifically, the low probability determination table includes a first low probability determination table 110a that is referred to when the set value is "1", and a second low probability determination table 110a that is referred to when the set value is "2". A determination table 110b, a third low probability determination table 110c that is referred to when the set value is "3", a fourth low probability determination table 110d that is referred to when the set value is "4", and a third low probability determination table 110c that is referred to when the set value is "4"; A fifth low probability determination table 110e that is referred to when the set value is "5" and a sixth low probability determination table 110f that is referred to when the set value is "6" are provided.
The high probability determination table includes a first high probability determination table 110g that is referred to when the set value is "1", a second high probability determination table 110h that is referred to when the set value is "2", and settings. The third high probability determination table 110i is referred to when the value is "3", the fourth high probability determination table 110j is referred to when the set value is "4", and the fourth high probability determination table 110j is referred to when the set value is "5". A fifth high probability determination table 110k that is referred to when the set value is "6" and a sixth high probability determination table 110l that is referred to when the set value is "6" are provided.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one jackpot determination random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, one of the jackpot determination random number determination tables 110 described above is selected according to the setting values set in the pachinko machine P and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the obtained jackpot determination random number and A jackpot lottery is performed based on the selected jackpot determination random number determination table 110.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), according to the first low probability determination table 110a, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot deciding random number is 10001 to 10205, and other jackpot deciding random numbers (0 to 10000, 10206 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this first low probability determination table 110a is approximately 1/319.7.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), according to the second low probability determination table 110b, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10208, and other jackpot determination random numbers (0 to 10000, 10209 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this second low probability determination table 110b is approximately 1/315.1.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), according to the third low probability determination table 110c, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10212, and other jackpot determination random numbers (0 to 10000, 10213 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this third low probability determination table 110c is approximately 1/309.1.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), according to the fourth low probability determination table 110d, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10215, and other jackpot determination random numbers (0 to 10000, 10216 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this fourth low probability determination table 110d is approximately 1/304.8.

As shown in FIG. 7(e), according to the fifth low probability determination table 110e, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10219, and other jackpot determination random numbers (0 to 10000, 10220 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this fifth low probability determination table 110e is approximately 1/299.2.

As shown in FIG. 7(f), according to the sixth low probability determination table 110f, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10223, and other jackpot determination random numbers (0 to 10000, 10224 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this sixth low probability determination table 110a is approximately 1/293.9.

As shown in FIG. 7(g), according to the first high probability determination table 110g, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot deciding random number is 10001 to 11024, and other jackpot deciding random numbers (0 to 10000, 11025 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this first high probability determination table 110g is 1/64.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(h), according to the second high probability determination table 110h, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot deciding random number is 10001 to 11040, and other jackpot deciding random numbers (0 to 10000, 11041 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this second high probability determination table 110h is approximately 1/63.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(i), according to the third high probability determination table 110i, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 11057, and other jackpot determination random numbers (0 to 10000, 11058 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this third high probability determination table 110i is approximately 1/62.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(j), according to the fourth high probability determination table 110j, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 11074, and other jackpot determination random numbers (0 to 10000, 11075 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this fourth high probability determination table 110j is approximately 1/61.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(k), according to the fifth high probability determination table 110k, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot deciding random number is 10001 to 11092, and other jackpot deciding random numbers (0 to 10000, 11093 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this fifth high probability determination table 110k is approximately 1/60.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(l), according to the sixth high probability determination table 110l, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot deciding random number is 10001 to 11110, and other jackpot deciding random numbers (0 to 10000, 11111 ~65535), it is determined that the result is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in this sixth high probability determination table 110l is approximately 1/59.0.

As mentioned above, when comparing high probability determination tables and low probability determination tables with the same associated setting values, the high probability determination table has approximately 5 times the probability of winning the jackpot compared to the low probability determination table. It is set to be.

In addition, the jackpot determining random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot in the low probability determination table are included in the jackpot determining random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability determination table that is associated with the same setting value as the low probability determination table. It is set. That is, a jackpot determination random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the low probability determination table will also be determined to be a jackpot in the high probability determination table to which the same setting value is associated.

The winning symbol random number determination table 111 is for determining the type of special symbol, and is referred to when a jackpot is won by the first special symbol random number, as shown in FIGS. 8(a) and (b). A first starting winning hole determination table 111a, and a second starting winning hole determining table 111b that is referred to when a jackpot is won by the second special drawing random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one winning symbol random number within the numerical value range of 0 to 199 is obtained. When a jackpot is won in the above-mentioned jackpot lottery, the winning of either the first starting winning opening determination table 111a or the second starting winning opening determination table 111b is determined according to the starting winning opening into which the game ball enters. The symbol random number determination table 111 is selected, and the type of special symbol is determined based on the acquired winning symbol random number and the selected winning symbol random number determination table 111.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, two types of special symbols (X1, X2) are provided as special symbols that are determined when winning a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as jackpot symbols). Two types of special symbols (Y1, Y2) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter referred to as losing symbols) determined in each case.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), according to the first starting winning hole determination table 111a, the special symbol X1 is determined when the winning symbol random number is between 0 and 99, and when the winning symbol random number is between 100 and 199. In this case, special symbol X2 is determined. That is, in this first starting winning hole determination table 111a, the probability that the special symbol X1 is determined and the probability that the special symbol X2 is determined are both 50%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8(b), according to the second starting winning hole determination table 111b, the special symbol X1 is determined when the winning symbol random number is 0 to 159, and the special symbol X1 is determined when the winning symbol random number is 160 to 199. If so, special symbol X2 is determined. That is, in this second starting winning hole determination table 111b, the probability that the special symbol X1 will be determined is 80%, and the probability that the special symbol X2 will be determined is 20%.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the same jackpot symbol is determined no matter which winning symbol random number determination table 111 is used, but this is not limited to this, and each table Different jackpot symbols may be determined.

Further, if the jackpot lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss, the special symbol Y1 is determined as the losing symbol without performing the above-mentioned lottery based on the winning symbol random number. In addition, if the jackpot lottery based on the second special symbol random number results in a loss, the special symbol Y2 is determined as the losing symbol without performing the above-mentioned lottery based on the winning symbol random number.
That is, the winning symbol random number determination table 111 is referenced only when a jackpot is won, and is not referenced when the player loses.

The reach group determination random number determination table 112, the reach mode determination random number determination table 113, and the fluctuation pattern lottery table 114 are tables used to determine the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number for determining the fluctuation performance pattern.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a special symbol is determined by a jackpot lottery as described above, a variable mode number and a variable pattern number for determining a variable production pattern are determined based on the result of the determination. At the same time, a variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number and a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern number are generated. Then, the generated variation mode command and variation pattern command are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 determines the jackpot lottery based on the received variation mode command and variation pattern command. A specific aspect of the variable effect (for example, an image to be displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, etc.) for notifying the result is determined. The fluctuation mode command and the fluctuation pattern command are commands used to determine the fluctuation time and mode of the fluctuation effect.

The reach group determination random number determination table 112 is for determining the group to which the reach mode determination random number determination table 113 used to determine the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number belongs. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is a loss, when determining the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number, as a preliminary step, a reach group determination random number and a reach group determination random number determination table are used. In step 112, the type of group is determined.
This reach group determination random number determination table 112 shows the gaming status, the type of starting prize opening related to the determination of the jackpot lottery (that is, which starting prize opening the jackpot determining random number used to determine the jackpot lottery is entered into) A plurality of numbers are provided for each number of reserved special symbols (1st special figure reserved number, 2nd special figure reserved number). Here, as shown in FIGS. 9(a) to 9(c), the gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state and the jackpot lottery result based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 is a loss. The reach group determination random number determination table 112 selected when The reach group determination random number determination table 112 that is selected in the case will be described.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one reach group determining random number within the numerical range of 0 to 10006 is obtained. Then, when the jackpot lottery described above results in a loss, the reach group determination random number determination table 112 is selected according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot lottery, the type of starting winning opening, and the number of reservations. , the type of group is determined based on the acquired reach group determination random number and the selected reach group determination random number determination table 112.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state and the result of the jackpot lottery based on the first special random number obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 is a loss. , if the number of reserved first special symbols at the time of the lottery is 0 or 1, the first determination table 112a is selected, and if the number of reserved first special symbols at the time of the lottery is 2 or more, the first determination table 112a is selected. , the second determination table 112b is selected (see FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b)).
In addition, if the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state and the result of the jackpot lottery based on the second special random number obtained by entering the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 is a loss, the said lottery If the number of reserved second special symbols at the time is 0 to 3 (that is, whatever number the number of reserved second special symbols is), the third determination table 112c is selected (FIG. 9(c) reference).

As shown in FIG. 9A, according to the first determination table 112a, the "first group" is determined when the reach group determination random number is 0 to 299, and the "first group" is determined when the reach group determination random number is 300 to 299. If the reach group determination random number is 8999, the "second group" is determined, if the reach group determination random number is between 9000 and 9899, the "fourth group" is determined, and when the reach group determination random number is between 9900 and 10006. A "fifth group" is determined.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9B, according to the second determination table 112b, the "second group" is determined when the reach group determination random number is between 0 and 8999, and when the reach group determination random number is between 9000 and 8999, the "second group" is determined. When the reach group determination random number is 9899, the "fourth group" is determined, and when the reach group determination random number is between 9900 and 10006, the "fifth group" is determined.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9(c), according to the third determination table 112c, the "first group" is determined when the reach group determination random number is between 0 and 7999, and when the reach group determination random number is between 8000 and 7999. When the reach group determination random number is 8999, the "third group" is determined, and when the reach group determination random number is between 9000 and 10006, the "fifth group" is determined.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the reach mode determination random number determination table 113 is determined without determining the type of group. That is, the reach group determination random number determination table 112 is referred to only when the lottery result of a jackpot is a loss, and is not referred to when the lottery result is a jackpot.

The reach mode determination random number determination table 113 determines the fluctuation mode number used for determining the fluctuation performance pattern (variation performance mode, fluctuation time), and also determines the fluctuation pattern lottery table 114 used for determining the fluctuation pattern number, which will be described later. It is for deciding.
This reach mode determination random number determination table 113 is roughly divided into a loss determination table that is referred to when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and a jackpot determination table that is referred to when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is equipped with a judgment table for use.

Further, a plurality of loss determination tables are provided for each type of group determined as described above. Here, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10E, the first group determination table 113a is referred to when the "first group" is determined, and the first group determination table 113a is referred to when the "second group" is determined. The second group determination table 113b that is referred to, the third group determination table 113c that is referred to when the "third group" is determined, and the fourth group that is referred to when the "fourth group" is determined. The fifth group determination table 113d and the fifth group determination table 113e, which are referred to when the "fifth group" is determined, will be described.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one reach mode determining random number within the numerical range of 0 to 2038 is obtained. Then, when a group is determined by the above-mentioned group type lottery, the loss determination table corresponding to the determined group type is selected, and the obtained reach mode determination random number and the selected loss determination table are selected. The variable mode number and the variable pattern lottery table 114 are determined based on the table.

Specifically, for example, when the "first group" is determined by the above-mentioned group type lottery, the first group determination table 113a is selected, and when the "second group" is determined, the second If the group determination table 113b is selected and the "third group" is determined, the third group determination table 113c is selected, and if the "fourth group" is determined, the fourth group determination table 113d is selected. When the "fifth group" is selected, the fifth group determination table 113e is selected (see FIGS. 10(a) to (e)).

As shown in FIG. 10A, according to the first group determination table 113a, if the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038 (that is, no matter what value the reach mode determination random number is), ), "00H" (alphanumeric characters with "H" at the end are expressed in hexadecimal notation. The same applies hereinafter) are determined, and the first fluctuation table 114a is selected.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10(b), according to the second group determination table 113b, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038, a variable mode number of "00H" is determined, and The second variation table 114b is selected.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10(c), according to the third group determination table 113c, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038, a variable mode number of "00H" is determined, and The third variation table 114c is selected.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10(d), according to the fourth group determination table 113d, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038, a variable mode number of "01H" is determined, and The fourth variation table 114d is selected.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10(e), according to the fifth group determination table 113e, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 1799, the variable mode number "02H" is determined, and The fifth variation table 114e is selected. Further, when the reach mode determination random number is between 1800 and 2038, the variation mode number "03H" is determined and the fifth variation table 114e is selected.

In addition, the jackpot determination table includes the gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot (that is, at the time of drawing a jackpot), the type of starting prize opening related to the jackpot drawing judgment, and the jackpot symbol determined in the case of a jackpot. Multiple types are provided for each type.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11(a) to 11(c), the jackpot determination table is obtained by entering a game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 in the non-time-saving gaming state. For the first jackpot, which is referred to when the special symbol X1 or Judgment table 113f, the second jackpot that is referred to when the special symbol X1 or X2 is determined based on the first special symbol random number obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 in the time-saving gaming state. It is referred to when the special symbol X1 or A third jackpot determination table 113h is provided.

Then, when you win a jackpot and the type of special symbol is determined, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of starting prize opening (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number), and the determined special symbol. The jackpot determination table corresponding to the type of symbol is selected, and the fluctuation mode number is determined based on the acquired reach mode determination random number and the selected jackpot determination table, similar to the determination based on the loss determination table described above. and the variable pattern lottery table 114 are determined.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won and the special symbol X1 or X2 is determined based on the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number in the non-time saving gaming state, the first jackpot determination table 113f is selected. , when a jackpot is won and the special symbol X1 or X2 is determined based on the first special pattern random number in the time-saving gaming state, the second jackpot determination table 113g is selected, and the second special pattern random number is selected in the time-saving gaming state. When a jackpot is won and the special symbol X1 or X2 is determined based on this, the third jackpot determination table 113h is selected (see FIGS. 11(a) to (c)).

As shown in FIG. 11(a), according to the first jackpot determination table 113f, when the reach mode determination random number is from 0 to 199, the fluctuation mode number of "01H" is determined, The 30th variation table 114f is selected. Further, when the reach mode determination random number is between 200 and 1299, the variation mode number "02H" is determined and the 31st variation table 114g is selected. Furthermore, when the reach mode determination random number is between 1300 and 2038, the variation mode number "03H" is determined and the 32nd variation table 114h is selected.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(b), according to the second jackpot determination table 113g, when the reach mode determination random number is 0 to 999, the fluctuation mode number of "02H" is determined and the second jackpot determination table 113g is determined. When the No. 31 fluctuation table 114g is selected and the reach mode determination random number is between 1000 and 2038, the fluctuation mode number "03H" is determined and the No. 32 fluctuation table 114h is selected.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(c), according to the third jackpot determination table 113h, when the reach mode determination random number is 0 to 999, the fluctuation mode number of "A2H" is determined and the When the 31st variation table 114g is selected and the reach mode determination random number is between 1000 and 2038, the variation mode number "A3H" is determined and the 32nd variation table 114h is selected. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variable mode numbers of "A2H" and "A3H" are used when a jackpot is won and the special symbol X1 or X2 is determined based on the second special symbol random number in the time-saving gaming state. It is determined only by

The variable pattern lottery table 114 is for determining a variable pattern number used for determining a variable effect pattern (variable effect mode, variable time), and is provided in large numbers.
Here, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12H, a first fluctuation table 114a, a second fluctuation table 114b, a third fluctuation table 114c, which are determined when the jackpot lottery result is a loss, The fourth variation table 114d, the fifth variation table 114e, and the 30th variation table 114f, 31st variation table 114g, and 32nd variation table 114h that are determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot will be described.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one variable pattern random number within the numerical value range of 0 to 249 is obtained. Then, a variation pattern number is determined based on the obtained variation pattern random number and the variation pattern lottery table 114 determined together with the above-mentioned variation mode number.
For example, as shown in FIG. 12(a), according to the first variation table 114a, if the variation pattern random number is 0 to 249 (that is, no matter what value the variation pattern random number is), "00H" The fluctuation pattern number is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 12(d), according to the fourth variation table 114d, when the variation pattern random number is between 0 and 249, a variation pattern number of "05H" is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12(g), according to the 31st variation table 114g, when the variation pattern random number is between 0 and 249, a variation pattern number "A6H" is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 12(h), according to the 32nd variation table 114h, a variation pattern number "A6H" is determined when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 89, and a variation pattern number "A6H" is determined when the variation pattern random number is 90 to 89. 249, a variation pattern number "A7H" is determined.
Similarly, a predetermined variation pattern number is determined in accordance with the variation pattern random number using other variation pattern tables 114 as well (see FIG. 12).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery as described above is carried out at the start of the fluctuation (that is, at the start of the fluctuation display of special symbols described later (at the start of the fluctuation production)). At the same time, when a jackpot lottery is held, the variable mode number and A variation pattern number is determined. As mentioned above, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are for determining the variation effect pattern, and the variation mode number and the variation pattern number determine the mode and variation time of the variation effect. Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variable performance is divided into a first half and a second half. The mode and variation time of the first half of the variable effect are determined by the variation mode number, and the mode and variation time of the second half of the variable effect are determined by the variation pattern number.

Next, the process of determining the variable time of the variable performance in the special figure game and the control of the special game will be explained.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a variable time determination table 115, a special electric accessory operation table 116, a game state setting table 117, etc. as tables for controlling the above-described determination processing and special games. There is.

The variable time determination table 115 is for determining the variable time.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a first variable time determination table as the variable time determination table 115 in which the variable time of the first half of the variable performance (hereinafter referred to as first half variable time) corresponding to each variable mode number is determined. 115a, and a second variation time determination table 115b in which the variation time of the latter half of the variation performance (hereinafter referred to as "second half variation time") corresponding to each variation pattern number is determined (FIGS. 13A and 13B). b)).

Then, once the variation mode number is determined, the corresponding first half variation time is determined based on the determined variation mode number and the first variation time determination table 115a. Furthermore, once the variation pattern number is determined, the corresponding second half variation time is determined based on the determined variation pattern number and the second variation time determination table 115b. The total value of the first half variation time and the second half variation time determined in this way corresponds to the entire variation time of the variation performance that informs the result of the jackpot lottery.
Also, based on the variable time determined as described above, the effect display device 21 performs a variable effect, and the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 30 or second special symbol display device 31) A variable display of symbols is performed. Specifically, when the starting winning hole into which the game ball enters is the first starting winning hole 15, the first special symbol display device 30 blinks during the determined variable time, and the game ball enters the starting winning hole. When the starting winning hole that has hit the ball is the second starting winning hole 16, the second special symbol display device 31 is displayed blinking during the determined variable time. Then, after the elapse of the variable time, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed.

For example, if the determined fluctuation mode number is "03H" and the fluctuation pattern number is "06H", the first half fluctuation time of "20 seconds" is determined corresponding to the fluctuation mode number "03H", and the fluctuation The second half variation time of "45 seconds" is determined corresponding to the pattern number "06H". The total value of these "65 seconds (=20 seconds + 45 seconds)" becomes the entire variation time of the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the first half variation time of "0 seconds" is defined for the variation mode number "00H", and when this variation mode number is determined, the variation effect of The first half is not executed, and only the second half of the variation effect is executed based on the determined variation pattern number. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, since the variable mode number "00H" is determined only when the jackpot lottery result is a loss (see FIGS. 10 and 11), the variable mode number is determined. In this case, a loss indication will always be displayed in the variable performance.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined, the variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number and the determined variation pattern are A variation pattern command corresponding to the number is generated and sent to the sub control board 300. Then, in the sub-control board 300, the mode of the variation effect is determined based on the received variation mode command and variation pattern command. Specifically, the aspect of the first half of the variable effect is determined based on the variable mode command, and the aspect of the latter half of the variable effect is determined based on the variable pattern command.
Regarding the aspect of the fluctuating effect, instead of determining the aspect of the first half of the fluctuating effect based on the fluctuating mode command and determining the aspect of the second half of the fluctuating effect based on the fluctuating pattern command, The mode of the first half of the variable effect may be determined based on the variation mode command, and the mode of the second half of the variable effect may be determined based on the variable mode command.
Furthermore, instead of dividing the fluctuating performance into the first half and the second half, the fluctuating performance may be divided into more parts, and the mode of each part may be determined based on the fluctuating mode command or the fluctuating pattern command. .
Further, the mode of the variation effect may be determined based on not only the variation mode command and the variation pattern command but also other commands. Alternatively, the determination may be made based only on either the variable mode command or the variable pattern command.

The special electric accessory actuation table 116 is for controlling a special game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and is referenced to operate the jackpot solenoid 18c during execution of the special game. be. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b), the special electric accessory actuation table 116 includes a first actuation table 116a that is referred to when the special symbol X1 is determined. , and a second operation table 116b that is referred to when the special symbol X2 is determined.

Specifically, when the special symbol X1 is determined, a special game is executed with reference to the first operation table 116a, as shown in FIG. 14(a). According to this first operation table 116a, the game ends when either of the following conditions is met: the grand prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the grand prize opening 18. A round game is executed 10 times. Also, during the execution of each round game, the big winning hole 18 is opened only once, and the time during which the big winning hole 18 closes between each round game (namely, the interval time) is set to 2.0 seconds.
In this special game, the player can win a predetermined number of prize balls with an expected value.

Moreover, when the special symbol X2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 14(b), a special game is executed with reference to the second operation table 116b. According to the second operation table 116b, the same round game as the first operation table 116a is executed four times. Further, the number of times the big prize opening 18 is opened and closed and the interval time during the execution of each round game are set to the same contents as the first operation table 116a.
In this special game, the player can win prize balls with a smaller expected value than in the special game when the special symbol X1 is determined.

The game state setting table 117 is for setting the game state after the end of the special game when the special game is executed.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, regardless of whether the special symbol X1 or the special symbol Set. Further, the number of times the high probability gaming state continues (hereinafter referred to as the high probability number) and the number of times the time saving gaming state continues (hereinafter referred to as the number of time saving times) are both set to 100 times. That is, after the end of the special game, the high probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the jackpot lottery is derived 100 times. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won during the continuation of this gaming state, the high-accuracy count and time-saving count are set again. Therefore, if a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and all 100 lottery results are loses without winning a jackpot while this game state continues, the game state changes to the normal game state. It will be done.

Note that the gaming state after the end of the special game may be determined based on the type of special symbol determined by a jackpot lottery. For example, if either the special symbol X1 or , a game state that is a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state may be set.

Next, processing related to the general figure game will be explained.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a firing device (not shown) and flowing down the gaming area 12 passes through the gate 20, the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is actuated. A lottery of normal symbols is performed to determine whether or not to open the movable piece 16b. When a winning result is obtained by drawing this normal symbol, the movable piece 16b opens and the second starting winning hole 16 becomes open, making it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole 16.
This normal symbol lottery is based on a winning random number obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 20 and a winning random number determination table 118 stored in the main ROM 102 and used to determine the random number. It will be held.

Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the above-mentioned winning determination random number is obtained, and the random number is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 103, with an upper limit of four. Specifically, this common map reservation storage area is made up of a total of four storage parts, from the first storage part to the fourth storage part, and the data are stored in the order in which the gates 20 are passed, starting from the first storage part. It has become. In addition, if the random number determined to hit has already been stored in some storage units, the random number determined to hit is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number among the empty storage units. Then, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20 when four winning random numbers have already been stored in the general pattern reservation storage area, the winning determination random numbers related to this passage will not be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area. .
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a hardware random number built into the main control board 100 is used as the winning determination random number. This winning determination random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes around, and the starting value is changed every time the system is reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of winning determination random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the number of reserved figures) stored in the reserved memory area of ordinary figures is determined by the number of reserved figures of ordinary figures counter (not particularly shown). is stored in the memory.
In addition, in this specification, as mentioned above, the fact that the winning determination random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage area is also referred to as "general pattern reservation".

In addition, the winning determination random number determination table 118 is used to determine whether or not there is a hit by drawing a normal symbol, and as shown in FIGS. It includes a non-time-saving determination table 118a that is used, and a time-saving determination table 118b that is referred to in the time-saving gaming state.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the gate 20, one winning determination random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. If the gaming state at the time of drawing a normal symbol is a non-time-saving gaming state, the non-time-saving determination table 118a is selected, and the normal symbol is determined based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected non-time-saving determination table 118a. A drawing will be held. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing a normal symbol is a time-saving game state, the time-saving determination table 118b is selected, and a normal symbol is drawn based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected time-saving determination table 118b. will be held.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as mentioned above, the special game and the regular game are played in parallel, and even during the special game that is executed due to winning a jackpot, Based on the game ball passing through the gate 20, a lottery of normal symbols is carried out. During the special game, the non-time-saving determination table 118a is selected, and a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the table (see FIG. 16(a)).

According to the non-time-saving determination table 118a, if the winning random number is 1, it is determined to be a win, and if it is any other winning determining random number (0, 2 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in this non-time-saving determination table 118a is 1/65536.
Furthermore, according to the time saving determination table 118b, it is determined that the winning random number is between 1 and 65,000, and it is determined that the game is a loss when the winning random number is any other number (0, 65,001 to 65,535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this time saving determination table 118b is 65000/65536, that is, approximately 99/100.
In addition, if the drawing of normal symbols results in a win, the winning symbol is determined, and if the lottery results in a loss, the losing symbol is determined.

In addition, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 119, a second starting prize opening control table 120, etc. as tables related to the fluctuation of the regular symbols and the control of opening and closing of the movable piece 16b. ing.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table 119 is for determining the variation pattern of normal symbols. Each normal symbol fluctuation pattern is associated with a normal symbol fluctuation time. As described above, when a normal symbol is drawn by passing the game ball through the gate 20, the normal symbol variation pattern (that is, the normal symbol variation time) is based on the normal symbol variation pattern determination table 119. ) is determined.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state or during a special game, the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be 13 seconds, and the game state is set to a time-saving game state. In this case, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 0.6 seconds. Then, when the normal symbol variation time is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 (see FIG. 3A) is displayed blinking during the determined normal symbol variation time. If the drawing of normal symbols results in a win and a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 lights up, and if the lottery results in a loss and a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 lights up. Lights out.

In addition, the second starting winning opening control table 120 is referred to in order to control the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 lights up, the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning hole 16 opens and closes in a manner determined in the second starting winning hole opening control table 120. ing. Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state or during a special game, the starting prize opening solenoid 16c is energized for 0.2 seconds (=0.2 seconds x 1 time) as shown in FIG. Therefore, the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In addition, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 18, the starting winning port solenoid 16c is energized for 5.6 seconds (=2.8 seconds x 2 times), so the second starting winning port The 16 movable pieces 16b are opened for a total of 5.6 seconds.

As mentioned above, the conditions for opening and closing the second starting prize opening 16 are set for the non-time saving gaming state and the working time saving gaming state, and depending on the contents of these conditions, the non-time saving gaming state is set in the non-time saving gaming state. It is easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening 16 than in the current state. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, as long as the game balls pass through the gate 20, the normal symbols are drawn one after another and the second starting prize opening 16 is frequently opened, so the number of game balls decreases as the game progresses. This means that you can get a chance to win a jackpot lottery while suppressing the amount of money.

(Summary of processing at power failure recovery in main control board 100)
As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine P is turned on from off (recovered from a power outage), the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stays in the computer before the power is turned off (immediately before the power outage occurs). Control status, ON or OFF of the setting switch 108 at the time the power is turned on (at the time of recovery from power failure), ON or OFF of the RAM clear switch 109, ON or OFF of the main body frame open detection sensor 2a (opening of the main body frame 2) or closed), depending on whether an abnormality occurs in the backup processing of the main RAM 103 (hereinafter referred to as a backup abnormality) that is performed at the time the power is turned off, or whether an abnormality in the main RAM 103 (hereinafter referred to as a RAM abnormality) occurs. to set one of the control states.

(Occurrence and release of backup abnormality and RAM abnormality in main control board 100)
Here, occurrence and release of backup abnormality and RAM abnormality in main control board 100 will be explained.
When recovering from a power failure, if there is a mismatch between the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of the power failure and the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of recovery from the power failure, it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred, and the above-mentioned failure occurs. If no consistency has occurred, it is determined that no backup error has occurred.
This backup abnormality is likely to occur due to a temporary cause (for example, a failure in reading or holding data due to a temporary abnormality in one of the devices). Further, when the main ROM 102, main RAM 103, etc. are newly installed and the power of the pachinko machine P is turned on, a backup abnormality will definitely occur because the backup process has not been executed before this.

Furthermore, if data cannot be read or written within the used area of the main RAM 103, it is determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is determined only within the used area, and if it is impossible to read or write data in the unused area, a RAM abnormality occurs. It is not considered that it did. Note that not only the inside of the used area but also both the inside of the used area and the unused area may be subject to determination of the occurrence of a RAM abnormality. When this setting is made, if it is impossible to read or write data in at least one of the used area and unused area, it is determined that a RAM error has occurred, and the processing (abnormality) described later is performed. (initialization processing, setting of game stop state) may be performed.
This RAM abnormality is likely to occur due to an abnormality in the hardware itself, such as chip damage, and the main RAM 103 will need to be replaced or repaired.

If a backup abnormality occurs when the power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed, and a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of the backup abnormality. Further, if a RAM abnormality occurs during power recovery, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. In addition, when a backup abnormality and a RAM abnormality occur simultaneously, an abnormality initialization process is executed, and a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set in priority to the backup abnormality.
As will be described later, in the abnormality initialization process that is executed when the gaming stop state is set, all data stored in the main RAM 103 (that is, all data stored in the used area and unused area) , specifically, setting values, gaming machine status flags, test signal information, checksums, backup flags, error information, various data related to game progress, gaming performance data, etc.) are cleared.

If a gaming stop state is set due to the occurrence of a backup abnormality, the setting change conditions for setting the control state to the setting change state (specifically, setting switch 108 is turned on, RAM When the clear switch 109 is on and the main body frame opening detection sensor 2a is on, a setting change state is set, and then when the setting switch 108 is turned off, a game ready state is set. On the other hand, if the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the game remains in the stopped state.
In addition, if a gaming stop state is set due to the occurrence of a RAM error, the setting change condition will be set in a state where the RAM error has been canceled (main RAM 103 has been replaced or repaired and there is no RAM error) when the power is restored. By satisfying the above conditions, a setting change state is set, and then, by turning off the setting switch 108, a game enabled state is set. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality has not been cleared at the time of power recovery or if the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the game remains in the stopped state.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a gaming stop state is set due to the occurrence of a backup abnormality or a RAM abnormality, even if the power is turned on again, the game ready state is not directly set. A gameable state is set (transition to a gameable state) through a setting change state that is set by turning on the power in a state where setting change conditions are satisfied.

(Setting the control state upon recovery from power failure)
Hereinafter, the control state set at the time of recovery from power failure will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20.
(1) When the setting switch 108 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned off, and no backup abnormality has occurred and no RAM abnormality has occurred when recovering from a power failure. In this case, As shown in FIG. 19, even when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a gaming enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a gaming stop state, when the power is restored, the control immediately before the power outage occurs. The state is set. That is, the control state at the time of recovery from power interruption remains the same as the control state in which it was staying immediately before the power interruption occurred.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a game enabled state and a special game is in progress, the special game is restarted when the power outage is restored.
In principle, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment stays in the setting change state or setting confirmation state only while the setting switch 108 is on. In the above case, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the setting change state, the setting change state is set when the power is restored, and if the control state immediately before the power outage is in the setting confirmation state, the power is restored. However, since the setting switch 108 is off, the playable state is set (changed to the playable state) immediately after the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set. .

(2) When the setting switch 108 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned off, and no backup abnormality occurs and no RAM abnormality occurs when the power is restored.In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 19, even when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a gaming enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a gaming stop state, when the power is restored, the control immediately before the power outage occurs. The state is set.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a game enabled state and a special game is in progress, the special game is restarted when the power outage is restored.
Further, in this case, when the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set upon recovery from power failure, the game enabled state is not set immediately thereafter.

(3) When the setting switch 108 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned off, and no backup abnormality occurs and no RAM abnormality occurs when the power is restored. In this case, As shown in FIG. 19, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is the gaming enabled state or the setting confirmation state, normal initialization is executed based on the fact that the RAM clear switch 109 is on when the power outage is restored. Processing is performed and a game ready state is set. Further, if the control state immediately before the power cut occurred was a setting change state, upon recovery from the power cut, normal initialization processing is performed and the setting change state is set. Further, when the control state immediately before the power interruption occurs is the game stop state, the game stop state is set upon recovery from the power cut.
Further, as will be described later, in the normal initialization process executed based on the RAM clear switch 109 being on, data stored in the second to fourth areas of the used area of the main RAM 103 (i.e., check (sum, backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game) are cleared. Therefore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the playable state, if a hold was stored or a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored hold will be cleared. The variable display of special symbols and normal symbols will be reset. When a special game is in progress, this special game is also reset.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the setting change state and the setting values were being changed, the normal initialization process described above will not clear the setting values, so the settings that were set after the power outage will be changed. Even in the changed state, the set value being changed immediately before the power outage (the set value stored in the main RAM 103) is maintained as it is. Immediately after the setting change state is set, the playable state is set. This ends the setting change state, and the setting value being changed is finalized as will be described later.

(4) When the setting switch 108 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned off, no backup error occurs, and no RAM error occurs when the power is restored. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 19, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurred was the game enabled state and setting confirmation state, upon recovery from the power outage, normal initialization processing is performed and the game enabled state is set. Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power cut occurred was a setting change state, upon recovery from the power cut, normal initialization processing is performed and the setting change state is set. Further, when the control state immediately before the power interruption occurs is a game stop state, the game stop state is set upon recovery from the power cut.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the playable state, and if a hold was stored or a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored hold will be cleared. The variable display of special symbols and normal symbols will be reset. When a special game is in progress, this special game is also reset.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the setting change state and the setting values were being changed, even in the setting change state that was set after the power outage was restored, the settings being changed immediately before the power outage occurred. The value remains the same. Then, since the game enabled state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set and the setting change state does not end, the setting value being changed is not finalized at this point.

(5) When the setting switch 108 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned on, and there is no backup abnormality and no RAM abnormality when the power is restored.In this case, As shown in FIG. 19, even when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a gaming enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a gaming stop state, when the power is restored, the control state immediately before the power outage occurs. is set.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a game enabled state and a special game is in progress, the special game is restarted when the power outage is restored.
Further, the game ready state is set immediately after the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set.

(6) When the setting switch 108 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned on, and there is no backup abnormality and no RAM abnormality when the power is restored.In this case, As shown in FIG. 19, when the control state immediately before the power interruption occurred was the game enabled state and the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is set upon recovery from the power interruption. Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power interruption occurred was a setting change state, the setting change state is set upon recovery from the power interruption. Further, when the control state immediately before the power interruption occurs is the game stop state, the game stop state is set upon recovery from the power cut.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage occurred was a game ready state and a special game was in progress, the setting confirmation state is set when the power outage is restored, and then, when the setting switch 108 is turned off, the special game is restarted. be done.
Further, the game enabled state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set.

(7) When the setting switch 108 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned on, and no backup abnormality occurs and no RAM abnormality occurs when the power is restored. In this case, As shown in FIG. 19, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurred was the game enabled state and setting confirmation state, upon recovery from the power outage, normal initialization processing is performed and the game enabled state is set. Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power cut occurred was a setting change state, upon recovery from the power cut, normal initialization processing is performed and the setting change state is set. Further, when the control state immediately before the power interruption occurs is a game stop state, the game stop state is set upon recovery from the power cut.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the playable state, and if a hold was stored or a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored hold will be cleared. The variable display of special symbols and normal symbols will be reset. When a special game is in progress, this special game is also reset.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the setting change state and the setting values were being changed, even in the setting change state that was set after the power outage was restored, the settings being changed immediately before the power outage occurred. The value remains the same. Immediately after the setting change state is set, the playable state is set. This ends the setting change state, so the setting value being changed is finalized.

(8) When the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred when the power is restored. In this case, As shown in FIG. 19, regardless of whether the control state immediately before a power outage occurs is a gaming enabled state, a settings confirmation state, or a gaming stopped state, upon recovery from a power outage, normal initialization processing is executed and the setting change state is changed. Set.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the playable state, and if a hold was stored or a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored hold will be cleared. The variable display of special symbols and normal symbols will be reset. When a special game is in progress, this special game is also reset.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the setting change state and the setting values were being changed, even in the setting change state that was set after the power was restored, the settings that were being changed immediately before the power outage The value remains the same. Then, since the game enabled state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set and the setting change state does not end, the setting value being changed is not finalized at this point.

(9) When a backup error occurs and a RAM error does not occur when the power is restored (excluding the case where the setting switch 108, RAM clear switch 109, and body frame open detection sensor 2a are all on)
That is, when the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is turned on. , RAM clear switch 109 is OFF, body frame open detection sensor 2a is OFF, backup error has occurred, and RAM error has not occurred, setting switch 108 is OFF, RAM clear switch 109 is ON, body frame open detection is detected. If the sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, and the RAM If no abnormality has occurred, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, RAM clear switch 109 is off, body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, backup error has occurred, and RAM error has not occurred, setting switch 108 is off, RAM clear switch 109 is on, body frame If the open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, and a RAM error has not occurred, the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a game ready state, a settings change state, a settings confirmation state, and a game stop state. In either case, when the power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed, and a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality is set (see FIG. 19).

(10) When the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred when the power is restored. In this case, As shown in FIG. 19, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is a gaming enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is executed when the power is restored. , the configuration change state is set.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the playable state, and if a hold was stored or a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored hold will be cleared. The variable display of special symbols and normal symbols will be reset. When a special game is in progress, this special game is also reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in this case (when a backup abnormality has occurred when the power is restored), the setting value is also cleared in the abnormality initialization process that is executed when the power is restored. It is becoming more and more popular. Therefore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value that was being changed immediately before the power outage in the setting change state that was set after the power outage was restored. (the setting value stored in the main RAM 103) is not maintained, and the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed to a predetermined setting value ("1" in this embodiment) as an initial value. Note that the setting value is not finalized at this point because the game-enabled state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set and the setting change state does not end.

(11) When the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup error has occurred, and a RAM error has occurred when the power is restored. In this case, As shown in FIG. 20, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is any of the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, it is determined whether a RAM abnormality has occurred when a backup abnormality occurs at the time of recovery from a power failure, and when normal initialization processing is executed at the time of recovery from a power failure. ing. Therefore, when the normal initialization process is not executed at the time of power recovery and no backup abnormality has occurred, it may not be possible to discover (detect) that a RAM abnormality has occurred even though it has occurred. In this case, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same way as in the case (1) above.

(12) When the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred when the power is restored. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 20, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is any of the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, if a RAM abnormality has occurred but cannot be detected, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred even if a RAM abnormality has occurred. ) The control state at the time of power failure recovery is set in the same way as in the case of ).

(13) When the setting switch 108 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned off, no backup error occurs, and a RAM error occurs when the power is restored. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 20, even if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is determined only in the used area, and if it is impossible to read or write data in the unused area, , it is not determined that a RAM error has occurred. If it is determined that no RAM abnormality has occurred in this way, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same way as in case (3) above. .

(14) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup error has occurred, and a RAM error has occurred. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 20, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is any of the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, if it is determined that no RAM abnormality has occurred as described above, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same way as in case (4) above. will be held.

(15) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup error has occurred, and a RAM error has occurred. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 20, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is any of the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, if a RAM abnormality has occurred but cannot be detected, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred even if a RAM abnormality has occurred. ) The control state at the time of power failure recovery is set in the same way as in the case of ).

(16) When the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup error has occurred, and a RAM error has occurred at the time of power recovery. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 20, even if the control state immediately before the power outage was in the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, if a RAM abnormality has occurred but cannot be detected, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred even if a RAM abnormality has occurred. ) The control state at the time of power failure recovery is set in the same way as in the case of ).

(17) When the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup error has occurred, and a RAM error has occurred when recovering from a power failure. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 20, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is any of the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, if it is determined that no RAM abnormality has occurred as described above, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in case (7) above. will be held.

(18) When the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup error has occurred, and a RAM error has occurred when the power is restored. In this case as well, As shown in FIG. 20, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurs is any of the gaming enabled state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and gaming stop state, the abnormality initialization process is performed when the power is restored. This is executed, and a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In addition, if it is determined that no RAM abnormality has occurred as described above, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same way as in case (8) above. will be held.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if a RAM abnormality occurs, even if the setting change conditions are met, the game stop state is set in priority to the setting change state. Become.

(19) When a backup abnormality occurs or a RAM abnormality occurs when the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned off, and the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is turned off. OFF, backup error has occurred, RAM error has not occurred, setting switch 108 is ON, RAM clear switch 109 is OFF, body frame open detection sensor 2a is OFF, backup error has occurred, RAM error has occurred. If there is no error, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, If the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, and the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, and the RAM is abnormal. If no error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is turned off. on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has not occurred, the control state immediately before the power outage is the gaming ready state, Regardless of whether it is in the setting confirmation state or the game stop state, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed, and the game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM error takes priority over the game stop state based on the occurrence of a backup error. is set (see FIG. 20).

When the settings confirmation state or settings change state is set by executing the above-mentioned processes (1) to (19), the main information display device 105 displays the settings stored in the main RAM 103. The value is displayed. In addition, when the gaming enabled state is set, gaming performance display information based on gaming performance data stored in the main RAM 103 is displayed on the main information display device 105. Further, when the game stop state is set, a code indicating that the game stop state is set is displayed on the main information display device 105.
Note that if the game-ready state is set immediately after the setting confirmation state or setting change state is set, the setting value is displayed on the main information display device 105 for a moment, and then the game-ready state is set. The gaming performance display information will be displayed.

In addition, if the setting confirmation state or setting change state is set based on the setting switch 108 being on, then when the setting switch 108 is turned off, the setting confirmation state or setting change state that is being set can be played. Processing to switch the state is executed, and the game enabled state is set. Then, by setting the game-enabled state, the display on the main information display device 105 also switches to the corresponding content.

In addition, while setting the setting change state, each time the push button 109a is pressed and the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on, provided that the main body frame open detection sensor 2a detects the opening of the main body frame 2. , the setting values stored in the main RAM 103 are changed one step at a time. Specifically, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed to a value incremented by one.
For example, when the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is "2", if the push button 109a is pressed while the main body frame 2 is open, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is It will be changed to "3". Then, each time the push button 109a is pressed while the body frame 2 is open, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed from "4" to "5" to "6", and then becomes "6". The next value is changed to "1". Note that each time the setting values stored in the main RAM 103 are changed, the display of the setting values on the main information display device 105 is also changed.
When the setting switch 108 is turned off, the setting values stored in the main RAM 103 cannot be changed thereafter. That is, the setting values stored in the main RAM 103 at this point are determined as new setting values.

(Processing when setting value abnormality occurs)
If noise or the like occurs in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the set value stored in the used area of the main RAM 103 may become an abnormal value (for example, a value smaller than "1" or a value larger than "6"). etc.) may occur. In this way, if a situation occurs where the stored setting value becomes an abnormal value (hereinafter also referred to as setting value abnormality), it will not be possible to perform a jackpot lottery based on the appropriate setting value. , which may seriously affect the progress of the game.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a set value abnormality has occurred at the time when the above-mentioned jackpot lottery or normal symbol lottery is performed during the playable state. Performs set value abnormality determination processing. If it is determined in this set value abnormality determination process that a set value abnormality has occurred, the above-mentioned abnormality initialization process is executed, and a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of the set value abnormality. .
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the next jackpot drawing and special symbol fluctuation display are not performed while the special game is being executed. Can only be executed during execution. On the other hand, since the normal symbol lottery is performed both when the special game is not being executed and when the special game is being executed, the setting value abnormality determination process based on the normal symbol lottery is performed both when the special game is not being executed and when the special game is being executed. Either method is possible.

If a game stop state is set due to the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, the setting change state is set by satisfying the setting change conditions when the power is restored, and then the game is stopped by turning off the setting switch 108. A possible state is set. On the other hand, if the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the game remains in the stopped state.
In other words, if a game stop state is set due to the occurrence of a set value abnormality, just like when a game stop state is set due to a backup abnormality or RAM abnormality, even if the power is turned off and on again, the game will not be restarted directly. A playable state is not set, but a gameable state is set through a setting change state that is set by turning on the power in a state where setting change conditions are satisfied.

(Normal initialization processing, abnormal initialization processing, clear processing)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a set value abnormality, an abnormality initialization process is executed. In this abnormality initialization process, as described above, all data stored in the main RAM 103 (all data stored in the used area and unused area, specifically, setting values, gaming machine status flags, test (signal information, checksum, backup flag, error information, various data related to game progress, game performance data, etc.) are cleared.
In addition, if a gaming stop state is set due to the occurrence of a backup abnormality, RAM abnormality, or setting value abnormality, then "1" is set as the default setting value of the main RAM 103 due to the setting change state being set. It may also be configured to be automatically stored in the used area.

In addition, when the RAM clear switch 109 is on and a control state other than the game stop state (playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state) is set at the time of power recovery, the above-mentioned Normally, initialization processing is not executed, except when initialization processing is executed at the time of an error (when a backup error occurs at the time of power recovery, and the setting change condition is set by meeting the setting change conditions). Ru. In this normal initialization process, as described above, the data (checksum, backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game) stored in the second to fourth areas of the used area of the main RAM 103 is cleared.
Furthermore, when the RAM clear switch 109 is off and the game enabled state or setting confirmation state is set at the time of recovery from power failure, a clearing process for clearing a part of the main RAM 103 is executed. In this clearing process, data (ie, checksum, backup flag, error information) stored in the second and third areas of the used area of the main RAM 103 is cleared.

(Summary of various controls when a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, backup abnormality, or RAM abnormality)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a set value abnormality occurs due to noise etc. when a special figure game, a regular figure game, or a special game is being executed in the game-enabled state. As a result, a game stop state may be set based on the occurrence of a set value abnormality. In addition, in the above case, for example, a momentary power outage (i.e., instantaneous power outage) occurs, and when the power outage is restored (when the power outage is restored), a backup abnormality or a RAM abnormality occurs in the main control board 100. As a result, a gaming stop state may be set based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality or a RAM abnormality.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned settings are performed based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, backup abnormality, or RAM abnormality, and the pachinko machine P is staying in the game stop state, before the game stop state is set. The special game, regular game, and special game that were being executed during the playable state are not performed, and the game does not proceed.

Specifically, when the game is in the playable state and the state related to the difference ball operation stop control described later is the pre-activation warning state, the activation warning state, or the activation notice state, when the operating handle 5 is rotated, The firing and payout control board 200 controls the firing of game balls. On the other hand, in the game stop state, even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, the firing and payout control board 200 does not control the firing of game balls.
That is, when the game is possible and the state related to the difference ball operation stop control described later is the pre-activation warning state, the activation warning state, or the activation notice state, when the operating handle 5 is rotated, the game ball is launched. However, in the game stop state, even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, the game ball will not be fired.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when each control state (playable state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, game stop state) is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls each control state. A status setting command indicating that the status has been set is transmitted to the firing and dispensing control board 200 and the sub-control board 300. Thereby, the set control state can be grasped also in the firing and dispensing control board 200 and the sub-control board 300.

In addition, in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 or the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 20. ing. As a result, even if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, a jackpot lottery will not be performed based on the entered ball, and even if the game ball passes through the gate 20, the lottery will not be performed. In addition, a new prize ball, a new special pattern random number, and a new common pattern random number are not generated.
In addition, if a special symbol variable display, a normal symbol variable display, or a special game is executed during the playable state, when the game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will display the special symbol. The variable display, the variable display of normal symbols, and the execution of special games are stopped.
In this way, in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs the above-mentioned control, so that the game does not proceed.

In addition, when the game ball is in the playable state and is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation warning state, when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, the entering ball After that, the main The main CPU 101 of the control board 100 performs control to transmit a winning signal as an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500. In addition, when the player is in the playable state and is in the pre-warning state, warning state, or warning state, if a jackpot is won, a predetermined starting point after winning the jackpot (for example, based on the winning of the jackpot) The main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 outputs an external signal to the external information terminal board 500 from the start point of the special game to the predetermined end point (for example, the end point of the special game based on winning the jackpot). Control is performed to transmit a jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the pachinko machine P.
As a result, even on a device external to the pachinko machine P, it is possible to grasp the changing display of special symbols based on the entry of balls into the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16, winning a jackpot, etc. .

On the other hand, in the game stop state, since the game does not proceed as described above, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 transmits external signals such as the above-mentioned winning signal and jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Control is also becoming more limited.
For example, if the game is stopped while the winning signal is being transmitted as described above, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the variable display of special symbols, and the main CPU 101 stops transmitting the winning signal that is currently being executed. The winning signal will remain as it was sent. In addition, if the game is stopped while the above-mentioned winning signal is not transmitted, even if a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, the main control The main CPU 101 of the board 100 does not detect the entering ball, and the main CPU 101 becomes unable to start transmitting the above-mentioned winning signal.
Furthermore, if the game is stopped while the jackpot signal is being sent, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will stop executing the special game, and the main CPU 101 will stop sending the jackpot signal that is currently being executed. is no longer possible, and the jackpot signal remains as it was transmitted. In addition, if the game is stopped while the above-mentioned jackpot signal is not being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will not start the special game after that, so the main CPU 101 will not transmit the above-mentioned jackpot signal. Never start.

In addition, when the gaming stop state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 displays an error code on the main information display device 105, and the sub control board 300 receives a status setting command ( (hereinafter also referred to as a game stop command), generates a security signal indicating that the game stop state has been set as an external signal, and sends the security signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500. Output.
When the sub-control board 300 receives the game stop command, a predetermined game stop state setting suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device 21, a predetermined game stop state setting suggestion sound is output from the audio output device 10, and the front door effect is When the lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the board effect lamp GL are turned on or off according to a predetermined lighting pattern, it is suggested that the game stop state is set. In addition, the security signal output to the outside of the pachinko machine P can be received by the hall computer and an external display device for displaying various information. , and can indicate on an external display device that the gaming stop state has been set.

(Summary of control of movable piece 16b and opening/closing door 18b during game stop state)
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18 is restricted in the game stop state.
Specifically, in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls not to operate the starting prize opening solenoid 16c that opens and closes the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16, and The large prize opening solenoid 18c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 18b of the winning opening 18 is controlled not to operate.

As a result, for example, if the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is open during the game enabled state, the movable piece 16b will close when the game stop state is set, and the movable piece 16b will be closed during the game stop state. remains closed. Further, for example, if the opening/closing door 18b of the big prize opening 18 is open during the game enabled state, the opening/closing door 18b will be closed when the gaming stop state is set, and the opening/closing door 18b will be closed during the gaming stop state. The state is maintained.
Further, for example, if the game stop state is set before the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 opens after winning a lottery with a normal symbol during the game enabled state, the movable piece 16b is opened. The movable piece 16b remains closed during the game stop state. For example, a special game is being executed during the playable state, and after a predetermined round game ends and the opening/closing door 18b of the big prize opening 18 closes, the next round game starts and before the opening/closing door 18b opens. When the game stop state is set, the door 18b is not opened and remains closed during the game stop state.

(Summary of control related to payout of game balls during game stop state)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described control so that the game does not proceed.
On the other hand, during the game stop state, although the control of firing game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 is stopped, the control of paying out game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 is not stopped.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 responds based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 14, the first starting winning hole 15, the second starting winning hole 16, or the big winning hole 18. Even if the game stop state is set after the prize ball designation command to pay out the number of prize balls is sent to the firing and payout control board 200 (that is, after the prize ball designation command is received by the firing and payout control board 200). , control of the payout of game balls by the launch payout control board 200 is executed.

As a result, for example, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 18 during a special game (that is, in a playable state) and prize balls are being sequentially paid out, the game stop state is set. Even in this case, all prize balls based on the above-mentioned ball entry will be paid out. In other words, all prize balls that were won by entering the game balls into the grand prize opening 18 before the game stop state was set, but have not yet been paid out at the time the game stop state was set, are also paid out. It will be done.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a game ball enters one of the winning holes during the playable state, and the game stop state is set during the payout of the prize ball based on the entered ball. In this case, although the progress of the game by the main control board 100 and the firing of game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 are stopped, the payout of prize balls by the firing and payout control board 200 does not stop and continues even during the game stop state. It is carried out continuously.

Similarly, after the player presses the ball lending button 36 and the game ball lending device R transmits a ball lending command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as rental balls to the shooting payout control board 200, Even if the stop state is set, the control of the payout of game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 is executed.
As a result, even if the game stop state is set when a predetermined number of game balls (rental balls) are being paid out by pressing the ball lending button 36, all the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. It will be paid out. That is, even though the ball lending button 36 was pressed and the payout of game balls started before the game stop state was set, all the game balls that had not been paid out yet at the time the game stop state was set. paid out.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the operation of the game ball lending device R, value information display device 35, ball lending switch 36a, and card return switch 37a is not restricted even when the game is in a stopped state. , transmission of signals and commands from these devices, and reception of signals and commands by these devices are not restricted.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, even if the ball lending button 36 is pressed while the game is stopped, all the predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, value information is continuously displayed on the value information display device 35 even when the game is in a stopped state. In addition, even if the ball lending button 36 is pressed while the game is stopped, the game ball lending device R sends a subtraction command to the value information display device 35, so even if the game is stopped, the value information Updated display of value information is performed on the display device 35.
Furthermore, even if the card return button 37 is pressed during the game stop state, the card return switch 37a sends a return request signal to the game ball lending device R. The lending device R controls ejecting the card.

(Summary of determination of payout-related errors while gaming is stopped)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, among the payout-related errors, out of balls error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, radio wave error, and payout motor error are handled by the firing payout control board 200. The determination of occurrence (detection of occurrence) is performed in . Furthermore, among the payout-related errors, the main control board 100 determines whether or not the door opening error has occurred (detected whether it has occurred).

Here, when the game is possible and the state related to the differential ball operation stop control described later is the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notice state, either the main control board 100 or the firing payout control board 200 Also, the occurrence of the corresponding error is determined.
On the other hand, during the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines the occurrence of a door opening error, and the main control board 100 only determines the occurrence of other errors (the above-mentioned main control related errors). is not judged.
Specifically, even when the game is stopped, when the main body frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, a main body frame open detection signal or a front door open detection signal is input to the firing payout control board 200, and this causes the firing. A main body frame opening command or a front door opening command is transmitted from the payout control board 200 to the main control board 100. When the main control board 100 receives the main body frame opening command or the front door opening command, the main CPU 101 determines that a door opening error has occurred.
On the other hand, even when the game is stopped, for example, when magnetism is directed toward the game board 11, the magnetic detection sensor 70a detects the magnetism and outputs a magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100. Even if the detection signal is input, the main CPU 101 does not determine that a main control magnetic error has occurred. Therefore, during the game stop state, even if magnetism is directed toward the game board 11, a main control magnetic error will not occur.
Similarly, for example, when the game board 11 is irradiated with a radio wave, the radio wave detection sensor 71a detects the radio wave and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100, but even if the radio wave detection signal is input to the main control board 100, , the main CPU 101 does not determine that a main control radio wave error has occurred. Therefore, during the game stop state, even if the game board 11 is irradiated with radio waves, a main control radio wave error will not occur.
That is, during the game stop state, even if an event that causes a main control related error occurs, the main CPU 101 does not determine the occurrence of a main control related error, so no main control related error will occur.

As described above, even if the game is in the stopped state, if it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the main CPU 101 sends an error suggestion command corresponding to the door opening error to the sub control board 300. Send. From the above, even if the game is stopped, if the main body frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, and the effect display device 21, various lamps, and audio output device 10 A suggestion is made that a door opening error has occurred.

Further, during the game stop state, the payout CPU 201 of the firing payout control board 200 does not determine whether any error has occurred. Therefore, during the game stop state, the occurrence of a ball out error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, payout radio wave error, and payout motor error is not determined.
Specifically, during the game stop state, for example, even if the game balls are not counted by the game ball count by the payout counting switch 63 for a predetermined period even though the payout motor 62 is operating. , the payout CPU 201 does not determine that an out-of-ball error has occurred. Therefore, during the game stop state, even if game balls are not counted for a predetermined period, a ball out error will not occur. Since the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a ball out error has occurred, the ball out error command is not sent from the firing payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 It is not recognized that a cutting error has occurred.
Similarly, during the game stop state, for example, when a radio wave is irradiated to the outlet 19, the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b detects the radio wave and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the launch payout control board 200, but the launch payout control board Even if a radio wave detection signal is input to the payout CPU 200, the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a payout radio wave error has occurred. Therefore, during the game stop state, even if the out port 19 is irradiated with a radio wave, a payout radio wave error will not occur. Since the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a payout radio wave error has occurred, the payout radio wave error command is not transmitted from the launch payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 It is not recognized that a radio wave error has occurred.
In other words, while the game is stopped, even if an event occurs that causes a ball out error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, payout radio wave error, or payout motor error, the payout will not be processed. Since the CPU 201 does not determine the occurrence of these errors, these errors will not occur. Furthermore, the main control board 100 will not be able to detect the occurrence of these errors.

In addition, even during the game stop state, the payout CPU 201 of the firing payout control board 200 continues to issue errors such as out of ball error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, payout radio wave error, and payout. The occurrence of a motor error may also be determined.

(Summary of external signal transmission to the outside of Pachinko machine P during game stop state)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs control to transmit external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Control is performed by the payout CPU 201 to transmit external signals such as a payout prize ball signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
Here, when the game is in the playable state and is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation warning state, the main CPU 101 controls to transmit external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals, and the payout CPU 201 controls the transmission of external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals. Any control for transmitting an external signal such as a payout prize ball signal is performed.
On the other hand, during the game stop state, as described above, the control by the main control board 100 to transmit external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals is restricted.

Further, during the game stop state, the control of transmitting external signals such as the payout prize ball signal by the firing and payout control board 200 is not restricted and continues to be performed.
Specifically, for example, even if the game stop state is set while the payout CPU 201 is transmitting an external signal such as a payout prize ball signal, the transmission of the external signal by the payout CPU 201 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. do. Further, for example, when the game balls are put out after the game stop state is set and the number of paid out game balls reaches a predetermined number, the payout CPU 201 transmits a payout prize ball signal, and When the time has elapsed, the transmission of the payout prize ball signal by the payout CPU 201 ends.

(Summary of control when setting change state or setting confirmation state is set)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set, game balls are not fired even if the operation handle 5 is rotated, and the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 The entry of a game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 or the passage of a game ball through the gate 20 is not detected, and the variable display of special symbols, the variable display of normal symbols, and the execution of the special game are stopped. do. As a result, the game does not proceed in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, similar to the game stop state.
In addition, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls not to operate the starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 to open and close, and The large winning opening solenoid 18c that drives the opening/closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 to open and close is controlled not to operate. As a result, the movable piece 16b and the opening/closing door 18b remain closed during the setting change state or setting confirmation state, similar to the game stop state.
In addition, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, as in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines the occurrence of a door opening error, and other errors determined by the main control board 100 (as described above). The occurrence of main control related errors) is not determined.

Furthermore, during the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the game ball continues to be paid out by the firing and payout control board 200 as in the game stop state, but there are errors such as out of ball errors, full tank errors, and payout counting switch errors. , the occurrence of a ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, payout radio wave error, and payout motor error is not determined, and control of transmission of external signals such as a payout prize ball signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is not restricted. It has become.
In addition, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the payout of game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 may be stopped, and ball out error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, etc. It may be possible to continuously determine whether an excessive prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, or a payout motor error has occurred, or to restrict the control of sending external signals such as a payout prize ball signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P. You may also do so.

(Summary of differential pitch operation stop control (operation stop control based on the number of differential pitches))
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in order to prevent a situation in which the number of game balls acquired by a player during a game becomes excessive and the gambling nature becomes too high, a predetermined calculation start time is The main CPU 101 executes operation stop control (difference ball operation stop control) to stop the operation of the pachinko machine P based on the difference in the number of balls reaching a predetermined number of stop operations (95,000 in this embodiment). It has become.

The difference in the number of balls is the number of prize balls paid out based on the game balls entering each winning hole (general winning hole 14, first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16, big winning hole 18). prize balls that are paid out based on the detection of game balls by the opening detection sensor 14a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the big winning opening detection sensor 18a), and the prize balls fired by the player and each This is the difference between the number of game balls that entered the winning hole or the game balls that were received at the out hole 19 (the game balls detected by the out sensor 19a, in other words, the game balls that were used in the game).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the difference ball count value used for determining the number of difference balls is stored in a specific area in the unused area provided in the main RAM 103. ing.
The differential pitch count value stored in this specific area is determined by the following: In the activation notice state and states other than the activation state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state), the power is turned off when no specific error occurs. It is reset when the power is restored (when the power is turned off and on), and it is not reset when the power is restored after a power cut while a specific error has occurred. That is, in the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, when the power is restored with a specific error occurring, the differential ball count value that was stored at the time of the power interruption is maintained. Further, the above-mentioned differential pitch count value is reset in the activation notice state and the activation state by performing initialization processing (normal initialization processing) accompanying the setting of the setting change state. When reset, the difference pitch count value is set to an initial value (100000 in this embodiment).
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, specific errors include errors that have a serious impact on the progress of the game (for example, a main control radio wave error that may induce malfunction of the main CPU 101, (e.g., fraudulent prize winning errors that may cause malfunctions). The specific error is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an error that, if it occurs, will cause a gaming stop state to be set.

The difference ball count value is calculated every time a game ball enters each winning hole (general winning hole detection sensor 14a, first starting winning hole detection sensor 15a, second starting winning hole detection sensor 16a or big winning hole detection sensor 18a). Each time a game ball is detected, the number is incremented by the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the entered ball, and each time a game ball is detected by the out sensor 19a, it is decremented by one. When the difference pitch count value is 0, even if it is detected by the out sensor 19a, the difference pitch count value is not decremented and remains 0.
Then, when the difference pitch count value reaches a second reference value (195,000 in this embodiment), which will be described later, the number of difference balls has reached the predetermined number of stopped operations (95,000).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, each time a game ball enters each winning hole, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the entered ball is added to the difference ball count value. However, this is not limited to this, and each time a prize ball is actually paid out based on the entry of a game ball into each winning hole, the number of paid out prize balls is calculated. It may be added to the difference pitch count value.
Furthermore, as described above, each time a game ball is detected by the out sensor 19a, the difference ball count value is decremented by 1, but the invention is not limited to this; Each time the ball reaches the game area 12, the difference ball count value may be decremented by 1. That is, each time a game ball is used in a game, the difference ball count value may be decremented by 1.
In addition, as mentioned above, in the activation notice state and the activation state, the difference ball count value is reset by the initialization process (normal initialization process) that is performed in conjunction with the setting change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization processing that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is on at the time of power recovery and the game ready state is set (i.e., the setting of the setting change state is It may be reset by performing a normal initialization process (which is executed without accompanying the initialization process), or by performing an abnormal initialization process.
In addition, as mentioned above, in the pre-activation warning state and activation warning state, the difference pitch count value was reset upon recovery from a power failure, but this is not limited to this, and in the activation warning state. Similarly to the active state, the RAM clear switch 109 may be reset by performing initialization processing (normal initialization processing) accompanying the setting of the setting change state, or the RAM clear switch 109 may be turned on when the power is restored. Then, the reset may be performed by performing initialization processing (normal initialization processing performed without setting the setting change state) that is executed when the playable state is set. It may be reset by performing abnormality initialization processing.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, there are four types of states related to the differential ball operation stop control: a pre-activation warning state, an activation warning state, an activation notice state, and an activation state. During the playable state, the player stays in one of the four types of states mentioned above.

(state before activation warning)
The pre-warning state is set by resetting the difference ball count value, and is a state that remains when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value (190000 in this embodiment), and the game is possible. While in this state, it mainly stays in this pre-warning state. Then, when the differential pitch count value reaches the first reference value, the pre-activation warning state ends and the activation warning state is set.
That is, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment stays in the pre-activation warning state from when the difference ball count value is reset until it reaches the first reference value.

(Activation warning state)
As described above, the activation warning state is set when the difference pitch count value reaches the first reference value. Then, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value (195000), the activation warning state ends, and if a special game is being executed at this time, the activation warning state is set and the special game is not executed. If not, the activated state is set.
That is, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment stays in the activation warning state from when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value until it reaches the second reference value.

Furthermore, when the activation warning state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a first differential ball operation stop control designation command indicating this to the sub control board 300. When the sub-control board 300 receives the first difference ball operation stop control designation command, a power outage occurs, the activation warning state ends, or a predetermined period of time (600 seconds in this embodiment) elapses. Until the end conditions are met, the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 will display a warning message indicating that the first standard value has been reached and the second standard value will soon be reached (for example, ``Approximately 5,000 shots remain until the end of the game. At the same time, the front door display lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, and panel display lamp GL are lit according to a predetermined lighting pattern. Or the light is turned off (for example, only the front door production lamp DL is lit in blue). In addition, when the first difference ball operation stop control designation command is received, the period from the relevant time (that is, the time when the activation warning state is set) until the predetermined activation warning audio output time (5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. , a activation warning voice (for example, a voice saying "There are about 5,000 rounds remaining until the termination is stopped") is output. These indicate that the activation warning state has been set.
Note that the activation warning sound may be continuously outputted until a power outage occurs, or may be continuously outputted until the activation warning state ends.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, even if the difference ball count value falls below the first reference value, the activation warning state ends and the activation occurs unless the power is restored after the activation warning state is set. Pre-warning conditions are never set. Note that if the differential pitch count value falls below the first reference value after the activation warning state is set, the activation warning state may be ended and the pre-activation warning state may be set.

(Activation notice state)
As described above, the activation notice state is set when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and the special game is being executed at the time of reaching this value. Then, when the special game being executed ends, the activation notice state ends and the activation state is set. Furthermore, when the initialization process (normal initialization process) associated with setting the above-mentioned setting change state is performed during the activation warning state, the activation warning state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the special game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, after the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, The activation notice state will remain until the special game being executed ends or the initialization process accompanying the setting of the setting change state is performed.

Note that the activation notice state does not end when initialization processing is performed in conjunction with setting the setting change state, but when the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on at the time of power recovery and the game ready state is set. The process may end when initialization processing is performed (normal initialization processing that is performed without setting the setting change state), or when abnormal initialization processing is performed. You may also do so.

Further, when the activation notice state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a second difference pitch operation stop control designation command indicating this to the sub control board 300. When the second difference ball operation stop control designation command is received in the sub-control board 300, the effect display device 21 displays the In part 21a, an activation notice indicating that the operation of the pachinko machine P will stop after the special game ends (for example, display of an activation notice character image saying "The game will be discontinued after the end of the jackpot", etc.) is performed, and at the same time. (See FIG. 51(h)), so that the front door effect lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, and board effect lamp GL are turned on or off according to a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, only the front door effect lamp DL is lit in blue). It has become. In addition, when the second differential ball operation stop control designation command is received, the period from the relevant time (that is, the time when the activation notification state is set) until the predetermined activation notification audio output time (7 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. , an activation warning sound (for example, a sound saying "The jackpot will be discontinued after the end of the jackpot") is output. These indicate that the activation notice state has been set.
Note that the activation advance notice and the lighting or extinguishing of various lamps according to a predetermined lighting pattern may be performed until a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the activation warning sound may be continuously output until a power outage occurs, or may be continuously output until the activation notification state ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the activation state is set based on the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value, the game does not proceed (the game stops). However, as mentioned above, when the special game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the activation notice state is set instead of the activation state, and when the special game in progress ends, the activation notice state is set. The state ends and the activated state is set. In other words, if the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value while a special game is being executed, the game will not be stopped immediately based on the reaching and the special game that is being executed will be forcibly terminated, but the special game will not be executed. The game continues until the final round game in the middle special game ends. Thereby, even if the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value during execution of the special game, the player's interest can be maintained.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, although the activation notice state is set, the differential ball count value decreases during the activation notice state and falls below the second reference value when the special game in progress ends. Even if it is, the activation notice state ends and the activation state is set. Note that if the difference ball count value is less than the second reference value at the time the special game ends, the activation state may not be set.

(activated state)
As mentioned above, the activation state is when the special game is not being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, or when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value. When a special game is being executed, it is set when the special game being executed ends. Then, when the initialization process (normal initialization process) accompanying the setting of the setting change state described above is performed, the activation state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the special game is not being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value. It will stay in the active state until the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state is performed. In addition, if a special game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state is performed after the special game in progress is completed. Until then, it will remain activated.
In other words, after the activated state is set, the activated state continues without ending unless initialization processing is performed in conjunction with setting the setting change state.

Note that the activated state does not end when initialization processing is performed in conjunction with setting the setting change state, but when the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on at the time of power recovery and the game ready state is set. It may be configured to end when the initialization process to be executed (normal initialization process that is executed without setting the setting change state) is performed, or it may end when the abnormality initialization process is performed. You can do it like this.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits an activation state setting command indicating that the activation state has been set to the firing and payout control board 200. This makes it possible for the firing and dispensing control board 200 to also recognize that the activated state has been set.
In the activation state, the game ball is not ejected even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, as in the game stop state described above. In addition, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 or the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 20. Even if the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a jackpot lottery will not be performed based on the entering ball, and even if the gaming ball passes through the gate 20, a normal symbol will be drawn based on the passing. The lottery is not held, and new prize balls, new special pattern random numbers are not held in memory, and new general pattern random numbers are not held in memory. Furthermore, if the variable display of the special symbol or the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will display the variable display of the special symbol or the variable display of the normal symbol. It is supposed to stop.
In this manner, in the active state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs the above-described control, so that the game does not proceed (the game is stopped) as in the game stop state.
As described above, when the operation handle 5 is rotated in the activated state, the game ball is not fired, but the handle operation command is transmitted from the firing and payout control board 200 to the main control board 100. Then, upon receiving the handle operation command, the main CPU 101 transmits a rotation operation command to the sub-control board 300. Therefore, even in the activated state, it is possible to know on the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 300 that the operating handle 5 has been rotated.

In addition, in the activated state, since the game does not proceed as described above, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 also controls the transmission of external signals such as winning signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P, as in the game stopped state. It is becoming restricted.
For example, if the activation state is set while the winning signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will stop the variable display of the special symbol, so the main CPU 101 will stop the ongoing transmission of the winning signal. The winning signal will remain as it was sent. In addition, if the activation state is set when the winning signal is not transmitted, even if a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, the main control board 100 Since the main CPU 101 does not detect the ball entering, the main CPU 101 cannot start transmitting the winning signal.

Furthermore, in the activation state, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18 is restricted, as in the game stop state.
Specifically, in the activation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls not to operate the starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 to open and close, and The large prize opening solenoid 18c that drives the opening/closing door 18b of the opening 18 to open/close is controlled not to operate.
As a result, for example, if the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is open, the movable piece 16b will close when the activated state is set, and the movable piece 16b will remain closed during the activated state. Ru. Further, during the activated state, the opening/closing door 18b remains closed. Also, for example, if the activated state is set before the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 opens after winning a normal symbol lottery, the movable piece 16b will not be released and will remain in the activated state. The movable piece 16b remains closed.

In addition, in the activation state, as in the game stop state, although the control of firing game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 is stopped, the control of paying out game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 is not stopped. ing.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 responds based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 14, the first starting winning hole 15, the second starting winning hole 16, or the big winning hole 18. Even if the activation state is set after the prize ball designation command to pay out the number of prize balls is sent to the firing and payout control board 200 (that is, after the prize ball designation command is received by the firing and payout control board 200), Control of the payout of game balls by the launch payout control board 200 is executed.

As a result, for example, even if the activation state is set when a prize ball is being paid out based on a game ball entering one of the winning holes, all the balls based on the above-mentioned entering ball will be paid out. The prize ball will be paid out. In other words, all prize balls that were won by a game ball entering one of the winning slots before the activated state was set, but have not yet been paid out at the time the activated state was set, will also be paid out. .
In this way, if a game ball enters any winning slot before the activated state is set, and the activated state is set during the payout of prize balls based on the entered ball, the main control Although the progress of the game by the board 100 and the firing of game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 are stopped, the paying out of prize balls by the firing and payout control board 200 continues without stopping even during the activated state.

Similarly, after the player presses the ball lending button 36 and the game ball lending device R transmits a ball lending command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as rental balls to the firing and paying-out control board 200, it is activated. Even if the state is set, the control of the payout of game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 is executed.
As a result, even if the activation state is set when a predetermined number of game balls (rental balls) are being paid out by pressing the ball lending button 36, all the predetermined number of game balls will be paid out. It will be. That is, although the ball lending button 36 is pressed and the payout of game balls has started before the activation state is set, all game balls that have not yet been paid out at the time the activation state is set are also paid out. .

Furthermore, even in the activated state, the operation of the game ball lending device R, value information display device 35, ball lending switch 36a, and card return switch 37a is not restricted, and signals and commands from these devices are not restricted. There are no restrictions on the transmission or reception of signals or commands by these devices.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, even if the ball lending button 36 is pressed during the activated state, all the predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

Further, even during the activation state, value information continues to be displayed on the value information display device 35. Furthermore, even if the ball lending button 36 is pressed during the activated state, the game ball lending device R sends a subtraction command to the value information display device 35, so even in the activated state, the value information display device At 35, value information is updated and displayed. Furthermore, even if the card return button 37 is pressed during the activated state, the card return switch 37a sends a return request signal to the game ball lending device R. Control for ejecting the card is performed by R.
Note that if the ball lending button 36 is pressed while the ball lending button 36 is in the activated state, the game balls are not paid out, and the value information display device 35 is not updated to display the value information. good. Further, if the card return button 37 is pressed during the activated state, the game ball lending device R may not be controlled to eject the card.

In addition, in the activation state, as in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines the occurrence of the door opening error, and other errors determined by the main control board 100 (the above-mentioned main control related errors) ) occurrence is not determined. Even during the activation state, if it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the main CPU 101 transmits an error suggestion command corresponding to the door opening error to the sub control board 300. From the above, even during the activation state, if the main body frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, and the effect display device 21, various lamps, and audio output device 10 detect the door opening error. An indication is made that an open error has occurred.
Furthermore, in the activation state, the payout CPU 201 of the firing payout control board 200 does not determine the occurrence of any error, as in the game stop state. Therefore, during the game stop state, the occurrence of a ball out error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, payout radio wave error, and payout motor error is not determined.
Note that even during the activation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 may also determine the occurrence of an error (main control related error) other than the door opening error determined in the main control board 100. As a result, even during the activated state, if the occurrence conditions for an error other than the door opening error are satisfied, the error will occur.
Further, during the activation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 may not determine whether a door opening error has occurred.
In addition, even in the activation state, the payout CPU 201 of the firing payout control board 200 continues to perform the following functions: out of ball error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, payout radio wave error, payout motor. The occurrence of an error may also be determined.

In addition, in the activation state, as in the game stop state, the control by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 to transmit external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P is limited, but the firing payout control The control of transmitting external signals such as payout prize ball signals by the board 200 is not restricted and is continuously performed.
In addition, in the activated state, the control of transmitting the payout prize ball signal by the launch payout control board 200 may also be limited.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the activated state, the game does not proceed and the control for firing the game balls stops, so that the game balls cannot be fired. It is not limited. For example, in the activation state, although the game is prevented from proceeding, the control for firing game balls by the firing and payout control board 200 may not be stopped. That is, in the active state, although the game does not proceed, the game ball may be launched.

In addition, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 controls the first special symbol display device 30, the second special symbol display device 31, the normal symbol display device 32, the first special symbol reservation display device 38, and the second special symbol display device 38. The display on the display device 39 and the normal symbol holding display device 33 is cleared. Specifically, these display devices are composed of LEDs that can be turned on or off, but the LEDs constituting each display device are configured to turn off. As a result, the special symbols that were being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 32, the special symbols that were in a stopped display, and the normal symbols that were being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 32. The symbols, the normal symbols that were being stopped and displayed, the first special symbol reservation number that was displayed by the first special symbol reservation display device 38, and the second special symbol reservation number that was displayed by the second special symbol reservation display device 39 , all the normal symbol pending numbers displayed by the normal symbol pending display device 33 will be cleared.
On the other hand, if the right-handed player notification lamp RL connected to the sub-control board 300 is lit when the activated state is set, even after the activated state is set, the right-handed player notification lamp RL remains lit. The lighting will continue.
In addition to the right-hand hit notification lamp RL, for example, if a pending number lamp or the like that indicates the number of reserved special symbols or the number of reserved second special symbols by lighting in a predetermined manner is connected to the sub-control board 300. In this case, even after setting the activation state, the reserved number lamp may continue to be lit in a predetermined manner indicating the first reserved number of special symbols and the second reserved number of special symbols. That is, the display device connected to the sub-control board 300 that makes suggestions regarding the progress of the game may continue to make the suggestions even after the activation state is set.

Further, when the activated state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a third difference ball operation stop control designation command indicating this to the sub control board 300. Then, when the third difference ball operation stop control designation command is received in the sub-control board 300, the performance symbol 50 displayed on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21 at this point is stored in a suspended memory state. After various performance images such as pending images and background images that suggest the above are cleared, until a power outage occurs, the display section 21a of the performance display device 21 indicates that the operation of the pachinko machine P has stopped. (For example, display of an activation text image such as "Difference ball operation stop function in operation. The game will be stopped because the difference ball limit has been reached. Please call the official.") (see Figure 51 (i)). The audio output device 10 outputs a predetermined activation voice (for example, a voice saying "The game is stopped because the upper limit of the difference ball has been reached"), and the front door production lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, and board production lamp GL are lit in a predetermined manner. By turning on or off according to a pattern (for example, the front door effect lamp DL lights up in blue, the status notification lamp EL lights up in red, the board effect lamp GL turns off, etc.), it is suggested that the activated state has been set. be exposed.
Note that the activation warning, the output of the activation sound, and the lighting or extinguishment of various lamps to indicate that the activation state has been set are not given until a power outage occurs, but rather for a predetermined period of time (when the activation warning state has been set). The notification may be performed only until a period of time (for example, 10 minutes, etc.) longer than the time when the suggestion is made has elapsed.
Furthermore, the various effect images that were being displayed at the time when the activation state was set may continue to be displayed without being cleared. Then, the above-mentioned activation suggestion (display of activation character images) may be performed superimposed on these various effect images.

Further, when the activated state is set, the main CPU 101 displays a code indicating the activated state on the main information display device 105. This allows the main information display device 105 to recognize that the activated state has been set.
Note that when the activation state is set, no display may be performed on the main information display device 105. That is, the display on the main information display device 105 may be cleared.

Furthermore, when the activated state is set, the main CPU 101 generates a security signal as an external signal indicating that the activated state has been set, and sends the security signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P (such as the hall computer or the like) via the external information terminal board 500. output the security signal to an external display device, etc.). This security signal can be received by the hall computer or the external display device mentioned above, so that the hall computer can know that the activated state has been set, and the external display can notify that the activated state has been set. It can be suggested on the display device. Furthermore, while a security signal is being generated and output based on the activation state setting, activation security information indicating that the security signal is being generated and output is stored in the first area of the main RAM 103. It has become.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the power is cut off during the activation state without executing the initialization process that ends the activation state (i.e., the initialization process accompanying the setting of the setting change state). When the device is restored (power is turned off and on), the generation and output of the security signal described above is restarted. As a result, even if a power outage occurs during the activated state, after the power is restored, the hall computer can once again confirm that the activated state is in effect, and the external display device can again indicate that the activated state is active. can do.
In addition, even when the activation notice state is set, the same security signal as when the activation state is set is generated and output, and the activation notice state is terminated while the activation notice state is in progress. If the power is restored without performing the initialization process (that is, the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state), even if the generation and output of the security signal is restarted. good.

In addition, in the activated state, the game does not progress and the game ball is not launched, so the game ball does not enter the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, and the special symbol is not displayed. Fluctuation displays, special games, and regular map games are never executed. Therefore, various commands accompanying these executions (progress of the game) (for example, starting winning commands based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, based on the start of fluctuation of special symbols) A variable mode command, a variable pattern command, an opening command based on the start of a special game, etc.) are not transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300.
Further, a cross key detection sensor 25a that detects a press operation of the cross key 25 and a press operation detection sensor 9d that detects a press operation of the operation button 9b are connected to the sub control board 300, but even in the activated state, Detection by these sensors is performed. Thereby, even during the activated state, it is possible to grasp the pressing operation of the operation button 9b and the pressing operation of the cross key 25 on the sub-control board 300.

(Summary of various status settings related to differential ball operation stop control)
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, various states related to differential ball operation stop control (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation warning state, activation warning state, activation warning state, Difference ball operation stop control phase data for setting the warning state, activation state) is stored. By storing the state values corresponding to the above-mentioned various states in this differential ball operation stop control phase data, any of the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, and activation state can be set. Become.

Specifically, when a power failure recovery is performed in the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, or when initialization processing is performed in conjunction with setting a setting change state in the activation notice state or the activation state, the main CPU 101 After clearing the difference ball action stop control phase data, a state value corresponding to the pre-warning state is stored in this difference ball action stop control phase data. As a result, the pre-warning state is set.
That is, when a power failure recovery is performed in the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, the difference ball count value is reset as described above, thereby setting the pre-activation warning state. Furthermore, when the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state is performed in the activation notice state or the activation state, when these states end, the difference ball count value is reset and the pre-activation warning state is set.

Furthermore, when the differential pitch count value reaches the first reference value, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation warning state in the differential pitch operation stop control phase data. That is, the differential ball operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation warning state. As a result, an activation warning state is set.
Further, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and a special game is being executed at the time of reaching this value, the main CPU 101 adds a state value corresponding to the activation notice state to the difference ball operation stop control phase data. Remember. That is, the differential ball operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation notice state. As a result, the activation notice state is set.
Also, when the difference ball count value reaches the second standard value and no special game is being executed at the time of reaching this value, or when the difference ball count value reaches the second standard value, the special game is executed. When the special game ends, the main CPU 101 stores the state value corresponding to the activation state in the differential ball operation stop control phase data. That is, the differential ball operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activated state. This sets the activation state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the game stop state, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state, which is a control state in which the game does not proceed, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and the big winning opening The operation of the opening/closing door 18b of 18 is restricted, and the movable piece 16b and the big prize opening 18 remain closed during the control state in which the game does not proceed.
As a result, even though the game is not in progress, the start winning hole solenoid 16c and the big winning hole solenoid 18c continue to operate, which may cause these component parts to heat up and malfunction or be damaged. The situation can be prevented. In addition, by keeping the second starting prize opening 16 and the grand prize opening 18 open, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting fraudulent parts into these winning openings and winning prize balls while the game is not in progress. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not proceed, game balls are not fired, but game balls are paid out by the firing and payout control board 200 (prize balls are paid out). and paying out rental balls) are continuously performed, and display of value information on the value information display device 35, ejection of cards by the game ball lending device R, etc. are also performed.
As a result, for example, even though a game ball enters one of the winning holes before the game stop state is set, the payout of prize balls is stopped due to the game stop state being set. If there is a disadvantage such as not being able to win a part of the prize balls based on the above-mentioned ball entry, or if the game stop state is stopped even though the ball lending switch 36 was pressed by the player before the game stop state was set. By setting this, the payout of rental balls is stopped, and it is possible to prevent disadvantages such as not being able to acquire a portion of the rental balls. In addition, even if the game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 performs special processing such as sending a signal or command to the firing and payout control board 200 to stop the operation or stop the payout of game balls. Since there is no need to execute it, it is possible to prevent an increase in the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, during the game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not proceed, the main control board 100 only determines the occurrence of the door opening error among the errors determined to have occurred. It looks like this.
This makes it possible to prevent a situation where the main control board 100 is fraudulently attacked by opening the main body frame 2 or the front door 3 while the game is stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, during the game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not proceed, the main control board 100 does not control the transmission of external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Although it is restricted, the control of transmission of external signals such as the payout prize ball signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P by the firing and payout control board 200 is not restricted.
As a result, even during a game stop state in which the payout of game balls is continuously controlled by the firing and payout control board 200, information regarding the payout of game balls can be reliably grasped in a device external to the pachinko machine P. be able to. Furthermore, even if the game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 needs to execute special processing such as sending a command to the firing and payout control board 200 to stop sending signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Moreover, since control of transmission of external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals by the main control board 100 is limited, it is possible to prevent an increase in the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the time for the main control board 100 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is longer than the time for the firing and payout control board 200 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P. It has been set for a long time.
As a result, the external signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to the outside of the pachinko machine P is more reliably transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P than the external signal transmitted from the firing and payout control board 200 to the outside of the pachinko machine P. It will be done.

Note that the setting of the transmission time is not limited to this.
For example, the time during which the firing and payout control board 200 transmits an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P may be set to be longer than the time during which the main control board 100 transmits an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P. .
In this case, the external signal sent from the firing/dispensing control board 200 to the outside of the pachinko machine P is more reliable than the external signal sent from the main control board 100 to the outside of the pachinko machine P. This will be transmitted to the outside of the machine P.
Furthermore, the time at which the firing and payout control board 200 transmits an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P and the time at which the main control board 100 transmits an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P may be set to be the same. good.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game does not proceed based on the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value (the number of difference balls reaching a predetermined number of operation stoppages), and An activated state is set in which game balls are not fired.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation where the number of game balls acquired by the player during the game becomes excessive and the gambling quality becomes too high, and the same effect as described above during the game stop state is produced. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, during the activation state, the occurrence of only the door open error among the errors determined by the main control board 100 is determined as in the game stop state. It has become.
This makes it possible to prevent a situation where the body frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened while the main control board 100 is in the activated state, thereby causing unauthorized acts against the main control board 100.

(Overview of test signal generation and output)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main CPU 101 generates test signals used in the type test at various timings, and outputs them to the outside of the pachinko machine P from the test-dedicated output terminal 107. It has become.
In principle, the main CPU 101 sends the test signal being generated to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 from the time the generation of the test signal starts until it ends (from when the output start condition is met until the output end condition is met). Continue outputting. At this time, by connecting a dedicated receiving terminal to the test-only output terminal 107, the above-mentioned test signal is input to a test computer equipped with the receiving terminal. That is, the test signal being generated is output to the outside of the pachinko machine P (test computer) via the test-only output terminal 107 and the reception terminal by connecting the dedicated reception terminal to the test-only output terminal 107. be done. On the other hand, if a dedicated reception terminal is not connected to the test-only output terminal 107, the test signal being generated is output to the test-only output terminal 107, but is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the test signals being generated and output are shown in the first area of the main RAM 103 during the generation and output of each test signal. Test signal information (indicating that the test signal is being output) is stored.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, test signals that can be generated by the main CPU 101 and output to the test computer include a test signal regarding the progress of the game, a test signal regarding the game state, and a test regarding the state based on the differential ball operation stop control. Signals are provided.
Test signals related to the progress of the game include a test signal during normal pattern fluctuation, a test signal during normal pattern hit, a test signal during movable piece opening, a test signal during 1st special pattern fluctuation, a test signal during 1st special pattern jackpot, and a test signal during 1st special pattern jackpot. A test signal during the 2nd special figure fluctuation, a test signal during the 2nd special figure jackpot, and a test signal during the round game are provided. As test signals related to the game state, there are provided a general pattern high probability state test signal, a general pattern fluctuation shortened state test signal, a movable piece operation extension state test signal, a special pattern high probability state test signal, and a special pattern fluctuation shortened state test signal. ing. A pre-activation setting state test signal is provided as a test signal regarding the state based on the differential ball operation stop control.

The normal symbol fluctuation test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the normal symbol fluctuation display (that is, while the normal symbol is fluctuating), and is sent to the test signal via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
That is, the main CPU 101 starts generating the normal symbol fluctuation test signal and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 based on the start of the fluctuating display of the regular symbol (establishment of the output start condition), and starts the fluctuating display of the regular symbol. The generation and output are terminated based on the termination (the output termination condition is satisfied). By inputting this test signal during normal pattern variation to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer (i.e., external to the pachinko machine P) can detect the normal pattern variation. It becomes possible to understand that a variable display of normal symbols is being performed in the pachinko machine P that outputs the medium test signal.

The normal pattern winning test signal is used during the period from when a winning result occurs in the drawing of a normal pattern until the operation of the movable piece 16b ends (in other words, when a winning occurs in the drawing process using a normal pattern and the operation of the movable piece 16b based on the winning). This is a test signal that can be generated by the main CPU 101 and output to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107.
That is, the main CPU 101 generates a normal pattern winning medium test signal based on the fact that a normal symbol is a winning result and the operation of the movable piece 16b is started based on the winning (the output start condition is met), and a test signal dedicated to the test. The output to the output terminal 107 is started, and the generation and output are terminated based on the fact that all the operations of the movable piece 16b are completed (the output termination condition is satisfied). By inputting this test signal into the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the reception terminal, the test computer recognizes the pachinko machine that outputs the medium test signal. It becomes possible to understand that the movable piece 16b is being operated based on a winning result from the lottery of normal symbols.

The test signal during opening of the movable piece is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start of one opening of the movable piece 16b to the end (until it is closed), and the This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
That is, the main CPU 101 starts generating the movable piece opening test signal and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 based on the start of one opening of the movable piece 16b (establishment of the output start condition). The generation and output are terminated based on the completion of one opening of the movable piece 16b (satisfaction of the output termination condition). By inputting this movable piece open test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer recognizes the pachinko machine that outputs the movable piece open test signal. It becomes possible to grasp that the movable piece 16b is opened once.

The first special symbol fluctuation test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the special symbol fluctuation display based on the first special symbol random number, and is used for testing via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
That is, the main CPU 101 generates the first special pattern fluctuation test signal based on the start of the special pattern fluctuation display based on the first special pattern random number (establishment of the output start condition), and outputs the test signal to the test-only output terminal 107. The generation and output end based on the end of the variable display (the fulfillment of the output end condition). This first special figure fluctuation test signal is input to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the reception terminal, so that the test computer outputs the first special figure fluctuation test signal. It becomes possible to grasp that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on the first special symbol random number in the pachinko machine P that has been used.

The first special figure jackpot test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot by the first special figure random number until the end, and is tested via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer used for
That is, the main CPU 101 generates the first special pattern jackpot test signal based on the start of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot based on the first special pattern random number (establishment of the output start condition), and outputs it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107. and ends the generation and output based on the end of the special game (the fulfillment of the output end condition). By inputting this 1st special chart jackpot test signal to the test computer via the test-only output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer outputs the 1st special chart jackpot test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a special game based on a jackpot win based on the first special random number is being played in the pachinko machine P that has been played.

The second special figure fluctuation test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the special symbol fluctuation display based on the second special figure random number, and is sent to the test signal via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
That is, the main CPU 101 generates the second special pattern fluctuation test signal and outputs it to the test-only output terminal 107 based on the start of the special pattern fluctuation display based on the second special pattern random number (establishment of the output start condition). The generation and output end based on the end of the variable display (the fulfillment of the output end condition). By inputting this second special figure fluctuation test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer outputs the second special figure fluctuation test signal. It becomes possible to grasp that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on the second special symbol random number in the pachinko machine P that has been used.

The second special figure jackpot test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot by the second special figure random number until the end, and is tested via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer used for
That is, the main CPU 101 generates the second special pattern jackpot test signal based on the start of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot by the second special pattern random number (establishment of the output start condition), and outputs it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107. and ends the generation and output based on the end of the special game (the fulfillment of the output end condition). By inputting this second special chart jackpot test signal to the test computer via the test-only output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer outputs the second special chart jackpot test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a special game based on a jackpot win based on the second special figure random number is being played in the pachinko machine P that has been played.

The test signal during the round game is a test signal that is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the round game in the special game and can be output to the test computer via the test-only output terminal 107. .
That is, the main CPU 101 starts generating a round test signal and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 based on the start of the round game (the output start condition is met), and starts the output to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 when the round game ends (the output end condition is met). ), the generation and output are terminated. By inputting this round game test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer can play a round at the pachinko machine P that outputs the round game test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a game is being played.

The normal symbol high probability state test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of a gaming state in which the probability of winning by drawing normal symbols is relatively high, and is transmitted via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a test computer.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set higher during the time-saving game state (high probability time-saving game state) than during the non-time-saving game state (normal game state). (see FIG. 16), the main CPU 101 starts generating the normal game high probability state test signal and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 based on the setting of the time-saving game state (the output start condition is satisfied), and The generation and output are terminated based on the termination of the gaming state (the fulfillment of the output termination condition). By inputting this general pattern high probability state test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer can detect the pachinko machine that outputs the general pattern high probability state test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a game state is set in which the probability of winning is relatively high by drawing a normal symbol on the machine P.

The normal symbol fluctuation shortening state test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the game state in which the variation time of the normal symbols is relatively short, and is sent to the test signal via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to be shorter during the time-saving game state (during the high probability time-saving game state) than during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state). (Refer to FIG. 17), the main CPU 101 starts generating a regular figure fluctuation shortening state test signal and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 based on the setting of the time-saving game state (the output start condition is met), and starts the output to the test-only output terminal 107. The generation and output are terminated based on the end of the state (establishment of the output end condition). By inputting this general pattern fluctuation shortening state test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer can detect the pachinko machine that outputs the general pattern fluctuation shortening state test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a game state in which the variation time of normal symbols is relatively short is set in the machine P.

The movable piece operation extension state test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during a period from the start to the end of a game state in which the movable piece 16b operates for a relatively long time when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol. , is a test signal that can be output to a test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the operating time of the movable piece 16b is set to be longer during the time-saving game state (high probability time-saving game state) than during the non-time-saving game state (normal game state). (see FIG. 18), the main CPU 101 starts generating a movable piece operation extension state test signal and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 based on the setting of the time-saving game state (establishment of the output start condition), and The generation and output are terminated based on the termination of the gaming state (the fulfillment of the output termination condition). By inputting this movable piece operation extension state test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer can detect the pachinko machine that outputs the movable piece operation extension state test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a game state in which the operating time of the movable piece 16b is relatively long is set in the machine P.

The special figure high probability state test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during a period from the start to the end of a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high, and is sent to the test signal via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be higher during a high probability gaming state (during a high probability time saving gaming state) than during a low probability gaming state (during a normal gaming state). (see FIG. 7), the main CPU 101 starts generating a special pattern high probability state test signal and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 based on the setting of the high probability game state (the output start condition is satisfied). The generation and output are ended based on the end of the high probability game state (the output end condition is met). By inputting this special pattern high probability state test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer can detect the pachinko machine that outputs the special pattern high probability state test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a gaming state is set in machine P in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

The special symbol fluctuation shortening state test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the game state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is relatively short, and is generated by the main CPU 101 and sent to the test signal via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variation time of special symbols is set to be shorter during the time-saving game state (during the high probability time-saving game state) than during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state). (Refer to FIGS. 9 to 13), the main CPU 101 starts generating a special figure fluctuation reduction state test signal based on the setting of the time-saving gaming state (establishment of output start condition) and outputting it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107, The generation and output are terminated based on the end of the time-saving gaming state (the output termination condition is satisfied). By inputting this special figure fluctuation shortening state test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer can detect the pachinko machine that outputs the special figure fluctuation shortening state test signal. It becomes possible to understand that a game state is set in machine P in which the variation time of special symbols is relatively short.

The pre-activation setting state test signal is generated by the main CPU 101 during a period in which the difference pitch count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined pre-activation setting judgment value (175,000 in this embodiment), and is sent to the test signal via the test-dedicated output terminal 107. This is a test signal that can be output to a computer.
That is, when the differential ball count value is less than the pre-activation setting determination value, the main CPU 101 does not generate the pre-activation setting state test signal or output it to the test-dedicated output terminal 107; When the pre-setting determination value is exceeded (the output start condition is satisfied), generation of the pre-setting state test signal and output to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 are started. In addition, after the generation of the pre-activation setting state test signal and the output to the test-dedicated output terminal 107 are started, and before the activation state or activation notice state is set (the difference ball count value is set to the second reference value (195000 ), when the difference pitch count value becomes less than the pre-activation setting judgment value again (the output termination condition is satisfied), the main CPU 101 generates the pre-activation setting state test signal and outputs the test-dedicated output terminal. The output to 107 is ended.
By inputting this pre-invocation setting state test signal to the test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, the test computer recognizes the pachinko machine that outputs the pre-invocation setting state test signal. It becomes possible to know that the differential ball count value is equal to or greater than the pre-activation setting determination value, and it becomes possible to know that the activation state is almost set.

(Summary of test signal generation and output control when activation status is set)
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the activation state is set on the condition that the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, and the game does not proceed. If the activation state is set during generation and output, the generation and output of the test signal will continue even after the activation state is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, test signals related to the progress of the game (test signal during normal pattern fluctuation, test signal during normal pattern hit, test signal during movable piece open, first characteristic test signal, test signal during figure fluctuation, test signal during 1st special figure jackpot, test signal during 2nd special figure fluctuation, test signal during 2nd special figure jackpot, test signal during round play), test signal regarding game state (high probability of normal figure If the state test signal, general pattern variation shortening state test signal, movable piece operation extension state test signal, special pattern high probability state test signal, special pattern variation shortening state test signal) are generated and output, a power outage occurs. When this occurs, the generation and output of these test signals will temporarily stop, but after the power is restored and the activation state is resumed (in other words, the initialization process that ends the activation state (normally After the power is restored from a power outage without any initialization processing (initialization processing) being performed, the process is restarted. These test signals are continuously output until the activated state ends (that is, until the above-mentioned initialization process is performed).
In other words, test signals related to the game progress and game status that are generated and output during the activation state are generated and output until the activation state (excluding when a power outage occurs) ends. It will be done.

On the other hand, if a pre-activation setting state test signal (a test signal related to the state based on differential pitch operation stop control) is generated and output during the activation state setting, and a power outage occurs, the corresponding The generation and output of the test signal stops, and even after the power is restored from the power outage and becomes activated again, the test signal remains stopped without being restarted.
In other words, the pre-activation setting state test signal that was generated and output during the activation state setting is generated and output until the activation state ends if a power outage does not occur during the activation state. However, if a power outage occurs during the activation state, generation and output will end at this point.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and is in the pre-activation warning state or in the activation warning state (difference ball count value is less than the second reference value). If a power outage occurs during the activation period), the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are temporarily stopped, as in the activation state.
Then, after the above-mentioned temporary stop, the power is restored with the above-mentioned specific error (an error that seriously affects the progress of the game) occurring, and the state again becomes the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state. In this case, the difference ball count value that was stored at the time of the power outage is maintained, and since this difference ball count value is greater than or equal to the pre-activation setting judgment value, the pre-activation setting state test signal is returned after the power outage is restored. generation and output will now resume. On the other hand, if the power is restored without any specific error occurring, the difference pitch count value will be reset, and this difference ball count value will be less than the judgment value before activation setting, so it will be activated after the power is restored. The generation and output of the pre-setting state test signal will not be restarted.
Although not particularly shown, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the effect display device 2 On the display unit 21a, a preparation image (for example, "Returning to the screen, please continue playing") is displayed, indicating that there is a preparation period until various effects such as background image display and variable effects can be executed. If the generation and output of the pre-activation setting test signal is restarted after the above-mentioned temporary stop, the pre-activation setting state will be displayed during the activation preparation period described above. Test signals will be generated and output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and during the activation notification state, the same as during the activation state, The generation and output of the test signal stops, and even after recovering from the power outage and entering the activation notice state again, it remains stopped without being restarted. That is, when a power outage occurs during the activation notice state, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal that has been generated and output during the activation notice state ends at this point. In addition, if a power outage occurs during the activation warning state, and the power is restored from the power outage without performing the initialization process that ends the activation warning state, the generation of the pre-activation setting state test signal, Output may be restarted.

(Concrete example)
Next, generation of a test signal and control of output when the activation state is set will be explained using a specific example.
For example, a test signal during normal symbol fluctuation (a test signal related to the progress of the game) is generated and output while the normal symbol is fluctuating. When the activation state is set during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol, the fluctuating display of the regular symbol being executed stops, while the generation and output of the test signal during the fluctuating common symbol continues. In addition, if a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the test signal during normal pattern fluctuation will be temporarily stopped, but the initialization process that will end the activation state will not be performed and the power outage will continue. When it returns, the generation and output of the normal pattern fluctuation test signal are restarted. When the activation state being set ends, the generation and output of the normal pattern fluctuation test signal also end.
Further, for example, a test signal during the first special symbol fluctuation (a test signal related to the progress of the game) is generated and output during the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number. If the activation state is set during the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the special symbol in progress will stop, but the generation and output of the first special symbol fluctuating test signal will continue. . In addition, if a power outage occurs during this activated state, the generation and output of the first special symbol fluctuation test signal will be temporarily stopped, but the initialization process that will end the activated state will not be performed and the power will be turned off. Upon recovery from the interruption, generation and output of the first special figure fluctuation test signal are restarted. When the activation state being set ends, the generation and output of the first special symbol fluctuation test signal also end.
Further, for example, the second special figure jackpot test signal (test signal regarding the progress of the game) is generated and output during execution of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot by the second special figure random number. If the activation state is set during the execution of the special game, the special game will stop, and if the big prize opening 18 has been opened, the big winning opening 18 will be closed, while the second special jackpot medium test will start. Signal generation and output continue. In addition, if a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the second special map jackpot test signal will be temporarily stopped, but the initialization process that will end the activation state will not be performed and the power will be turned off. Upon recovery from the interruption, generation and output of the second special chart jackpot test signal are restarted. Then, when the activation state being set ends, the generation and output of the second special map jackpot test signal also ends.

In addition, for example, both the normal figure high probability state test signal and the special figure high probability state test signal (test signal related to the gaming state) are generated during the high probability time saving gaming state (during the time saving gaming state, during the high probability gaming state). , and is output. If the activation state is set during the high probability time-saving game state, the progress of the game will stop, but the generation and output of the normal pattern high probability state test signal and the special pattern high probability state test signal will continue. be exposed. In addition, if a power outage occurs during this activated state, the generation and output of the general pattern high probability state test signal and the special pattern high probability state test signal will be temporarily stopped, but the initialization process will end the activated state. When the circuit recovers from the power interruption without being performed, the generation and output of the general pattern high probability state test signal and the special pattern high probability state test signal are restarted. When the activation state being set ends, the generation and output of the general pattern high probability state test signal and the special pattern high probability state test signal also end.

Further, the pre-activation setting state signal (a test signal regarding the state based on the differential pitch operation stop control) is generated and output while the differential pitch count value is equal to or greater than the pre-activation setting determination value. If the activation state is set during this period, the progress of the game is stopped, but the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state signal continues. Additionally, if a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting status signal will be terminated, and even if the power is restored from the power outage, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting status signal will continue. Not restarted. In addition, if a power outage does not occur during this activation state, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state signal will continue during the activation state, and when the activation state ends, the pre-activation setting signal will continue to be generated and output. The generation and output of the status signal also ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, test signals related to the progress of the game, the game status It is possible to generate and output a test signal related to the activation setting and a test signal related to the state before activation setting (a test signal related to the state based on the differential pitch operation stop control).
If the activation state is set and the game progress is stopped and the model test is interrupted, the final test results will not be obtained and data such as ball payout rate that has been accumulated over a long period of time will be lost. There is a possibility that a situation may arise in which the information is wasted. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, by making it possible to generate and output a pre-activation setting state test signal, it is possible to know from the test signal that the activation state is about to be set, so the difference ball count can be counted in advance. It is possible to prevent the activation state from being set by taking measures such as resetting the value, and it is possible to appropriately prevent the above-mentioned situation from occurring.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the activation state is set during the generation and output of a test signal regarding the game progress, a test signal regarding the game state, and a state test signal before activation setting, the activation state The generation and output of these test signals continues even after the settings are made.
This eliminates the need for the process of generating and stopping the output of test signals based on the setting of the activation state, making it possible to reduce the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101. In addition, even after the activation state is set, the game progress and gaming status before the activation state is set can be grasped on the test computer, making test signals more convenient and efficient. It becomes possible to carry out type tests.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a test signal regarding the progress of the game and a test signal regarding the gaming state are generated and output while setting the activation state, when a power outage occurs, the activation The generation and output of these test signals are restarted after the power failure is restored without performing the initialization process that ends the state.
As a result, even if a power outage occurs during the activated state, after the power is restored, it will be possible to grasp the gaming progress and gaming status before the activated state was set on the test computer. Furthermore, the convenience of test signals is increased, and type tests can be carried out more efficiently.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if a pre-activation setting state test signal is generated and output during setting of the activated state, when a power outage occurs, the activated state ends. Even if the device recovers from the power outage without performing initialization processing, generation and output of the test signal are not restarted.
After the activation state is set, the game does not proceed, and as will be described later, an activation suggestion is made on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 indicating that the activation state is being set. Even without generating and outputting a pre-activation setting state test signal, it is possible to know from the appearance of the pachinko machine P that the activation state is being set. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while setting the activation state, generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are not restarted even if the power is restored from the power outage. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 when a power outage occurs during the activation state.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the activation state is set, a security signal indicating that the activation state has been set is generated and output, and when a power outage occurs while the activation state is being set, Generation and output of the security signal are restarted after the power is restored from the power outage without performing the initialization process that ends the activation state.
As a result, for example, the activation suggestion is not executed due to a failure of the effect display device 21, the progress of the game is not stopped due to a failure of the main CPU 101, and the appearance of the pachinko machine P indicates that the activation state is being set. Even if it cannot be determined, by checking whether the security signal is generated (output), it is possible to determine that the activation state is being set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and during the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, a specific error occurs. (Error that seriously affects the progress of the game) occurs and when the power is restored and the state returns to the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, a pre-activation setting state test signal is generated and output. The generation and output of this pre-activation setting state test signal are performed during the startup preparation period from when the power is restored until a predetermined startup time has elapsed. .
As a result, even if the preparation image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 because the activation preparation period is in progress, the activation can be performed by checking whether or not the activation pre-setting state test signal is output. It becomes possible to know that the state is about to be set.

(Modifications related to test signal generation and output)
The test signals related to the progress of the game and the test signals related to the game state that can be generated and output by the main CPU 101 are not limited to those described above, and test signals other than the above test signals may be generated according to the game specifications, etc. It may also be possible to generate and output a part of the above test signal. Even in this case, the same control as that of the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment (such as control after the activation state is set) may be performed on the test signal.
For example, in a pachinko machine P that is set to execute a special game with a different number of rounds depending on the type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won, the special game is A different special map jackpot test signal may be provided for each. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won by the first special symbol random number, when special symbol A is determined, a special game in which three rounds of round games are performed is executed, and when special symbol B is determined, a special game is executed in which a round game of 3 rounds is performed. If a special game in which 8 rounds of round games are played is set to be executed, a first special symbol jackpot signal A that can be generated and output during the special game based on the determination of the special symbol A; A first special symbol jackpot signal B that can be generated and output during the special game based on the determination of the special symbol B may be provided.
In addition, for example, in a pachinko machine P that is set to win not only a jackpot but also a small win through a lottery for a jackpot, a test signal regarding the progress of the game is used after winning a small win. A small-win medium test signal may be provided as a test signal that can be generated and output until the winning game ends.
For example, in a pachinko machine P that is set to start a special game when the game ball passes through a predetermined passage area after winning a jackpot, winning a jackpot is used as a test signal regarding the progress of the game. A game ball passage waiting test signal that can be generated and output during the period from when the game ball passes through the passing area may be provided.
In addition, for example, there is a high probability non-time-saving gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and during this high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than in the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P set to , a special symbol variation shortening test signal may be generated and output as a test signal regarding the gaming state during this high probability non-time saving gaming state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in order to make the performance of the regular pattern game higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning by lottery of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, Although all three elements of the operating time of the movable piece 16b are made different, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of these elements may be made different. Then, a test signal regarding the gaming state may be generated and output depending on the different elements.
For example, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operating time of the movable piece 16b are both the same in the gaming state. If set to , during the time saving game state, only the normal pattern high probability state test signal is output as a test signal related to the gaming state, and the normal pattern fluctuation shortening state test signal and the movable piece operation extension state test signal are output. You may choose not to do so.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the differential ball count value is equal to or greater than the pre-activation setting determination value (170000), a pre-activation setting state test signal, which is a signal related to the state based on the differential ball operation stop control, is generated. , and can be output, and the pre-activation setting judgment value is a value smaller than the first reference value (190000) at which the activation warning state is set and the second reference value (195000) at which the activation state is set. is determined, but is not limited to this as long as it is a smaller value than the second reference value.
For example, the pre-activation setting determination value may be the same value as the first reference value, or may be larger than the first reference value and smaller than the second reference value.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved.

Further, the test signal related to the state based on the differential pitch operation stop control that can be generated and output by the main CPU 101 is not limited to the pre-activation setting state test signal.
For example, in addition to this pre-activation setting state test signal, the difference ball count value may be a judgment value immediately before activation setting that is greater than the judgment value before activation setting and smaller than the second reference value (for example, 190000, which is the same as the first reference value). When the above is the case, it may be possible to generate and output a state test signal immediately before activation setting indicating this fact. Further, for example, when the difference pitch count value is equal to or greater than the activation setting proximity judgment value (for example, 160000, etc.) which is smaller than the pre-activation setting judgment value, it may be possible to generate and output an activation setting proximity test signal indicating this fact. . These test signals may be subjected to the same control as the pre-activation setting state test signal of the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment are achieved, and in addition, in the test computer, the period until the activation state is set can be determined in more detail. It becomes possible to understand.

In addition, test signals that can be generated and output by the main CPU 101 can be generated and output during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, and the game does not proceed. A test signal indicating that the game cannot proceed may be provided. In addition, if a power outage occurs while the game progress impossible test signal is being generated or output, and if the state remains in the state before the power outage even after recovery from the power outage, the game progress impossible test signal will be Generation and output may not be restarted.
Even in the case described above, the same effect as the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is achieved, and the game does not proceed on the test computer only by checking whether or not the above-mentioned test signal is output. It becomes possible to understand the status.
Furthermore, by making it possible to generate and output the same game progress prohibition test signal during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, it is possible to indicate that the game is not progressing. can be grasped, but the type of the set state may be impossible to grasp. Furthermore, by making it possible to generate and output a different game progress prohibition test signal for each state being set, it may be possible to grasp both the fact that the game is not progressing and the type of the set state. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the activation state is set during the generation and output of test signals regarding the progress of the game and the test signals regarding the gaming state, the test signals will continue to be activated even after the activation state is set. If generation and output are continued and a power outage occurs during this activated state, the above test signal The generation and output of the test signals are restarted, but this control may not be performed for all test signals, but may be performed for only some test signals.
For example, among the test signals related to the progress of the game and the test signals related to the game state, test signals related to special pattern games and special games (1st special pattern fluctuation test signal, 1st special pattern jackpot test signal, 2nd special pattern test signal Although the above-mentioned control is performed for the test signal during fluctuation, the test signal during the second special pattern jackpot, the test signal during the round game, the special pattern high probability state test signal, and the special pattern fluctuation shortened state test signal, Regarding the test signals (test signal during normal pattern fluctuation, medium test signal per normal pattern, test signal during movable piece open, general pattern high probability state test signal, general pattern fluctuation shortened state test signal, movable piece operation extended state test signal) , the above control may not be performed.
In addition, although the above-mentioned test signals related to special figure games and special games, and test signals related to regular figure games continue to be generated and output even after the activation state is set, power outages may occur during the activation state. If this occurs, test signals related to special map games and special games will be generated and output again after the power outage is restored, but test signals related to the regular map games will be generated and output will be resumed after the power outage is restored. You may choose not to do so.
In the case described above, various controls regarding the output of the test signal can be executed according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine P, and the convenience of the test signal can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the activation state is set during the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal, the generation and output of the test signal will continue even after the activation state is set. If a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the test signal described above will not be restarted after recovery from the power outage. Control is not limited to this.
For example, if the activation state is set during the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal, the generation and output of the test signal may be terminated after the activation state is set. In addition, if the above-mentioned test signal generation and output are set to continue even after the activation state is set, if a power outage occurs during the activation state, the activation state will end. When the device recovers from the power outage without performing initialization processing, generation and output of the test signal described above may be restarted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a power outage occurs while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and during the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, and a specific error occurs. When the power is restored in the state where the power is interrupted, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are restarted, but the control may be performed as described below.
For example, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may be restarted whenever the power is restored as described above. Furthermore, when the power is restored as described above, if the difference ball count value is equal to or higher than a predetermined restart judgment value (for example, 180000), the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal will be resumed, but the difference ball count value If is less than the restart determination value, generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may not be restarted. In addition, if the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal is not restarted when the difference pitch count value is less than the restart judgment value, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the power failure recovery (for example, the activation preparation described above). (after the period has elapsed), the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may be resumed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the gaming stop state is set, a security signal indicating this is generated and output, and when the activated state is set, a security signal indicating that is generated and output. and output. In other words, different security signals are generated and output when the gaming stop state is set and when the activation state is set, and depending on the generated and output security signals, the gaming suspension state or the activation state However, the generation and output of the security signal are not limited to the above.
For example, the same security signal is generated and output both when the gaming stop state is set and when the activated state is set, so that the state where the game does not proceed is set. Although it is possible to know, it may be impossible to know which of the game stop state and the activated state is set.
Additionally, regarding the security signal based on the settings of the activated state, if a power outage occurs during the activated state and the power is restored from the power outage without performing the initialization process that ends the activated state, the security signal will be generated and output. was supposed to be restarted, but generation and output may not be restarted.

(Summary of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the main control board 100 as the above-mentioned special figure game, regular figure game, and special game progress will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the power failure saving process of the main control board 100 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the voltage of the supplied power drops below a predetermined value, the main processing of the main control board 100, which will be described later, is interrupted and a power outage evacuation process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21 is executed. .

In step 100, the main CPU 101 determines whether a power outage occurrence signal is detected. If it is determined that no power interruption occurrence signal has been detected, the power interruption saving process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that a power interruption occurrence signal is detected, the process proceeds to step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 executes a process of calculating the checksum of the used area and the unused area in the main RAM 103, and stores the calculated checksum in the second area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 stores various data stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103 (setting values, gaming machine status flag indicating control status, test signal information, checksum, backup flag, error information, game progress). A backup process is executed to hold various data related to the above, gaming performance data), and a backup flag indicating the result of this backup process is stored in the second area. Then, the process advances to the next step 103.
In step 103, the main CPU 101 prohibits access to the main RAM 103. As a result, from now on, it becomes impossible to store various data in the main RAM 103 or read (load) various data from the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 104.

In step 104, the main CPU 101 sends various signals to the firing and payout control board 200 (a main command permission signal indicating that two-way communication with the main control board 100 has been established and commands can be sent to the main control board 100, a game ball (e.g., a launch permission signal that authorizes the launch of an aircraft). Furthermore, if one or more test signals are being generated and output, the main CPU 101 stops generating and outputting all test signals. Furthermore, if a security signal based on the activation state has been generated and output, the main CPU 101 stops generating and outputting the security signal. Then, the process advances to the next step 105.
In step 105, the main CPU 101 sets a power failure monitoring time (3000 ms) to a power failure monitoring time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 106.

In step 106, the main CPU 101 determines whether a power outage occurrence signal is detected. If it is determined that a power interruption occurrence signal is detected, the process returns to step 105. On the other hand, if it is determined that no power interruption occurrence signal has been detected, the process proceeds to the next step 107.
In step 107, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power interruption monitoring time set in step 105 described above has elapsed. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 106. On the other hand, if it is determined that the elapsed time has elapsed, the power interruption evacuation process is terminated, and a power failure recovery process, which will be described later, is executed. Note that a subtraction timer is used for the power interruption monitoring time counter, and the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the above-mentioned determination of the detection of the power interruption occurrence signal is executed, and when it reaches 0, the power interruption occurs. It is determined that the monitoring time has elapsed. When a power outage occurs, the operation of the pachinko machine P is stopped while the steps from step 105 to step 107 described above are looped.

Next, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
When power is supplied by the power supply board 600 (recovery from power outage), a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22.

In step 110, the main CPU 101 executes a power failure recovery process. Then, the process advances to the next step 111.
In step 111, the main CPU 101 prohibits interrupts from other processes. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 112.

In step 112, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number, which is referred to when updating the winning symbol random number. This initial value update random number for winning pattern random number is for determining the initial value of the winning pattern random number. That is, the winning pattern random number is updated using the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number at the time of starting updating as an initial value. When this random number range is rotated once, the winning symbol random number is continued to be updated using the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number at that time as the initial value. Then, the process advances to the next step 113.
In step 113, the main CPU 101 analyzes various commands used to execute the special figure game and the regular figure game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 114.

In step 114, the main CPU 101 transmits to the sub-control board 300 the command stored (set) in the performance transmission data storage area in the power failure recovery process. This makes it possible to display the background image and the above-mentioned preparation image on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 when the power is restored. Then, the process advances to the next step 115.
In step 115, the main CPU 101 allows interrupts from other processes. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 116.

In step 116, the main CPU 101 updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, which are random numbers for determining the fluctuation performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as random numbers for fluctuation performance). When the process of step 116 is completed, the process of steps 111 to 116 is repeatedly executed until a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the process at the time of power failure recovery in step 110 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.
In step 130, the main CPU 101 is necessary for executing various processes when recovering from a power failure (when the power switch 650 is turned on, when recovering from an unexpected power failure), such as reading a startup program from the main ROM 102. Perform initial setting processing. Further, the main CPU 101 starts transmitting various signals (a firing permission signal, a main command permission signal, etc.) to the firing and dispensing control board 200. As a result, based on the rotational operation of the operating handle 5, it is possible to execute control for firing game balls by the firing and payout control board 200, and it is also possible to send commands from the firing and payout control board 200 to the main control board 100. . Although not particularly shown, the main CPU 101 allows access to the main RAM 103. As a result, from now on, it becomes possible to store various data in the main RAM 103 and read (load) various data from the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 131.
In step 131, the main CPU 101 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 103 at this point, and adds the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the second area of the main RAM 103 (calculated in step 101 immediately before the power outage occurs). Based on the backup flag stored in the second area, it is determined whether or not a backup abnormality has occurred. If it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred, the process advances to step 136. On the other hand, if it is determined that no backup abnormality has occurred, the process advances to the next step 132.

In step 132, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the process proceeds to step 136. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 109 is not on (that is, off), the process proceeds to the next step 133.
In step 133, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state during the stay is a playable state, the setting switch 108 is on, and the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, that is, the playable state has ended and the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether the conditions for setting are met. If it is determined that the conditions are not met (that is, the control state during the stay is a setting confirmation state, a setting change state, or a game stop state, the setting switch 108 is off, or the main body frame opening detection sensor 2a is off) ), the process proceeds to step 135. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next step 134.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the gaming machine status flag indicating the control status during the stay is stored in the first area of the usage area of the main RAM 103, and this gaming machine By referring to the status flag, the control status during the stay can be determined.

In step 134, the main CPU 101 sets a setting confirmation state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating this in the first area. Then, the process advances to the next step 135.
In step 135, the main CPU 101 executes clear processing if the setting confirmation state is set in step 134 described above. In addition, if a RAM abnormality has occurred, the main CPU 101 executes a game stop state setting based on the RAM abnormality, which will be described later, and a stop related process based on the game stop state setting, and further performs abnormality initialization. If the process is executed but no RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state before the power outage is set. The process then proceeds to step 144.

Further, if it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred in step 131 described above, in step 136, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 109 is on in step 132 described above, the main CPU 101 determines that a RAM abnormality has occurred. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that no RAM abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to step 138. On the other hand, if it is determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the process advances to the next step 137.
In step 137, the main CPU 101 sets a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of the RAM abnormality, and stores in the first area a gaming machine state flag indicating that the gaming stop state is set based on the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. Further, the main CPU 101 executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. Specifically, the stop-related processing includes a process of stopping the transmission of the firing permission signal to the firing payout control board 200, a variable display of special symbols, a variable display of normal symbols, and a special game executed before setting the game stop state. processing to stop these if they have been done, processing to stop determining errors related to the main control, processing to stop (restrict) control for transmitting winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P, main information display device 105, the process of displaying an error code, the process of generating a security signal based on the game stop state setting and outputting it to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and stopping the generation and output of the test signal that was being generated or output. (end) processing, etc. is executed. As a result, even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, the firing and payout control board 200 cannot perform the control to fire the game balls, and furthermore, the progress of the game is stopped. Furthermore, among the errors whose occurrence is determined in the main control board 100, errors other than the door opening error are no longer determined, and the control to output external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted. Ru. On the other hand, although the control to pay out game balls and the control to transmit external signals such as payout prize ball signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P by the firing and payout control board 200 are continued, there are errors such as out-of-ball errors, full-fill errors, and payout. Judgments will no longer be made for counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, and payout radio wave errors. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.

Further, in step 138, which is proceeded when it is determined that no RAM abnormality has occurred in step 136 described above, the main CPU 101 determines the setting change conditions (i.e., setting switch 108 is on, RAM clear switch 109 is on, main body frame is open). The detection sensor 2a is on) is determined. If it is determined that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 140. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to the next step 139.
In step 139, the main CPU 101 sets a setting change state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating this in the first area. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.

Furthermore, in step 140, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 138 described above that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a backup abnormality has occurred. If it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to step 142. On the other hand, if it is determined that no backup abnormality has occurred, the process advances to the next step 141.
In step 141, the main CPU 101 sets the game-enabled state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating this in the first area. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.

Further, in step 142, which is proceeded when it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred in the above-mentioned step 140, the main CPU 101 sets a gaming stop state based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality, and sets a gaming machine state flag indicating that. is stored in the first area. Further, the main CPU 101 executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related process is the same as the process executed when the game stop state is set due to the occurrence of a RAM abnormality (the process executed in step 137 described above), so a description thereof will be omitted here. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.
In step 143, the main CPU 101 determines that if a gaming stop state is set due to a RAM abnormality or a backup abnormality, or if a backup abnormality has occurred but the setting change conditions are met and a setting change state is set, Executes initialization processing in case of abnormality. In addition, if a backup abnormality has not occurred and the setting change conditions are satisfied and the setting change state is set, or if the RAM clear switch 109 is on and the game ready state is set, Executes normal initialization processing. The process then proceeds to step 144.

In step 144, the main CPU 101 sends a command (for example, a status setting command (game stop command) indicating that a game stop state has been set) to be sent to the sub control board 300 when the power is restored from the power outage to the effect transmission data storage area. to be memorized. The command stored here is sent to the sub-control board 300 in step 114 described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 145.
In step 145, the main CPU 101 transmits a predetermined command to the firing and dispensing control board 200 according to the process executed at the time of power recovery. The process then proceeds to the next step 146.

In step 146, the main CPU 101 executes differential pitch control reset processing based on the power failure recovery. Then, the power failure recovery process ends.

Next, the difference ball control reset process in step 146 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.
In step 150, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an activation advance notice state or a state value corresponding to the activation state is stored in the difference ball action stop phase data. If it is determined that the activation advance notice state or the state value corresponding to the activation state is not stored (that is, the state value corresponding to the activation pre-warning state or the activation warning state is stored), the process proceeds to step 156. On the other hand, if it is determined that the activation notice state or the state value corresponding to the activation state is stored, the process advances to the next step 151.
In step 151, the main CPU 101 determines whether initialization processing (normal initialization processing) accompanying setting of the setting change state has been executed in the above-described power failure recovery processing. If it is determined that the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state has not been executed, the process advances to step 155. On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state has been executed, the process advances to the next step 152.

In step 152, the main CPU 101 clears the difference ball action stop control phase data, and stores the state value corresponding to the pre-warning state in the difference ball action stop control phase data. As a result, the activation state or activation warning state that is being set ends, and the pre-activation warning state is set. Then, the process advances to the next step 153.
In step 153, the main CPU 101 resets the difference pitch count value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 154.

In step 154, the main CPU 101 determines whether one or more test signal information is stored in the first area of the main RAM 103 (that is, one or more test signals were generated and output before the power outage occurred). If the activation security information is stored in the first area of the main RAM 103 (in other words, if the activation state was set before the power outage occurred), all test signal information is cleared. Clear activation security information. As a result, if one or more test signals have been generated and output before the power outage occurs, the generation and output of all test signals is completed and the activation state is set before the power outage occurs. If so, the generation and output of the security signal based on the setting of the activation state ends. Then, the difference ball control reset process ends.
Further, in step 155, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 151 that the initialization process accompanying the setting of the setting change state has not been executed, the main CPU 101 stores the pre-activation setting state test signal in the first area of the main RAM 103. If the test signal information is stored (that is, the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output), the test signal information is cleared. As a result, if the pre-activation setting state test signal has been generated and output before the power outage occurs, the generation and output are completed. On the other hand, if the first area stores test signal information about test signals related to the progress of the game, test signal information about test signals related to the game status, and activation security information, the main CPU 101 stores these test signals. Do not clear signal information and activation security information. As a result, if a test signal related to the progress of the game or a test signal related to the game state has been generated and output before the power outage occurs, the generation and output are restarted. Furthermore, if a security signal based on the activation state setting has been generated and output before the power outage occurs, the generation and output are restarted. Then, the difference ball control reset process ends.

Further, in step 156, which is proceeded to when it is determined in step 150 that the activation notice state or the state value corresponding to the activation state is not stored, the main CPU 101 clears the differential pitch operation stop control phase data, and clears the differential ball operation stop control phase data. A state value corresponding to the state before activation warning is stored in the ball operation stop control phase data. As a result, if the pre-activation warning state was in place before the power outage occurred, the pre-activation warning state is ended and the pre-activation warning state is set anew. Further, if the activation warning state is in effect before the power cut occurs, the activation warning state ends and a pre-activation warning state is set. Then, the process advances to the next step 157.
In step 157, the main CPU 101 determines whether a specific error is occurring. If it is determined that a specific error has occurred, the difference ball control reset process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that no specific error has occurred, the process proceeds to the next step 158.

In step 158, the main CPU 101 resets the difference pitch count value stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the difference ball control reset process ends.
In addition, if the activation notice state or the state value corresponding to the activation state is not stored (i.e., if the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state is set), the state where a specific error has occurred is Regardless of whether there is, test signal information about the test signal regarding the progress of the game, test signal information about the test signal about the game state, test signal information about the pre-activation setting state signal is stored, These test signal information are not cleared. As a result, if a test signal related to the progress of the game, a test signal related to the game state, and a pre-activation setting state signal have been generated and output before the power outage occurs, the generation and output are restarted.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 100 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state during the stay is a game-enabled state and the state related to the differential ball operation stop control is other than the activated state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state). Determine whether If it is determined that the game is not in a playable state (i.e., the game is stopped, the settings are changed, or the settings are confirmed), or the game is in the playable state but is not in an activated state (i.e., the activated state), Proceed to step 218. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the playable state and is not in the active state, the process proceeds to the next step 201.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 executes timer update processing to update various timer counters. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202. Note that the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 is executed, the timer counter is subtracted by 1, and when it reaches 0, the subtraction is stopped. It has become.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 updates the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0", and when the random number counter completes one round, updates the random number from the value of the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number at that time. Then, the process advances to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 inputs input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, the big winning opening detection sensor 18a, the general winning opening detection sensor 14a, and the out sensor 19a. It is determined whether or not there has been, and based on this, a sensor detection time process is executed to perform a predetermined process. Note that this sensor detection process is not executed during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state. As a result, during these states, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 14, the first starting winning hole 15, the second starting winning hole 16, or the big winning hole 18, or the game ball passes through the gate 20. Even if a new prize ball, a new special pattern random number is held in memory, and a new general pattern random number is held in memory, no new prize ball, new special pattern random number, or new general pattern random number is generated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a special figure game and a special figure related control process for controlling the special game. In addition, this special figure related control process is not executed during the game stop state, during the setting change state, during the setting confirmation state, and during the activation state. As a result, during these states, the jackpot lottery, the variable display of special symbols, and the special game are not executed. Then, the process advances to the next step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes a control process related to the standard game to control the standard game. It should be noted that this common figure related control process is not executed during a game stop state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, and an activation state. As a result, the normal symbol lottery is not executed during these states. Then, the process advances to the next step 206.

In step 206, the main CPU 101 determines the firing position for determining the game area (first game area 12a, second game area 12b) in which to launch the game ball according to the game state (normal game state, high probability time-saving game state). Execute control processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 executes a state control process that performs various processes related to errors.
Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is in the game ready state and is in a state other than the activation state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state), the main CPU 101 determines whether a door opening error or a main control related error has occurred. Also, it is determined whether or not a determination has been made in the firing and dispensing control board 200 that a dispensing related error other than a door opening error has occurred. When it is determined that a door opening error or a main control related error has occurred, or when it is determined that a dispensing related error other than a door opening error has occurred in the firing and dispensing control board 200 (i.e., a door opening error When the main CPU 101 detects the occurrence of a payout-related error other than 1), the main CPU 101 transmits an error suggestion command indicating the error that has occurred to the sub-control board 300 and the external information terminal board 500. As a result, an error suggestion image corresponding to the error that has occurred is displayed on the effect display device 21, and various lamps (board effect lamp GL, front door effect lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) are displayed in a manner corresponding to the error that has occurred. The error that has occurred is suggested by turning on the light or outputting an error-suggesting sound corresponding to the error that has occurred from the audio output device 10, and the hall computer etc. is notified that the above-mentioned error has occurred. It will be done.
Furthermore, when the game is in the stopped state, the settings change state, or the settings confirmation state, or when the game is enabled and activated, the main CPU 101 only determines whether or not a door opening error has occurred. . If it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the main CPU 101 transmits an error suggestion command indicating a door opening error to the sub control board 300 and the external information terminal board 500, as described above. As a result, an error suggestion image corresponding to a door opening error is displayed on the effect display device 21, and various lamps (board surface effect lamp GL, front door effect lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) are displayed in a manner corresponding to a door open error. By turning on the light or outputting an error suggestion sound corresponding to the door opening error from the audio output device 10, it is suggested that a door opening error has occurred, and the hall computer etc. is notified that a door opening error has occurred. will be notified.
Further, when it is determined that the error that has occurred has been canceled, or when it is determined that the error that has occurred has been canceled, the main CPU 101 sends an error cancellation command to the sub control board 300 and external information terminal board 500. Send. As a result, the error suggestion that was being executed can be terminated, and the hall computer etc. will be notified of the cancellation of the error that has occurred.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 executes a payout control process for performing various processes necessary for paying out game balls on the firing payout control board 200.
Specifically, when the detection signals from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the big winning opening detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101. , the main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counter provided in response to each detection signal, and transmits a prize ball designation command corresponding to each detection signal to the firing and payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300. . Furthermore, the main CPU 101 increments the difference ball count value by the number of prize balls corresponding to the above-mentioned detection signal (the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the entry of game balls into each winning hole).
As mentioned above, even if the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or activation state is set after the prize ball designation command is sent to the firing and payout control board 200, the firing and payout based on the prize ball designation command will not be performed. The control board 200 continues to control the payout of prize balls.
In addition, during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, as mentioned above, the game does not proceed, so the general winning hole detection sensor 14a, the first starting winning hole detection sensor 15a, the first starting winning hole detection sensor 15a, Detection of game balls by the 2-start winning opening detection sensor 16a and the big winning opening detection sensor 18a is not performed. Therefore, no new payout control process is started during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or activation state.
Then, the process advances to the next step 209.

In step 209, the main CPU 101 executes external information control processing to control the output of various external signals to the external information terminal board 500. When the game is in the playable state and is in a state other than the activation state, control is performed to transmit external signals such as the above-mentioned winning signal and jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P by executing this external information control process. However, since the game does not proceed while the game is stopped, settings changed, settings confirmed, or activated, control to output external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted. be done. Further, when the game stop state is set, control is performed to generate a security signal based on the setting of the game stop state and output it to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Further, when the activation state is set, control is performed to generate a security signal based on the setting of the activation state and output it to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and control is performed to store activation security information in the first area of the main RAM 103. will be held.
For example, if a game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or activation state occurs while a winning signal, which is an external signal, is being output, the winning signal will remain output. In addition, even if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16 after the game is in the stopped state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or activation state, the main CPU 101 Since this is not detected, the output of a new winning signal will not be started.
Furthermore, if the game is stopped, the settings are changed, or the settings are confirmed while the jackpot signal, which is an external signal, is being output, the jackpot signal remains output. Furthermore, after the game is in the stopped state, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, and the activation state, the main CPU 101 does not start the special game, so the output of a new jackpot signal is not started.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 210.

In step 210, the main CPU 101 generates the starting winning opening solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16, and the big winning opening solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18. Execute solenoid control processing to set mouth solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 211.
In step 211, the main CPU 101 displays various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol reservation display device 38, second special symbol reservation display device 39 and the normal symbol holding display device 33). Then, the process advances to the next step 212.

In step 212, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing to output the starting winning hole solenoid data and the big winning hole solenoid data set in step 210 described above, and the display data created in step 211 described above to the corresponding port. Execute. Thereby, based on these data, the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16, the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18, and the display on various display devices are performed. The main CPU 101 also performs processing for transmitting commands stored in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 213.
In step 213, the main CPU 101 executes performance display control processing to display gaming performance display information on the main information display device 105. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 214.

In step 214, the main CPU 101 executes difference pitch related command set processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 215.
In step 215, the main CPU 101 executes difference pitch determination control processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 216.

In step 216, the main CPU 101 executes test signal control processing related to test signal generation and control of output start and end.
Specifically, when the conditions for starting the generation and output of each test signal (output start condition) are satisfied, the main CPU 101 starts generating and outputting the test signal, and also writes data to the first area of the main RAM 103. Store test signal information corresponding to the test signal. Furthermore, when each test signal is being generated and output, if a condition for terminating the generation and output (output termination condition) is met, the main CPU 101 terminates the generation and output of the test signal and , clears the test signal information corresponding to the test signal stored in the first area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 217.

In step 217, the main CPU 101 executes a handle operation command control process based on the handle operation command transmitted from the firing and dispensing control means 200.
Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a handle operation command is received from the firing and dispensing control board 200, and if it is determined that a handle operation command is received, the main CPU 101 rotates the operation handle 5. A rotation operation command indicating that is being performed is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, it is possible to transmit to the sub-control board 300 that the rotation operation of the operation handle 5 is being performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the steering wheel operation command has not been received, the main CPU 101 does not perform any particular processing.
As described above, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the game stop state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the playable state regardless of the state related to the differential ball operation stop control, the operation handle 5 If the rotation operation is performed, a handle operation command is transmitted from the firing and dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100. Therefore, even if the game is stopped or activated, if the rotation operation of the operation handle 5 is performed, a rotation operation command is sent to the sub-control board 300, and the rotation operation of the operation handle 5 is performed on the sub-control board 300. This will allow you to understand what is happening.
Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 ends.

Further, in step 218, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 200 that the game is not in the playable state or that the game is in the playable state but is not in an activated state, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state during the stay is a setting change state or a setting change state. Determine whether it is in the confirmation state. If it is determined that the state is neither the setting change state nor the setting confirmation state (that is, the game is stopped or the game is enabled and activated), the process advances to step 207. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the process advances to the next step 219.
In step 218, the main CPU 101 executes setting-related processing. Then, the process advances to step 207.

Next, the process at the time of sensor detection in step 203 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes gate detection processing for performing a lottery of normal symbols based on the game ball passing through the gate 20. Then, the process advances to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a first starting winning hole detection process for performing a jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15. Then, the process advances to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a second starting winning hole detection process for performing a jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting winning hole 16. Then, the process advances to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a process at the time of detecting a big winning hole to perform a predetermined process based on the game ball entering the big winning hole 18. Then, the process advances to the next step 304.

In step 304, the main CPU 101 executes a general winning hole detection process for performing a predetermined process based on the game ball entering the general winning hole 14. Then, the process advances to the next step 305.
In step 305, the main CPU 101 executes out detection processing to perform predetermined processing based on the detection of a game ball by the out sensor 19a. Then, the process at the time of sensor detection ends.

Next, the process at the time of gate detection in step 300 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input. If it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a is not input, the gate detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the reserved number of regular pictures counter (that is, the number of reserved regular pictures at the present time) is less than "4". If it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the gate detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the ordinary figure reservation counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning determination random number, stores it in the normal pattern reservation storage area, and ends the gate detection process.

Next, the above-mentioned step 301 at the time of first starting winning hole detection process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a is not input, the first starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first starting prize opening detection sensor 15a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first special symbol reservation number counter (that is, the current number of first special symbols reservation) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the process at the time of first starting winning opening detection is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires the current jackpot determination random number and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning symbol random number updated in step 112 described above and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area where the jackpot determination random number was stored in step 503 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach group determining random number updated in step 116 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area where the jackpot determining random number was stored in step 503 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach mode determining random number updated in step 116 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area where the jackpot determining random number was stored in step 503 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step 116 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area where the jackpot determination random number was stored in step 503 described above. As described above, the acquired jackpot determination random number, winning symbol random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are all stored in the same storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first starting winning opening ball counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 15 by one. Then, the process advances to the next step 509.
In step 509, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special figure random number has been stored, and stores it in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process at the time of first starting winning hole detection is ended.

Next, the process at the time of detecting the second starting winning opening in step 302 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a is not input, the second starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second special symbol reservation number counter (that is, the current second special symbol reservation number) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the process at the time of second starting winning opening detection is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process advances to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second special symbol reservation number counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires the current jackpot determination random number and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning symbol random number updated in step 112 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area where the jackpot determination random number was stored in step 603 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach group determining random number updated in step 116 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area where the jackpot determining random number was stored in step 603 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach mode determination random number updated in step 116 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area where the jackpot determination random number was stored in step 603 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step 116 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area where the jackpot determination random number was stored in step 603 described above. As described above, the acquired jackpot determination random number, winning symbol random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and variation pattern random number are all stored in the same storage section of the second reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second starting winning opening ball counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 16 by one. Then, the process advances to the next step 609.
In step 609, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special figure random number has been stored, stores it in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the second start winning opening detection process.

Next, the above-mentioned step 303 at the time of detecting the big winning opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30.
In step 610, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 18a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the big winning hole detection sensor 18a is not input, the big winning hole detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 18a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 611.
In step 611, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of the big winning hole entry ball counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 18. Then, the process at the time of detection of the big winning opening is ended.

Next, the process at the time of general winning opening detection in step 304 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a is not input, the general winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 651.
In step 651, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of the general winning hole entrance ball counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the general winning hole 14. Then, the process at the time of general winning opening detection ends.

Next, the process at the time of out detection in step 305 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it has received an out command (a command sent each time a game ball passes through the out path) sent from the firing and payout control board 200. If it is determined that an out command has not been received, the out detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that an out command has been received, the process advances to the next step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 decrements the difference pitch count value by 1. Then, the out detection process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special figure related control process of step 204 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.
At step 700, main CPU 101 loads the value of execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) configuring the special figure-related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data includes data "00" indicating execution of special symbol fluctuation start processing described later, data "01" indicating execution of special symbol fluctuation stop processing described later, and post-stop processing described later. , data "03" indicating execution of a special game control process to be described later, and data "04" indicating execution of a special game end process to be described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol fluctuation start processing (step 701), special symbol fluctuation stop processing (step 702), post-stop processing (step 703), and special Either the game control process (step 704) or the special game end process (step 705) is executed. Then, the special figure related control process is ended.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process of step 701 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "00" indicating execution of the special symbol variation start process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "00", the special symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "00", the process advances to the next step 801.
In step 801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the second reserve storage area, that is, whether the second special figure reserve number counter is "1" or more. judge. If it is determined that the second special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the first reservation storage area, that is, whether the first special figure reservation number counter is "1" or more. judge. If it is determined that the first special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first special figure reservation number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the first reservation storage area. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage section of the first reservation storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers are stored in the second storage section of the first reservation storage area. - Shift each random number stored in the fourth storage unit to the storage unit with the next lower number. Thereby, each random number stored in the first reservation storage area is used in the jackpot determination process described below in a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process advances to step 805.

Further, in step 804, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the second special pattern random number is stored in step 801 described above, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second special pattern reservation number counter by "1", and Executes shift processing of pending storage area. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage section of the second reservation storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers are stored in the second storage section of the second reservation storage area. - Shift each random number stored in the fourth storage unit to the storage unit with the next lower number. Thereby, each random number stored in the second reservation storage area is used in the jackpot determination process described below in a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process advances to the next step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot lottery process. Then, the process advances to the next step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination processing to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, if the result of the lottery in step 805 described above is a jackpot, it is determined whether the jackpot determination random number used to determine the lottery is due to which starting prize opening the game ball entered ( That is, after confirming whether it is the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16), select the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table 111, and match the selected table with the above-mentioned step 803 or step At 804, the type of special symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number stored in a predetermined processing area. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery in step 805 described above is a loss, if the jackpot determining random number used to determine the lottery is due to the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15, special A symbol Y1 is determined, and if the jackpot determining random number used for determining the lottery is due to the game ball entering the second starting winning hole 16, a special symbol Y2 is determined. Then, data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in this special symbol determination process, the current gaming state, that is, the gaming state at the time when the special symbol was determined, is stored in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 807.
In addition, in the special symbol variation start process of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, the second special symbol random number is given priority over the first special symbol random number. Although special figure random numbers are processed, it is not limited to this, and may be processed in the order stored in the reservation storage area.

In step 807, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined in step 806 described above in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, information regarding the determined type of special symbol will be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of variation. Then, the process advances to the next step 808.
In step 808, the main CPU 101 performs a variable performance related to determining a variable performance pattern based on the reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and fluctuation pattern random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Execute pattern determination processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 809.

In step 809, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts blinking display, and the special symbol is displayed based on the second special symbol random number. When a variable display is performed, the second special symbol display device 31 starts a blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that "-" blinks at predetermined intervals on each display device.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the first special figure random number is stored in the first reservation storage area, the first special figure reservation display device 38 is displayed and the second special figure random number is stored in the second reservation storage area, the second special figure reservation display device 39 will be displayed in a manner that allows the second special figure reservation number to be recognized. ing. When the above-mentioned special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol is displayed to indicate that the number of reserved first special symbols is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the variable display. When the display of the figure reservation display device 38 is controlled and the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the number of second special symbol reservations is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the fluctuation display. The display of the second special figure reservation display device 39 is controlled as shown in FIG.
Then, the process advances to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "01" so that the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed in the special symbol related control processing, and ends the special symbol fluctuation start processing.
Further, in step 811, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 802 that the first special figure random number is not stored in the first pending storage area, the main CPU 101 indicates the start of a standby state in which no variable display is performed. A standby state start command determination process for transmitting a standby state start command to the sub control board 300 is executed. Although not particularly shown, the main control board 100 of this embodiment includes a storage flag indicating whether or not a standby state start command has been stored in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the main CPU 101 stores the standby state start command in the performance transmission data storage area when the storage flag is off, and does not store the standby state start command in the performance transmission data storage area when the storage flag is on. It has become. Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 stores the standby state start command in the performance transmission data storage area, it turns on the storage flag, and when it stores the start winning command in the performance transmission data storage area (see step 608 above), it turns on the storage flag. It is supposed to be turned off. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the standby state start command is stored in the presentation transmission data storage area based on the start of the standby state, the standby state start command is stored again during the standby state. After the game ball enters one of the starting winning holes and the special symbol fluctuation display starts, when the standby state starts again, the standby state start command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. It will be done. Then, the special fluctuation start process ends.

Next, the jackpot lottery process in step 805 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 loads the setting value stored in the first area of the main RAM 103, and determines whether this setting value is a normal value (that is, any value from "1" to "6"). Determine whether or not. If it is determined that this set value is a normal value, the process advances to step 853. On the other hand, if it is determined that this set value is not a normal value (that is, a value less than "1" or a value greater than "6"), the process proceeds to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a set value abnormality, and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating this in the first area. Further, the main CPU 101 executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related process is the same as the process executed when a gaming stop state is set due to the occurrence of a RAM abnormality (the process executed in step 137 described above), so a description thereof will be omitted here. Then, the process advances to step 852.

In step 852, the main CPU 101 executes abnormality initialization processing. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a RAM clear designation command to the firing and payout control board 200. The process then proceeds to step 200 of timer interrupt processing.
Further, in step 853 to which the setting value is determined to be a normal value in step 850 described above, the main CPU 101 selects the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 from the jackpot determination random number determination table 110 and the current game value. Select one corresponding to the state, and execute a jackpot determination process to derive a jackpot lottery result based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. do. Then, the jackpot lottery process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned variable effect pattern determination process of step 808 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol determined in step 806 described above is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 903. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot, the process proceeds to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 confirms the jackpot symbol determined in step 806 and the current gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 selects the corresponding reach mode determination random number determination table 113 (jackpot determination table) based on the jackpot symbol and gaming state confirmed in step 901 described above. Then, the process advances to step 907.
In addition, in step 903, which is proceeded to when it is determined in step 900 that the symbol is not a jackpot, the main CPU 101 determines whether the type of the starting winning hole related to the determination of the lottery (that is, whether the jackpot determination random number used in the determination of the lottery is In addition to checking which starting winning slot the ball was acquired by entering, check the current gaming status and the current number of pending prizes (1st special figure pending number, 2nd special figure pending number). confirm. Then, the process advances to the next step 904.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 selects the corresponding reach group determination random number determination table 112 based on the type of starting winning opening, gaming state, and number of reservations confirmed in step 903 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 905.
In step 905, the main CPU 101 selects a group based on the reach group determination random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above and the reach group determination random number determination table 112 selected in step 904 described above. The type of the group is determined, and the type of the group is stored in a predetermined processing area. Then, the process advances to the next step 906.

In step 906, the main CPU 101 selects the reach mode determination random number determination table 113 (loss determination table) based on the group type determined in step 905 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 907.
In step 907, the main CPU 101 selects the reach mode determination random number determination table 113 (determination table for jackpot) selected in step 902 described above, or the reach mode determination random number determination table 113 (determination table for jackpot) selected in step 906 described above. The fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern lottery table 114 are determined based on the reach mode determination random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804, and the determined fluctuation mode number is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 908.

In step 908, the main CPU 101 selects (obtains) the variable pattern lottery table 114 determined in step 907 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 909.
In step 909, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern lottery table 114 selected in the above step 908 and the variation pattern random number stored in the predetermined processing area in the above step 803 or step 804. is determined, and the determined variation pattern number is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 910.

In step 910, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the variation time based on the variation time determination table 115 and the variation mode number and variation pattern number stored in a predetermined temporary storage area. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the determined variation time in a variation time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 911.
In step 911, the main CPU 101 generates a variation mode command based on the variation mode number stored in a predetermined temporary storage area, and generates a variation pattern command based on the variation pattern number stored in the predetermined temporary storage area. do. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 stores the generated variation mode command and variation pattern command in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the variable performance pattern determination process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation stop processing in step 702 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "01" indicating execution of the special symbol variation stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "01", the special symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "01", the process advances to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable time set in the variable time timer counter in step 910 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in step 806 above on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and Executes the stop display. Then, the process advances to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1004.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets a stop display time for stopping and displaying the special symbol in a stop display time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets "02" to the execution phase data so that the post-stop process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing ends.

Next, the post-stop processing in step 703 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "02" indicating execution of post-stop processing. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02", the post-stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02", the process advances to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter in step 1004 described above has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in the gaming state buffer. Further, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display command indicating that the stop display time has elapsed in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes time saving number update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a time-saving game flag indicating that the current gaming state is a time-saving game state is on. When it is determined that the time saving game flag is on, the time saving number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. This time saving number storage area stores the remaining number of fluctuations until the time saving game state ends. Then, the stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" by updating the remaining number of fluctuations, processing for turning off the time-saving game flag is also executed. Further, if it is determined that the time saving game flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs high-accuracy frequency update processing. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a high probability gaming flag indicating that the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state is on. Then, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is on, the high probability number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. This high probability number storage area stores the remaining number of fluctuations until the high probability gaming state ends. Then, the stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". Moreover, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" by updating the remaining number of fluctuations, a process of turning off the high certainty game flag is also executed. Further, if it is determined that the high-precision game flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 1105.
In step 1105, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.

In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot winning gaming state command for transmitting the gaming state at the jackpot winning to the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 1107.
In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 1108.

In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the waiting time set at the start of the special game in the opening time timer counter, and also sends an opening command indicating that the opening process is started to the performance transmission data storage area. Remember. Then, the process advances to the next step 1109.
In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the number of rounds if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is the special symbol X1, and sets "10" as the round number if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is the special symbol X2. Set "4" as the number. Then, the process advances to the next step 1110.

In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets "03" to the execution phase data so that the special game control process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.
Further, in step 1111, which is proceeded when it is determined that the special symbol that is stopped and displayed in step 1105 is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 checks the current gaming state and issues a gaming state command indicating the gaming state. stored in the transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1112.

In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the special symbol fluctuation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Next, the special game control process of step 704 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "03" indicating execution of the special game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "03", the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "03", the process advances to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1108 described above has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an ending process is in progress, which is a standby process performed after all rounds of games are completed in this special game control process. If it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process advances to step 1209. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 1203.

In step 1203, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not each round game has started. If it is determined that it is not the time when each round game has started, the process advances to step 1205. On the other hand, if it is determined that each round game has started, the process advances to the next step 1204.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, at the start of each round game, the big winning hole 18 is opened in each round game based on the special electric accessory actuation table 116 according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. The opening time (29.0 seconds) to be opened is set in the grand prize opening opening timer counter. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not each round game has started by checking the value of this big prize opening timer counter.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of a round game in the performance transmission data storage area. Further, the main CPU 101 turns on the big winning opening flag indicating that the big winning opening 18 is being opened. Note that this big prize opening flag is turned off at the start of the special game. Then, the process advances to the next step 1205.
Note that the round game start command is provided for each number of round games, so that it is possible to transmit to the sub control board 300 how many times the round game has been started.

In step 1205, the main CPU 101 determines whether the round game has ended. Then, when it is determined that the round game has not ended, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has ended, the process advances to the next step 1206.
The main CPU 101 determines whether the round game has ended by checking whether the opening time set in the grand prize opening timer counter has elapsed or whether 10 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 18. It is now possible to determine whether or not.
In step 1206, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 turns off the big winning opening opening flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 1207.

In step 1207, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of rounds decremented in step 1206 described above is "0". Then, if it is determined that the number of rounds is not "0", the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of rounds is "0", the process advances to the next step 1208.
In step 1208, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and sends an ending command indicating that the ending process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. Remember. Then, the special game control process ends.

Further, in step 1209, which is proceeded when it is determined that the ending process is in progress in step 1202 described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1208 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1210.
In step 1210, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command indicating that the special game has ended in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1211.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets "04" to the execution phase data so that the special game end process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the special game control process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special game ending process in step 705 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "04" indicating execution of the special game end process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "04", the special game ending process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "04", the process advances to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 confirms the jackpot symbol (stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the ended special game, and based on the game state setting table 117 corresponding to the jackpot symbol described above, Set the game state after the special game ends. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets a high probability game flag, a time saving game flag, a high probability number of times, and a time saving number of times. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, regardless of whether the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is the special symbol X1 or Set "100" to both. Then, the process advances to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 stores a gaming state designation command in the performance transmission data storage area according to the gaming state set in step 1301 described above. This gaming state designation command includes information that the high-accuracy game flag set in step 1301 above is on, information that the time-saving game flag is on, information on the number of high-accuracy games, and information on the number of time-saving games. include. Then, the process advances to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the special symbol fluctuation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the special game ending process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned normal map related control processing in step 205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the general figure execution phase data. This ordinary figure execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) configuring the ordinary figure related control processing is to be executed. Specifically, this normal symbol execution phase data includes data "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation start process described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process described later, and the data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process described later. It has data "12" indicating the execution of the post-symbol stop process and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol fluctuation start processing (step 1401), normal symbol fluctuation stop processing (step 1402), and normal symbol stop post processing (step 1403) or the movable piece control process (step 1404). Then, the general map related control process is ended.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process of step 1401 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation start process. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "10", the ordinary symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "10", the process proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determined random number is stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the ordinary figure reservation number counter is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol reservation number counter is not greater than "1" (that is, "0"), the ordinary symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the general figure reservation number counter is "1" or more, the process advances to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the ordinary figure reservation counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process of the general drawing reservation storage area. Specifically, the winning determination random numbers stored in the first storage section are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the winning determination random numbers stored in the second to fourth storage sections are stored. Shift the determined random number to the storage section with the next lower number. As a result, the winning determination random numbers stored in the general pattern reservation storage area are used in the winning determination process described later in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process advances to the next step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 executes a normal symbol lottery process. Then, the process advances to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 checks whether the current gaming state is set to a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, and also refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 119 to determine the current gaming state. Set the variation time of the normal symbol according to the normal symbol variation time timer counter. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the regular figure fluctuation time counter to "13 seconds" if the current gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, and sets the regular figure fluctuation time counter to "13 seconds" when the current gaming state is a time saving gaming state. Set the time counter to "0.6 seconds". Then, the process advances to the next step 1506.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of normal symbols. As a result, the normal symbol display device 32 starts blinking display. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the winning determination random number is stored in the normal pattern holding storage area, the normal pattern holding display device 33 is displayed in such a manner that the number of holding normal drawings can be recognized. It has become. When a variable display of normal symbols is performed, at the same time as the start of the variable display, the display of the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is controlled so as to indicate that the number of reserved symbols decreases by one. Then, the process advances to the next step 1507.
In step 1507, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in the gaming state buffer as the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation. Then, the process advances to the next step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "11" so that the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed in the common symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the normal symbol lottery process in step 1504 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.
In step 1550, the main CPU 101 loads the setting value stored in the first area of the main RAM 103, and determines whether this setting value is a normal value (that is, any value from "1" to "6"). Determine whether or not. If it is determined that this set value is a normal value, the process advances to step 1553. On the other hand, if it is determined that this set value is not a normal value (that is, a value less than "1" or a value greater than "6"), the process proceeds to the next step 1551.
In step 1551, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a set value abnormality, and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating this in the first area. Further, the main CPU 101 executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related process is the same as the process executed when a gaming stop state is set due to the occurrence of a RAM abnormality (the process executed in step 137 described above), so a description thereof will be omitted here. Then, the process advances to step 1552.

In step 1552, the main CPU 101 executes abnormality initialization processing. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a RAM clear designation command to the firing and payout control board 200. The process then proceeds to step 200 of timer interrupt processing.
In addition, in step 1553, which is proceeded when it is determined that the set value is a normal value in step 1550 described above, the main CPU 101 executes the winning determination random number determination table 118 (non-time saving determination table 118a or time saving determination table 118a) corresponding to the current gaming state. 118b), and based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 1503 described above, a winning determination process is performed in which the lottery result of the normal symbol is derived. Execute. Specifically, when the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 refers to the non-time-saving determination table 118a and determines the winning determination random number stored in a predetermined processing area. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, the winning determination random number stored in the predetermined processing area is determined with reference to the time-saving determination table 118b. Then, the process advances to the next step 1554.

In step 1554, the main CPU 101 stores the normal symbol stop display data based on the result of the winning determination process in step 1553 described above in a predetermined common symbol storage area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, if the result of the winning determination process is a win, the winning symbol data is stored in a predetermined common pattern storage area, and if the result of the winning determination process is a loss, the losing symbol data is stored in a predetermined memory area. It is stored in the general figure storage area. Then, the normal symbol lottery process ends.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in step 1402 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "11" indicating execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "11", the ordinary symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "11", the process advances to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation time set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter in step 1505 described above has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data (winning symbol data, losing symbol data) for haltingly displaying the regular symbol on the regular symbol display device 32, and executes the halt display of the regular symbol. Then, the process advances to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the normal pattern stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal pattern in the normal pattern stop display time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "12" so that the normal symbol stop post-processing is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing ends.

Next, the above-described normal symbol stop processing in step 1403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "12" indicating execution of the normal symbol stop post-processing. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "12", the ordinary symbol stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "12", the process advances to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the general figure stop display time set in the ordinary figure stop display time timer counter in step 1603 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is determined that the stopped and displayed normal symbol is not a winning symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process advances to step 1704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning symbol, the process advances to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary figure execution phase data to "13" so that the movable piece control process is executed in the ordinary figure related control process. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is completed.

In addition, in step 1704, which is proceeded when it is determined that the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in step 1702 is not a winning symbol, the main CPU 101 executes the normal symbol fluctuation start process in the common symbol related control process. Set "10" to the general figure execution phase data. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is completed.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the general pattern execution phase data is data "13" indicating execution of the movable piece control process. Then, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "13", the process advances to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the movable piece 16b is under operation control, that is, whether or not the starting prize opening solenoid 16c is energized. If it is determined that the movable piece 16b is under operational control, the process advances to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable piece 16b is not under operational control, the process advances to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the main CPU 101 confirms whether the gaming state at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation is a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second starting winning hole opening control table 120, and sets the energization control data (opening data) of the starting winning hole solenoid 16c according to the gaming state confirmed in step 1802 described above. Set the number of times (opening number) and energization time (opening time). In addition, the main CPU 101 turns on the second starting winning opening flag indicating that the second starting winning opening 16 is being opened. Then, the movable piece control process ends.

Further, in step 1804, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the main CPU 101 determines whether the energization time (opening time) set in the above-mentioned step 1803 has elapsed. Determine. Then, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 turns off the second starting prize opening flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed in the common symbol related control process. Then, the movable piece control process ends.

Next, the solenoid control process in step 210 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47.
In step 1850, the main CPU 101 converts the closing data for closing the second starting winning port 16 (closing the movable piece 16b, not energizing the starting winning port solenoid 16c) into predetermined solenoid data as the starting winning port solenoid data. Set in storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1851.
In step 1851, the main CPU 101 stores closing data for closing the big winning opening 18 (closing the opening/closing door 18b, not energizing the big winning opening solenoid 18c) as the big winning opening solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Set to . Then, the process advances to the next step 1852.

In step 1852, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state during the stay is a game-enabled state and the state related to the differential ball operation stop control is other than the activated state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state). Determine whether If it is determined that the game is not in a playable state (i.e., the game is stopped, the settings are changed, or the settings are confirmed), or the game is in the playable state but is not in an activated state (i.e., the activated state), End the solenoid control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the playable state and is not in the activation state, the process advances to the next step 1853.
In step 1853, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting prize opening flag is on. Then, when it is determined that the second starting prize opening flag is not on (that is, off), the solenoid control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second starting prize opening flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1854.

In step 1854, the main CPU 101 converts the opening data for opening the second starting winning opening 16 (opening the movable piece 16b, energizing the starting winning opening solenoid 16c) as the starting winning opening solenoid data into predetermined solenoid data. Set in storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1855.
In step 1855, the main CPU 101 determines whether the big winning opening flag is on. Then, when it is determined that the big winning opening flag is not on (that is, off), the solenoid control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the big winning opening flag is on, the process advances to the next step 1856.

In step 1856, the main CPU 101 stores the opening data for opening the big winning hole 18 (opening the door 18b, energizing the big winning hole solenoid 18c) as the big winning hole solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Set to . Then, the solenoid control process ends.
By performing the above processing, when the closing data is set, the movable piece 16b closes, the second starting prize opening 16 closes, and the opening/closing door 18b closes, and the big winning opening 18 closes. On the other hand, when the opening data is set, the movable piece 16b opens and the second starting prize opening 16 opens, and the opening/closing door 18b opens and the big winning opening 18 opens. Further, the closed data is set both when the game is not in the playable state and when the game is in the playable state but in the active state. Therefore, in the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, the second starting winning opening 16 and the big winning opening 18 will always be closed.
Note that this solenoid control process is executed in a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds). That is, in the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, the process of restricting the operation of the movable piece 16b and the opening/closing door 18b is performed at predetermined timings.

Next, the difference pitch related command set processing in step 214 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.
In step 1870, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state during the stay is a game-enabled state. Then, if it is determined that the game is not in the playable state, the difference ball related command set process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is possible, the process advances to the next step 1871.
In step 1871, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the difference ball action stop control phase data has been changed. Then, if it is determined that the differential pitch operation stop control phase data has not been changed, the differential pitch related command set processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the differential ball operation stop control phase data has been changed, the process advances to the next step 1872.
Note that the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a management buffer configured by a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When the differential ball operation stop control phase data is cleared and the state value corresponding to the pre-activation warning state is stored in this differential ball operation stop control phase data, the management buffer also corresponds to the pre-activation warning state. The state value is stored. Thereafter, when the state related to the difference ball action stop control is changed, first, the state value corresponding to the changed state is stored only in the difference ball action stop control phase data. Then, in this step 1871, it is determined whether the state value stored in the difference pitch stop control phase data and the state value stored in the management buffer match, and if they match, the difference It is determined that the ball operation stop control phase data has not been changed. On the other hand, if the two do not match, it is determined that the difference ball action stop control phase data has been changed, and accordingly, the state value stored in the difference ball action stop control phase data is also stored in the management buffer.

In step 1872, the main CPU 101 sends a first difference ball action stop control designation command, a second difference ball action stop control designation command, a third difference ball action stop control command, according to the state value stored in the difference ball action stop control phase data. Any one of the operation stop control designation commands is stored in the performance transmission data storage area.
Specifically, if the state value corresponding to the activation warning state is stored in the difference ball action stop control phase data (that is, if the activation warning state is set), the first difference ball action stop control designation The command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first differential ball operation stop control designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can also recognize that the activation warning state has been set.
If the state value corresponding to the activation notice state is stored in the difference ball operation stop control phase data (that is, when the activation notice state is set), the second difference ball operation stop control designation command is transmitted for production. Stored in the data storage area. As a result, the second differential ball operation stop control designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can also recognize that the activation notice state has been set.
If the state value corresponding to the activation state is stored in the difference ball action stop control phase data (that is, if the activation state is set), the third difference ball action stop control designation command is stored in the production transmission data. stored in the area. As a result, the third differential ball operation stop control designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can also recognize that the activation state has been set. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 transmits an activation state setting command to the firing and dispensing control board 200 indicating that the activation state has been set. As a result, the firing and dispensing control board 200 can also recognize that the activated state has been set.
Then, the difference pitch related command set processing ends.

Next, the difference pitch determination control process in step 215 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.
In step 1880, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state during the stay is a game-enabled state. If it is determined that the game is not in the playable state, the difference ball determination control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is possible, the process advances to the next step 1881.
In step 1881, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first reference value attainment flag (a flag provided on the main control board 100) indicating that the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value is off. . If it is determined that the first reference value attainment flag is not off (that is, it is on), the process proceeds to step 1884. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first reference value attainment flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1882.
Note that the first reference value attainment flag is set to be turned off based on the difference pitch count value being reset.

In step 1882, the main CPU 101 determines whether the difference pitch count value has reached the first reference value. If it is determined that the first reference value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step 1884. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first reference value has been reached, the process proceeds to the next step 1883.
In step 1883, the main CPU 101 stores the state value corresponding to the activation warning state in the differential ball action stop control phase data. As a result, an activation warning state is set. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 turns on the first reference value attainment flag. The process then proceeds to the next step 1884.

In step 1884, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second reference value reaching flag (a flag provided on the main control board 100) indicating that the difference ball count value has reached the second reference value is off. Determine whether If it is determined that the second reference value attainment flag is not off (that is, it is on), the process proceeds to step 1889. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second reference value attainment flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1885.
Note that the second reference value attainment flag is set to be turned off based on the difference pitch count value being reset.
In step 1885, the main CPU 101 determines whether the difference pitch count value has reached the second reference value. If it is determined that the second reference value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step 1889. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second reference value has been reached, the process proceeds to the next step 1886.

In step 1886, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is being played. If it is determined that the special game is not in progress, the process advances to step 1888. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special game is in progress, the process advances to the next step 1887.
In step 1887, the main CPU 101 stores the state value corresponding to the activation notice state in the difference ball action stop control phase data. As a result, the activation notice state is set. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 turns on the second reference value attainment flag. Then, the process advances to step 1889.

Further, in step 1888, which is proceeded to when it is determined in step 1886 that the special game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation state in the differential ball operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation state. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 turns on the second reference value attainment flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 1889.
In step 1889, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a state value corresponding to the activation notice state is stored in the differential pitch operation stop control phase data (that is, whether or not the activation notice state is in progress). If it is determined that the state value corresponding to the activation notice state is not stored, the difference ball determination control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state value corresponding to the activation notice state is stored, the process advances to step 1890.

In step 1890, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special game has ended. Then, if it is determined that the special game has not ended, the difference ball determination control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special game has ended, the process advances to the next step 1891.
In step 1891, the main CPU 101 stores the state value corresponding to the activation state in the difference ball action stop control phase data. This sets the activation state. Then, the difference pitch determination control process ends.

Next, the setting-related processing in step 219 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50.
In step 1900, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state during the stay is a setting change state. If it is determined that the settings are not changed, the process advances to step 1908. On the other hand, if it is determined that the settings are changed, the process advances to the next step 1901.
In step 1901, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting switch 108 is off. If it is determined that the setting switch 108 is off, the process advances to step 1905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch 108 is not off (that is, it is on), the process advances to the next step 1902.

In step 1902, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on. Then, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 109 is not on (that is, off), the setting-related processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the process advances to the next step 1903.
In step 1903, the main CPU 101 determines whether the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on (that is, whether the main body frame 2 is open). Specifically, when the main CPU 101 has received the main body frame opening command transmitted from the firing and dispensing control board 200, the main CPU 101 determines that the main body frame opening detection sensor 2a is on. If it is determined that the main body frame opening detection sensor 2a is not on (that is, it is off), the setting-related process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, the process advances to the next step 1904.

In step 1904, the main CPU 101 changes the setting values stored in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the currently stored setting value is changed to a setting value incremented by one. Then, the setting change process ends.
Further, in step 1905, which is proceeded when it is determined that the setting switch 108 is off in step 1901 described above, the main CPU 101 sends a setting change state end command indicating that the setting change state is ended and a gaming enabled state is set. It is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. The commands stored here are sent to the sub-control board 300 in step 114 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 1906.

In step 1906, the main CPU 101 stores various commands to be sent to the sub-control board 300 (for example, a command for displaying an initial screen on the effect display device 21) in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1907.
In step 1907, the main CPU 101 sets the game-enabled state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating this in the first area. Then, the setting-related processing ends.

Furthermore, in step 1908, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 1900 that the control state during the stay is not a setting change state, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting switch 108 is off. Then, if it is determined that the setting switch 108 is not off, the setting change process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch 108 is off, the process advances to the next step 1909.
In step 1909, the main CPU 101 stores in the performance transmission data storage area a setting confirmation state end command indicating that the setting confirmation state is ended and a game ready state is set. The command stored here is sent to the sub-control board 300 in step 114 described above. Then, the process advances to step 1906.

(Summary of processing in sub-control board 300 of pachinko machine P)
As described above, by executing various processes in the main control board 100, the special figure game, the regular figure game, and the special game proceed. While these games are in progress, various commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300, based on the reception of the above-mentioned commands, provides various effects and various suggestions as the game progresses. control is executed. Further, in the sub-control board 300, control regarding changing the current speaker volume (the volume of the audio output device 10 being set) is performed based on the pressing operation of the up key or the down key on the cross key 25.
Hereinafter, an overview of various performances and various suggestions executed in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be explained.

(Summary of variable performance)
During the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state, along with the variable display of the special symbols, a variable performance that suggests the result of a jackpot lottery is executed by the stop display mode of the performance symbols 50.
In the fluctuating performance, a fluctuating display of performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) is performed superimposed on a background image (not particularly shown) displayed on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21. Then, the result of the jackpot lottery is suggested to the player by the combination of performance symbols 50 that are displayed in a variable manner and then displayed in a static manner (static display mode).

The effect pattern 50 in this embodiment is a numerical pattern modeled after the numbers "1" to "9" (see FIG. 51(a)). In the variable display of the production symbols 50, the production symbols 50, which are numerical symbols from "1" to "9", are displayed cyclically in ascending order (that is, "1" → "2" → ... "8" → "9"→"1"→"2"→...) is performed.
Specifically, although not particularly shown, when the variable display of the special symbols starts, all the production symbols 50 move downward from the state in which all the production symbols 50 were stopped and displayed (the state of the previous stop display). After the scrolling display starts, the scrolling speed gradually increases, and all the performance symbols 50 are displayed scrolling at high speed. During this high-speed scrolling display, the effect pattern 50 is not visible. After that, the scrolling speed of the effect pattern 50 located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the left effect pattern 50L, also referred to as the first stop pattern) gradually decreases, the left effect pattern 50L is stopped and displayed, and then the scroll speed of the effect pattern 50L located on the right side is stopped. The scrolling speed of the performance pattern 50 (hereinafter referred to as the right performance pattern 50R, also referred to as the second stop pattern) gradually decreases until the right performance pattern 50R is stopped and displayed, and finally, the performance pattern 50 located in the center (hereinafter referred to as The scrolling speed of the medium effect pattern 50C (also referred to as the third stop pattern) gradually decreases, and the medium effect pattern 50C is stopped and displayed.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the left effect pattern 50L, the middle effect pattern 50C, and the right effect pattern 50R are stopped and displayed in a horizontal straight line approximately at the center of the display section 21a (see FIG. 51(b)). . That is, the stop display position of the left effect symbol 50L (hereinafter also referred to as the left stop display position) is approximately at the center of the left part of the display section 21a, and the stop display position of the middle effect symbol 50C (hereinafter also referred to as the middle stop display position) 51(b )reference).
Note that the downward arrow in FIG. 51 indicates that the effect pattern 50 is displayed scrolling from the top to the bottom.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed as the same numerical symbol (see FIG. 51(b)). That is, all the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed as the same numerical symbol, thereby suggesting that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, although not particularly shown, at least one performance symbol 50 is stopped and displayed as a numerical symbol different from the other performance symbols 50. , it is suggested that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss.

Further, the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed almost at the same time as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 prior to the stop display of the performance symbol 50, and the result of the jackpot lottery is grasped by the type of the special symbol. Prevents it from being put away.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbols 50 to the stop display of the second stop symbol (until the presence or absence of the ready-to-reach display, which will be described later) is indicated, is the period of the variable effect. Corresponding to the first half, the period from when the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed (after the presence or absence of reach display is suggested) until the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed (until the variation of the production symbol 50 ends) is This corresponds to the second half of the variable performance.
The first half of the variation performance includes a no-reach variation pattern in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different number symbols, and a no-reach variation pattern in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same. There is a reach fluctuation pattern that is stopped and displayed (ready-to-reach display is performed) at the number symbol. Each of the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern has multiple aspects, and each aspect includes a method of displaying the variation of the production pattern 50, presence or absence of a production that is performed in conjunction with the variation display of the production pattern 50, etc. are set in various ways.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the variation mode number corresponding to the received variation mode command is "00H", the first half of the variation effect is executed by the no-reach variation pattern, and when the variation mode number corresponding to the received variation mode command is other than "00H". In this case, the first half of the variable performance is executed depending on the reach variation pattern.

As the non-reach variation patterns, a non-reach pattern A and a non-reach pattern B are provided.
Although the no-reach pattern A is not particularly illustrated, there is no particular change in the manner in which the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a variable manner, and other productions are performed in conjunction with the variable display of the performance symbols 50. Instead, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different numerical symbols.
Although the no-reach pattern B is not particularly shown, a predetermined first half is displayed approximately in the center of the display section 21a during a period from the start of the variable display of all the performance symbols 50 until the stop display of the second stop symbol. After the first half cut-in effect that displays the cut-in image CP1 (for example, an oval image displaying the word "chance") is executed, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different number symbols. This is how it is done. The first half cut-in performance in the no-reach pattern B starts from the start of high-speed scrolling display of all the performance symbols 50, and ends when the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, in the no-reach pattern B, a first half cut-in image CP1 (hereinafter also referred to as blue cut-in image CP1-1) with the word "chance" written in blue is displayed.

As reach variation patterns, reach pattern A and reach pattern B are provided.
Although reach pattern A is not particularly shown, there is no particular change in the way the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a variable manner, and furthermore, no other production is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the performance symbols 50. , it is a mode in which the ready-to-reach display is performed simply by stopping and displaying the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol as the same number symbol.

Although not particularly illustrated, reach pattern B is a mode in which the above-described first half cut-in effect is executed and then a reach display is performed. The first half cut-in performance in the ready-to-reach pattern B starts from the start of high-speed scrolling display of all the performance symbols 50, and ends at the time when the ready-to-reach display is executed (that is, at the time when the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed).
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, three types of reach patterns B are provided: reach pattern B1, reach pattern B2, and reach pattern B3, which have different display modes of the first half cut-in image CP1. In reach pattern B1, blue cut-in image CP1-1 is displayed, and in reach pattern B2, cut-in image CP1 (hereinafter also referred to as red cut-in image CP1-2) with the word "chance" written in red is displayed. In reach pattern B3, a cut-in image (hereinafter also referred to as rainbow cut-in image CP1-3) with the word "chance" written in rainbow colors is displayed.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned reach variation patterns are individually set to have a high or low probability of being executed when a jackpot is won. This makes it possible to change the player's expectations for a jackpot depending on the executed reach variation pattern.
For example, with respect to reach pattern B, reach pattern B2 is set to be more likely to be executed in the event of winning a jackpot than reach pattern B1. In addition, reach pattern B3 may be executed only if a jackpot is won and special symbol X1 (a special symbol that specifies the execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of round games are played) is determined. It is set as follows. That is, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the red cut-in image CP1-2 is displayed than when the blue cut-in image CP1-1 is displayed. Furthermore, when the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed, execution of the special game (see FIG. 14(a)) in which the jackpot is won and the round game is played for 10 rounds is confirmed.

The no-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include not only the mode in which the production symbols 50 are stopped and displayed in the order of left production symbol 50L → right production symbol 50R → middle production symbol 50C, but also, for example, right production symbol 50R → A mode in which the effect patterns 50 are stopped and displayed in the order of left effect pattern 50L → medium effect pattern 50C, a mode in which the medium effect pattern 50C is stopped and displayed after the left effect pattern 50L and right effect pattern 50R are stopped and displayed at the same time, all of them. The time from when the first stop symbol is stop-displayed until the second stop symbol is stop-displayed is longer than the time from when the fluctuating display of the production symbols 50 starts until the first stop symbol is stop-displayed. In a long mode, the second stop symbol is stop-displayed after the first stop symbol is stop-displayed, which is longer than the time from the start of the variable display of all production symbols 50 until the first stop symbol is stop-display. A mode may also be provided in which the time required to complete the process is short.
In addition, as the no-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, all the production symbols 50 are temporarily stopped in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are temporarily stopped when the number symbol is different by 1, 3. A mode in which a display in which the variable display is restarted after a temporary stop with a temporary stop symbol suggesting a temporary stop is performed a predetermined number of times (a so-called pseudo continuous effect is performed), and a variable display of the effect pattern 50. A mode may be provided in which the accessory rotation effect is executed from when the second stop symbol is stopped until the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the first half of the variable effect is a reach variation pattern, the second half of the variable effect is not particularly shown, but after displaying the reach, a predetermined development effect image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. A reach development performance that displays a reach development performance is executed, a character rotation performance is performed during this reach development performance, and after that, a pattern with development that suggests the result of a jackpot lottery is displayed, and a reach development performance is executed after the reach development performance is displayed. A no-development pattern is provided that suggests the result of a jackpot lottery. Since the development pattern is set to have a high possibility of being executed in the event of winning a jackpot, it increases the player's expectations.
Although not particularly shown, the second half of the variable performance when the first half of the variable performance is a no-reach variable pattern is that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss after the second half of the variable time has elapsed. There is a normal losing pattern that suggests that.
In addition, there are multiple types of patterns with no development, patterns with development, and normal losing patterns, and various ways of displaying the performance symbols 50, types of development performance images, and modes of rotating accessories are set. There is. For example, as a mode of the pattern with development, a mode may be provided in which, while the reach development effect is being executed, a second half cut-in effect is displayed in which a second half cut-in image indicating the expectation level of winning the jackpot is displayed. .

In addition, in the above-mentioned variable effects, not only various images are displayed, but also predetermined BGM and audio are output from the audio output device 10 (speaker), and the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) is output in conjunction with the display of various images. ) will emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern and color.

(Determination of the mode of variable production)
Next, determination of the above-mentioned variation effect mode will be explained.
The sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a variable effect determination table 121 for determining the mode of the variable effect (the mode of the first half of the variable effect, the mode of the latter half of the variable effect). Then, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 selects the variable effect determination table 121 according to predetermined conditions, and selects the selected variable effect determination table 121 and the variable mode number received from the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100. (variation mode command), a variation pattern number (variation pattern command), and an optionally used production random number (variation production random number), the mode of the variation performance is determined.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a variable effect determination table A and a variable effect determination table B are provided as the variable effect determination table 121.
In the variable effect determination table A, the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value, and the determined special symbol is other than the jackpot symbol X1 (that is, the jackpot symbol X2, the losing symbol Y1 or Y2). This table is selected after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value (that is, after the activation warning state is set) regardless of the time or the determined special symbol. The variable effect determination table B is a table selected when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value and the determined special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1.

When the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 receives the variation mode command and the variation pattern command, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the difference pitch count value has reached the first reference value based on the first reference value attainment flag (described later) (after reaching the first reference value). ), and if the difference pitch count value has reached the first reference value, the variable effect determination table A is selected. On the other hand, when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value, the type of the determined special symbol is confirmed, and when the determined special symbol is other than the jackpot symbol X1, the variable effect determination table A is selected. However, when it is the jackpot symbol X1, variable performance determination table B is selected.
Then, the sub CPU 301 obtains a variable effect random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, refers to the selected variable effect determination table 121, and selects the obtained variable effect random number and the variable mode corresponding to the received variable mode command. The mode of the variation effect is determined based on the number and the variation pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), according to the variation effect determination table A, the received variation mode number is "00H", and the received variation pattern numbers are "00H", "01H", "02H", If it is "03H" or "04H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state or high probability time-saving gaming state is a loss), the first half is "No reach pattern A" and the second half is "No reach pattern A". Either an aspect of the "normal losing pattern" (hereinafter also referred to as aspect 1), or an aspect where the first half is the "no-reach pattern B" and the latter half is the "normal losing pattern" (hereinafter also referred to as aspect 2) It is determined.

When the received fluctuation mode number is "01H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "05H" (when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state or high probability time-saving gaming state is a loss) In this case, an aspect (hereinafter also referred to as aspect 3) in which the first half is the "reach pattern A" and the second half is the "no-development pattern" is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "02H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "06H" or "07H" (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state or high probability time-saving gaming state is a loss) ), the first half is "reach pattern A" and the second half is "pattern with development" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 4), or the first half is "reach pattern B1" and the second half is "development pattern". One of the modes (hereinafter also referred to as mode 5) of "Available pattern" is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "03H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "06H" or "07H" (the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state or high probability time-saving gaming state is a loss) In this case, either Aspect 4, Aspect 5, or an aspect in which the first half is the "reach pattern B2" and the second half is the "pattern with development" (hereinafter also referred to as Aspect 6) is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "01H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H", the received fluctuation mode number is "02H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H". If so (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state is a jackpot), one of mode 4, mode 5, or mode 6 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "03H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state is a jackpot), Either aspect 5 or aspect 6 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A2H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the high probability time-saving gaming state is a jackpot), aspect 4 , either aspect 5 or aspect 6 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A3H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the high probability time saving gaming state is a jackpot) Either aspect 5 or aspect 6 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 52(b), according to the variation effect determination table B, if the received variation mode number is "01H" and the received variation pattern number is "A6H", the received variation mode If the number is "02H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state is a jackpot), mode 4, mode 5, mode 6 , or an aspect in which the first half is the "reach pattern B3" and the latter half is the "pattern with development" (hereinafter also referred to as aspect 7) is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "03H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state is a jackpot), Either aspect 5, aspect 6 or aspect 7 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A2H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the high probability time-saving gaming state is a jackpot), aspect 4 , aspect 5, aspect 6, or aspect 7 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A3H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the high probability time saving gaming state is a jackpot) is determined according to aspect 5, aspect 6, or aspect 7.

In addition, in FIGS. 52(a) and (b), the numbers shown in each selection area in which the variation mode number, variation pattern number, and variation effect mode are associated are the random numbers assigned to the selection area. It shows the range, that is, the selection ratio of the selected area.

Here, mode 7 (a mode in which the first half is "reach pattern B3" and the second half is "pattern with development") is not determined in the variable effect determination table A, but only in the variable effect determination table B ( (See FIGS. 52(a) and (b)).
As mentioned above, the variable performance determination table A is used when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value and the determined special symbol is other than the jackpot symbol X1, or when the determined special symbol Regardless of the symbol, it is selected after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value. On the other hand, the variable performance determination table B is selected when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value and the determined special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1.
Then, in the case of a loss, or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, mode 7 is determined regardless of whether or not the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value. Never. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, mode 7 may be determined when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value, and the difference ball count value Aspect 7 is not determined after reaching the 1 reference value.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in relation to the determined special symbol, although the variable performance according to aspect 7 can be executed only when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the winning of the jackpot, the difference ball When the count value has not reached the first reference value, execution of the variation effect according to aspect 7 is not restricted, whereas after the difference pitch count value reaches the first reference value, the execution of the variation effect according to aspect 7 is not restricted. Execution of the performance is now restricted.

As described above, in aspect 7, since the first half of the variable effect is the “reach pattern B3” mode, the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed in the first half cut-in effect. Since aspect 7 is executed only when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, when the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed, the jackpot is won and the 10-round round game is executed. The execution of the special game (see FIG. 14) in which a large number of prize balls can be won is confirmed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, by displaying the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3, it is possible to give the player a great sense of elation, and in turn, it is possible to increase the interest of the game. It has become.
On the other hand, as described above, when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, an activation warning state is set, and an activation warning suggestion is made that suggests that the second reference value will be reached soon (FIG. 51(f) )reference). Thereafter, when the activated state is set based on the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value, the game stops. As will be described later, for example, if the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special pattern, the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is forcibly terminated and the variable display is cleared. It will be done. In other words, the variable performance being executed is forcibly terminated.

Here, if the setting is such that the variation effect according to aspect 7 can be executed even after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the jackpot is won during the activation warning state and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. At this time, the variable effect of aspect 7 may be determined and the rainbow cut-in image CP-1 may be displayed. In this case, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value during execution of the variable performance of this aspect 7, the game is stopped and the variable performance currently being executed is also forcibly ended. Then, because the rainbow cut-in image CP-1 was displayed, even though the execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of round games were to be played was recognized in advance, the special game was not executed and the game ended. Since the game stops, there is a risk that the player will feel a great sense of loss and the interest in the game will decrease.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value (after the activation warning suggestion is executed), there is no case where the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. It is set so that the variation effect according to aspect 7 is not determined even if Since the display of the rainbow cut-in image CP-1 is thereby restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of loss as described above, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Summary of pending display)
During the normal game state or high probability time-saving game state, the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number is acquired and stored as pending, or the first special figure random number or second special figure random number stored as pending When the random number is read out, a hold display is performed in which a hold image 52 in a predetermined display mode is displayed (see FIGS. 51(a) to (b) and (d)). This reservation display indicates the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved special symbols. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the hold display is executed except during the special game (during the normal game state, during the high probability time saving game state), and is not performed during the special game (Fig. 51 (See (a) to (h)).

(Summary of special game effects)
During the special game that is executed based on winning the jackpot, a special in-game performance is executed. In this special game performance, a special game image is displayed on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21 to enliven the special game being executed (FIGS. 51(c), 51(e) to 51). (see (h)). Furthermore, during the special game, an image of the number of round games indicating the round game being executed is also displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 (FIGS. 51(c), (e) to 51). (see (h)). By displaying this image of the number of round games, it is possible to suggest to the player what round of the round game is being executed.
In addition, in the special game performance, not only the special game image is displayed, but also predetermined BGM and audio are output from the audio output device 10 (speaker) in conjunction with the display of the special game image, and the performance lighting The device 23 (lamp) emits light in a predetermined lighting pattern and color.

As mentioned above, the high probability time saving game state is always set after the end of the special game, but during this high probability time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state is A highly accurate time-saving state suggestion image (for example, a character image "SUPER TIME", etc.) suggesting a certain fact is displayed (see FIG. 51(d)).

(Summary of display of number of award balls acquired)
When a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state and a special game based on the winning is started, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls from the starting point (i.e., each winning hole (general winning hole 14, first starting winning hole 15) Display of the number of won prize balls (for example, , when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches 700, display of a character image of "700pt" etc. (see FIGS. 51(c) to (h)) is started.
This display of the number of won prize balls is updated every time a game ball enters each winning hole. That is, it is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the entered ball. In addition, each time a game ball enters each winning hole, the value is not updated by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, but the actual prize is calculated based on the number of game balls that enter each winning hole. Each time a ball is paid out, the value may be updated to the sum of the number of paid out prize balls.
The display of the number of prize balls won continues to be displayed during the high probability time saving game state that is set after the end of the special game, and during the special game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot in the high probability time saving game state. The high probability time-saving game state ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the high probability number without winning a jackpot.
That is, when a special game based on winning a jackpot during the normal gaming state is started, while the setting of the high probability time saving gaming state and the execution of the special game based on winning the jackpot during the high probability time saving gaming state are repeated. The number of prize pitches won is continuously displayed.

Here, if the setting of the high-probability time-saving game state and the execution of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot during the high-probability time-saving game state are repeated, the number of won prize balls displayed will gradually increase, but in this embodiment In the pachinko machine P according to the above, when the number of won prize balls reaches a number corresponding to the difference number of balls that causes the game to stop (i.e., 95,000 balls which is the number of stopped balls), the number of won prize balls is not displayed. First, on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21, a difference ball reaching display indicating that the number corresponding to the difference ball number has been reached instead of the number of winning prize balls (for example, a difference ball saying "COMPLETE!") is displayed. display of the reached image, etc.) (see FIGS. 51(f) to (h)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, even if the number of winning prize balls reaches a number equivalent to the number of difference balls that causes the game to stop, the number of winning prize balls corresponds to the number of difference balls that causes the game to stop. is no longer displayed.
What is displayed during special games and high-probability time-saving game states is the number of prize balls won, but if the player or hall personnel who see this recognize it as the number of difference balls, the game may stop. If the number corresponding to the difference number of balls (95,000 which is the number of balls stopped) is displayed as the number of prize balls won, it may cause a misunderstanding that the stop of the game based on the activation status setting is not functioning properly. There is a risk of giving. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, even if the number of winning prize balls reaches a number equivalent to the number of difference balls that causes the game to stop, the number of winning prize balls corresponds to the number of difference balls that causes the game to stop. is not displayed. Thereby, the occurrence of misunderstandings as described above can be prevented.

Even if the number of winning prize balls reaches the number equivalent to the number of difference balls that causes the game to stop, the control to prevent the number corresponding to the number of difference balls from being displayed as the number of winning prize balls is as described above. The present invention is not limited to the display of the difference ball arrival (display of the difference ball arrival image).
For example, although the number of won prize balls is displayed up to one less ball (94999) than the number corresponding to the number of difference balls that would cause the game to stop, after that number is displayed, the number of won prize balls is displayed. The update may be stopped (ie, the count may be stopped). Further, the difference ball arrival image may be an image in which a predetermined character is displayed, etc., instead of an image in which text information as described above is displayed.

Note that the performances and displays performed during the normal game state, the high probability time saving game state, and the special game are not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, during the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state, the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed numerically, which is different from the production pattern 50. A special image may be used to suggest a jackpot lottery result. Further, during a high probability time saving game state or a special game, a right-handed hitting suggestion image may be displayed that suggests hitting the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hitting).

(Summary of suggestions regarding differential pitch operation stop control)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value and the activation warning state is set, a power outage occurs, the activation warning state ends, or Until the end condition that a predetermined time (600 seconds) has elapsed, the activation warning suggestion (display of activation warning character image) and the indication that the activation warning state has been set by turning on or off various lamps are displayed. It will be done. In addition, the activation warning sound is output from when the activation warning state is set until the activation warning audio output time (5 seconds) has elapsed.
If the activation warning state is set during a special game, an activation warning character image is displayed together with the special game image, and if the activation warning state is set other than during a special game, the effect symbol 50 or the hold image will be displayed. An activation warning character image is displayed together with 52. This activation warning character image is displayed in a small size at the upper center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the special game image, effect symbols 50, and pending image 52 (Fig. 51 (see (e) to (g)).

In addition, as described above, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and the activation notice state is set because a special game was being executed at the time of reaching the second reference value, a power outage may occur or Until the end condition that the activation notice state ends is met, an activation notice suggestion (display of an activation notice character image) and a suggestion that the activation notice state has been set are made by lighting or extinguishing various lamps. In addition, the activation notification sound is output from when the activation notification state is set until the activation notification audio output time (7 seconds) has elapsed.
Since the activation notice state is set during the special game, the activation notice character image is displayed together with the image during the special game. Also, like the activation warning character image, this activation warning character image is displayed in a small size at the upper center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the image during the special game ( (See FIG. 51(h)).

In addition, as described above, the difference ball count value has reached the second standard value, and the special game has not been executed at the time of reaching the second standard value, or the difference ball count value has reached the second standard value. When the activation state is set due to the end of the special game that was being executed, the activation suggestion (display of activation character image), activation voice output, and lighting of various lamps until a power outage occurs. Alternatively, a suggestion is made that the activated state is set by turning off the light.
After the special game ends, normally, the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a variable manner, the pending image 52 is displayed, the highly accurate time-saving state suggestion image is displayed, the number of prize balls acquired is displayed, etc. (Fig. 51(d) ), when the special game ends and the activation state is set, these displays are not performed and the activation character image is displayed.
In addition, even in non-special games (high-probability time-saving game state, normal game state), if it is normal, the effect pattern 50 is displayed fluctuating, the pending image 52 is displayed, and the high-accuracy time-saving state suggestion image is displayed (high-probability time-saving game state). (only during the special game), the number of prize balls won (only during the high probability time-saving game state), etc. are displayed, but if the activation state is set at a time other than a special game, all of these displays will be cleared. , the activated character image is displayed. For example, even if the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special pattern, the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is forcibly terminated and the variable display is cleared. becomes.
In this way, when the activation state is set, the effect pattern 50, the pending image 52, the number of won prize balls, etc. are cleared, so there is no situation that hinders the visibility of these, so the activation character image is On the entire surface of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21, it is displayed in a larger size than the activation warning character image and the activation notice character image (see FIG. 51(i)).

(Summary of control regarding change of speaker volume during playable state)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, during a playable state, the current speaker volume can be changed by pressing the up key or the down key of the cross key 25 during a period in which the current speaker volume can be changed, which will be described later. (The volume of the audio output device 10 being set) can be changed within a settable range.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the speaker volume can be set within eight levels from "0" to "7"("0" is the minimum volume, "7" is the maximum volume). However, the settable range that can be set by operating the cross key 25 is preset to five levels from "3" to "7". Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the initial value of the speaker volume set at the time of power recovery can be set to any one of "3" to "7" by a predetermined switch connected to the sub-control board 300. It looks like this.
Note that the range of speaker volume that can be set is not limited to eight levels from "0" to "7", and may be set to more or fewer levels. Furthermore, the settable range is not limited to the five levels of "3" to "7", and can be set as appropriate within the settable speaker volume range.

Then, when a press operation of the upper key of the cross key 25 is detected during a period in which the current speaker volume can be changed, the sub CPU 301 changes the current speaker volume within the above-mentioned settable range. For example, if the current speaker volume is "3", each time the up key is pressed, the current speaker volume increases by one step until it reaches "7", but when the down key is pressed, Even if the current speaker volume is changed, the current speaker volume will not decrease any further. For example, if the current speaker volume is "7", the current speaker volume decreases by one step each time the down key is pressed until it reaches "3", but when the up key is pressed, Even if this is done, the current speaker volume will not increase any further.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, when the up key or down key is pressed, a volume setting image AG indicating the current speaker volume setting state is displayed in the center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21.
As shown in FIG. 53, the volume setting image AG includes five gauge images that gradually become longer from the bottom to the top, and each gauge image sets the volume of each speaker within the changeable range. It is meant to show. Specifically, the shortest gauge image located at the lower end indicates the speaker volume "3", and the longest gauge image located at the upper end indicates the speaker volume "7". The three gauge images located between them indicate, in order from the bottom, speaker volume "4", speaker volume "5", and speaker volume "6". The area from the bottom gauge image to the horizontal gauge image indicating the current speaker volume is displayed in a predetermined color, and the remaining horizontal gauge images are displayed in different colors, allowing the player to visually determine the current speaker volume. This means that it can be recognized as such. For example, if the current speaker volume is "5" and the up key is pressed, the current speaker volume becomes "6", so the horizontal gauge images for the four bars from the bottom are displayed in a predetermined color. and only the upper horizontal gauge image is displayed in a different color (see FIG. 53).

In addition, although not particularly shown, after the speaker volume is changed, the game ball does not enter any of the starting winning holes, and furthermore, the speaker volume is not changed after that, and the predetermined state is determined in advance. When the display switching time (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume setting image AG displayed in the center of the display section 21a is erased.

Furthermore, data such as the settable range of the speaker volume, the initial value of the speaker volume, and the current speaker volume are stored in the sub RAM 303 of the sub control board 300. Based on the various data stored in the sub RAM 303, the sub CPU 301 performs various processes such as changing the current speaker volume. For example, when the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated, and the speaker volume after the pressing operation is stored in the sub-RAM 303 as the current speaker volume.

(Summary of control of output of audio, etc. during playable state)
Next, regarding the control of the output of audio etc. during the playable state, we will explain the details of the control of changing the channel adjustment value and speaker volume, as well as the details for each pre-warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, and activation state. Explain in detail.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the decoder of the audio control board is equipped with a predetermined number of channels (40 in total from channel 1 to channel 40) for outputting audio, etc. Each type of audio, etc. output in , is associated with a channel used for outputting the audio, etc.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, channel 1 is associated with error-suggesting sounds that are output based on the occurrence of various errors. In addition, the activation warning sound that is output in the activation warning state, the activation warning sound that is output in the activation notice state, and the activation sound that is output in the activation state (hereinafter, the activation warning sound, activation notice sound, and activation sound are combined) Channel 2 is associated with the difference ball stop control voice (also referred to as the difference ball stop control voice). Furthermore, BGM and various sounds (hereinafter also referred to as performance sounds) output during variable effects and special game effects are associated with any one of channels 3 to 40.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, multiple events that cause errors may occur in duplicate, and in this case, multiple errors will occur in duplicate. Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a priority order is predetermined for the execution of error suggestions, and when multiple errors occur overlappingly, a predetermined priority order is determined among the multiple errors that have occurred. Suggestions are made for the error with the highest priority given, and no suggestions are made for other errors. Further, for example, if another error has occurred when the suggestion regarding the error with the highest priority is completed, the suggestion regarding the other error will be made.
In this way, when multiple errors occur overlappingly, only one of the errors is suggested according to a predetermined priority order, and multiple errors are not suggested at the same time. Therefore, all the error-suggesting sounds are associated with only one channel (channel 1), and each error-suggesting sound is output separately using only this channel.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the activation warning sound is not output except when the activation warning state is set, and the activation warning sound is not output except when the activation warning state is set. , and the activation voice is not output unless the activation state is set. That is, the activation warning sound, the activation notice sound, and the activation sound are not output simultaneously and redundantly. Therefore, only one channel (channel 2) is associated with the activation warning audio, activation preview audio, and activation audio, and only this channel is used to perform the activation warning audio, activation preview audio, and activation audio. Each will be output separately.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine P recovers from a power outage, "2" is set as the initial value of the channel adjustment value for each channel. Corresponding audio etc. are also output with the current speaker volume unchanged. Note that the data of the current channel adjustment value set for each channel is stored in the sound RAM of the audio control board.

(1) Pre-warning state In the pre-warning state, it is possible to execute a variable performance that is performed in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols, and a special game performance that is performed during a special game. In addition, as mentioned above, in the pre-warning state, the occurrence of a door opening error, main control related error, or payout related error is determined, and if any of these errors occurs, an error suggestion corresponding to the error that has occurred is determined. Audio will be output.

In addition, in the pre-warning state, the special symbol will not be displayed during the period from when it starts to when it ends (when the variable display stops, the special symbol will stop being displayed). During the standby state where the special symbol is not displayed, the current speaker volume can be changed during the period from the start of the special game until it ends, and the stop display time has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. During the period up to (hereinafter also referred to as the symbol confirmation period), the current speaker volume cannot be changed. Furthermore, even when an error occurs, the current speaker volume can be changed.
Specifically, when the up key or down key is pressed during the period in which the current speaker volume can be changed, the volume setting image AG is displayed. When the up key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be increased within the settable range described above, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub RAM 303 is changed to By updating the speaker volume based on the operation, the current speaker volume increases. In addition, when the down key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be decreased within the above-mentioned settable range by the pressing operation, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is By updating the speaker volume to the one based on the operation, the current speaker volume decreases.

When no error occurs, the channel adjustment values of all channels corresponding to the production sound (hereinafter also referred to as production sound channels) will remain at the initial value of "2". When an error occurs, all the channel adjustment values are changed to "0". On the other hand, in the pre-warning state, the channel adjustment value of channel 1 corresponding to the error suggestion sound always remains at "2" which is set as the initial value.
As a result, in the pre-warning state, if a variable effect or special in-game effect is being executed and no error has occurred, only the effect sound will be output, but this effect sound will be output at the current speaker volume. be done. On the other hand, when a variable effect or special in-game effect is being executed and an error has occurred, the effect sound and the error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that is occurring are output at the same time, but the effect sound is output silently. The error-suggesting sound is output at the current speaker volume.

Specifically, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when no error occurs, the production sound is output at the current speaker volume "5", and when an error occurs, Although the performance sound is output in silence, the error-suggesting sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Further, for example, it is assumed that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a special game is being executed, no error has occurred, and the performance sound is being output at the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the upper key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "6", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "6". Ru. As a result, the effect sound that is currently being output will be output at "6", which is the current speaker volume after the change.
Also, for example, if a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a special game is being executed, and an error has occurred, the production sound is output without sound, and the error-suggesting sound corresponding to the error is the current speaker volume. 5" is output. At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "4", and the current speaker volume is changed to "4". Ru. As a result, the above-mentioned error suggestion sound is outputted at the current speaker volume after the change, which is "4", but the production sound continues to be outputted in silence.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the pre-warning state, when no error has occurred, the performance sound can be heard at the current speaker volume, but when an error has occurred. Sometimes, the performance sound is not audible, and the error-suggesting sound becomes audible depending on the current speaker volume. Thereby, when an error occurs, it is possible to reliably recognize the error-suggesting sound, and from the error-suggesting sound, it is possible to reliably understand the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred.

Note that in the pre-warning state, the current speaker volume may not be able to be changed while an error occurs. By doing this, when the down key is pressed while an error occurs, the current speaker volume decreases, making it difficult to recognize the error-indicating sound, making it easier to understand the error occurrence and the type of error that has occurred. It is possible to prevent situations that would become difficult.
Furthermore, while an error is occurring, the error suggestion volume may be output at the maximum speaker volume (ie, "7") regardless of the current speaker volume. By doing so, when an error occurs, it is possible to more reliably recognize the error-suggesting voice, and it is also possible to more reliably understand the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred.
Further, when an error occurs, the output of the effect sound itself may be stopped instead of outputting the effect sound without sound. Even in this case, when an error occurs, the error-suggesting voice can be reliably recognized, and from the error-suggesting voice, it is possible to reliably understand the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred.
Further, while an error is occurring, the effect sound may be outputted at a volume that is audible but lower than the error suggesting sound.

(2) Activation warning state In the activation warning state, similar to the pre-activation warning state, it is possible to execute variable effects that are performed in conjunction with the changing display of special symbols, and special game effects that are performed during special games. At the same time, it is determined whether a door opening error, a main control related error, or a payout related error has occurred, and if any of these errors occurs, an error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that has occurred will be output.
Further, the activation warning sound will be output from when the activation warning state is set until the activation warning audio output time (5 seconds) has elapsed.

In addition, in the activation warning state, similar to the pre-activation warning state, during the period from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the end, during the standby state where the special symbol fluctuation display is not performed, the special game will not be played. The current speaker volume can be changed during the period from the start to the end, and the current speaker volume cannot be changed during the symbol confirmation period. Furthermore, even when an error occurs, the current speaker volume can be changed.
Note that the process of changing the current speaker volume in the activation warning state is also the same as that in the pre-activation warning state, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Then, while the activation warning sound is being output and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 corresponding to the difference pitch stop control sound remains at "2" which is set as the initial value. However, the channel adjustment values of the production sound channels are all changed to "1". Also, when the activation warning sound is being output and an error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the production sound channel are both changed to "0". There is.
Furthermore, when the activation warning sound is not output (that is, after the activation warning sound has finished outputting) and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the effect sound channel are both , remains at "2" which was set as the initial value. Additionally, when the activation warning sound is not being output and an error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the production sound channel are both changed to "0". There is.
On the other hand, similarly to the pre-activation warning state, in the activation warning state, the channel adjustment value of channel 1 corresponding to the error suggestion sound always remains at "2" which is set as the initial value.

As a result, while the activation warning sound is being output, if a variable performance or special in-game performance is being executed and no error has occurred, the activation warning sound and the performance sound will be output at the same time, but the activation warning sound will be Although the current speaker volume is output as is, the effect sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume.
In addition, while the activation warning sound is being output, if a variable performance or special game performance is being executed and an error has occurred, the activation warning sound, performance sound, and error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that is occurring will be output. Although they are output simultaneously, the production sound and the activation warning sound are output silently, and the error suggestion sound is output at the current speaker volume.
In addition, when the activation warning sound is not output, if a variable effect or special game effect is being executed and no error has occurred, only the effect sound is output, but this effect sound is not output from the current speaker. The volume is output as is.
In addition, when the activation warning sound is not being output, if a variable performance or special game performance is being executed and an error has occurred, the performance sound and error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that is occurring will be simultaneously output. However, the performance sound is output without any sound, and the error-suggesting sound is output with the current speaker volume unchanged.

Specifically, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5" and the activation warning audio is being output and no error has occurred, the activation warning audio will be output at the current speaker volume of "5". However, the performance sound is output at a volume of 25% of the current speaker volume of "5". That is, at this time, the production sound is output at a volume lower than the activation warning sound.
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", if the activation warning audio is being output and an error has occurred, both the activation warning audio and the production sound will be output silently, but the relevant The error-suggesting sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", if the activation warning sound is not output and no error has occurred, the production sound will be output at the current speaker volume of "5". .
For example, if the current speaker volume is "5", if the activation warning sound is not being output and an error has occurred, the production sound will be output silently, but the sound will be output in response to the error. The error suggestion sound is output at the current speaker volume of "5".

Also, for example, when the activation warning sound is being output, if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a special game is being executed, and no error has occurred, and the activation warning sound is at the current speaker volume, "5", the production Assume that the sound is being output at a volume of 25% of the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the upper key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "6", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "6". Ru. As a result, the activation warning sound will be output at the current speaker volume after the change, which is "6", and the production sound will be output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume after the change, which is "6". .
Also, for example, while the activation warning sound is being output, if a special symbol is being displayed fluctuating or a special game is being executed, and an error has occurred, the activation warning sound and performance sound are output silently, and the error occurs. It is assumed that the corresponding error-indicating sound is output at the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "4", and the current speaker volume is changed to "4". Ru. As a result, the above-mentioned error suggestion sound is outputted at the current speaker volume of "4" after the change, but the activation warning sound and the performance sound continue to be output without sound.
Also, for example, when the activation warning sound is not being output, if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a special game is being executed, and no error has occurred, and the production sound is at the current speaker volume, "3" Assume that it was output as . At this time, when the upper key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "4", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "4". Ru. As a result, the effect sound is output at the current speaker volume after the change, which is "4".
Also, for example, when the activation warning sound is not being output, if a special symbol is being displayed fluctuating or a special game is being executed, and an error has occurred, the production sound will be output silently to respond to the error. It is assumed that the error-suggesting sound is output at the current speaker volume of "7". At this time, when the lower key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "6", and the current speaker volume is changed to "6". Ru. As a result, the above-mentioned error-suggesting sound is outputted at the current speaker volume of "6" after the change, but the production sound continues to be outputted in silence.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the activation warning state, when the activation warning audio is being output and no error has occurred, both the activation warning audio and the performance sound are output. Although it is output, the volume of the performance sound is lower than the volume of the activation warning sound. This makes it easier to hear the activation warning sound than the performance sound, so even if a variable performance or special game performance is being executed, the activation warning sound makes it easy to understand that the activation warning state has been set. It becomes easier.
In addition, regardless of whether or not the activation warning sound is being output, when an error occurs, the activation warning sound and the performance sound will not be audible, and the error suggesting sound will be audible at the current speaker volume. Thereby, when an error occurs, it is possible to reliably recognize the error-suggesting sound, and from the error-suggesting sound, it is possible to reliably understand the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred.

Note that in the activation warning state, the current speaker volume may not be able to be changed while the activation warning sound is being output. By doing this, when the down key is pressed while the activation warning voice is being output, the current speaker volume will be reduced, making it difficult to hear the activation warning voice, and indicating that the activation warning state has been set. It is possible to prevent situations where it becomes difficult to grasp the situation.
Furthermore, while the activation warning sound is being output, the activation warning sound may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. By doing so, it becomes easier to hear the activation warning sound, and it becomes easier to understand that the activation warning state has been set.
Further, while the activation warning sound is being output, it is sufficient that the activation warning sound is easier to hear than the performance sound, and the volume of the performance sound is not limited to 25% of the current speaker volume. For example, the performance sound may be output without any sound. Furthermore, the output of the performance sound itself may be stopped. Even in this case, it becomes easy to understand that the activation warning state has been set due to the activation warning sound during execution of the variable performance or the special game performance.
Also, in the activation warning state, as in the pre-activation warning state, the current speaker volume may not be able to be changed while an error occurs. Furthermore, while an error occurs, the error suggestion volume may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. Further, when an error occurs, the output of the effect sound itself may be stopped instead of outputting the effect sound without sound.

(3) Activation notice state In the activation notice state, a special game effect is being executed, and the occurrence of a door opening error, main control related error, or payout related error is determined, and if any of these errors occurs, , an error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that has occurred will be output.
Further, the activation notification sound will be output from the time when the activation notification state is set until the activation notification audio output time (7 seconds) has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the special game being executed when the activation notification state is set ends, the activation notification state ends. Therefore, in the activation notice state, the current speaker volume can be changed during the period until the special game in progress ends. Further, as in the pre-activation warning state and activation warning state, the current speaker volume can be changed even while an error is occurring.
Note that the process of changing the current speaker volume in the activation warning state is the same as that in the pre-activation warning state and the activation warning state, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Then, while the activation warning sound is being output and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 corresponding to the difference pitch stop control sound remains at "2" which is set as the initial value. However, the channel adjustment values of the production sound channels are all changed to "1". Additionally, when the activation warning sound is being output and an error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the production sound channel are both changed to "0". There is.
Furthermore, when the activation warning sound is not output (that is, after the activation warning sound has finished outputting) and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the effect sound channel are both , remains at "2" which is set as the initial value. Additionally, when the activation warning sound is not output and an error occurs, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the production sound channel are both changed to "0". There is.
On the other hand, as in the pre-activation warning state and the activation warning state, in the activation notice state, the channel adjustment value of channel 1 corresponding to the error suggestion sound always remains at the initial value of "2". Become.

As a result, when the activation warning sound is being output and no error has occurred, the activation warning sound and the performance sound (the performance sound of the special game performance) will be output at the same time, but the activation warning sound will remain at the current speaker volume. However, the performance sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume.
Additionally, when the activation warning sound is being output and an error has occurred, the activation warning sound, performance sound, and error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that is occurring are output at the same time, but the performance sound and the activation warning sound are It is output silently, and the error-suggesting audio is output at the current speaker volume.
Furthermore, when the activation warning sound is not being output and no error has occurred, only the effect sound is output, but this effect sound is output as is at the current speaker volume.
In addition, when the activation warning sound is not output and an error occurs, the performance sound and the error suggestion sound corresponding to the error that is occurring are output at the same time, but the performance sound is output without sound. The error-suggesting sound is output at the current speaker volume.

Specifically, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5" and the activation warning audio is being output and no error has occurred, the activation warning audio will be output at the current speaker volume of "5". However, the performance sound is output at a volume of 25% of the current speaker volume of "5". That is, at this time, the performance sound is output at a lower volume than the activation warning sound.
For example, if the current speaker volume is "5" and an error occurs while the activation warning audio is being output, both the activation warning audio and the production sound will be output silently, but the relevant The error-suggesting sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", if the activation warning sound is not output and no error has occurred, the production sound will be output at the current speaker volume of "5". .
For example, if the current speaker volume is "5", and the activation warning sound is not being output and an error has occurred, the production sound will be output silently, but the sound will be output in response to the error. The error suggestion sound is output at the current speaker volume of "5".

Also, for example, if no error occurs while the activation warning sound is being output, the activation warning sound is at the current speaker volume of "5", and the production sound is at a volume of 25% of the current speaker volume of "5". Assume that it has been output. At this time, when the upper key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "6", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "6". Ru. As a result, the activation warning sound will be output at the current speaker volume after the change, which is "6", and the production sound will be output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume after the change, which is "6". .
Also, for example, an error has occurred while outputting the activation warning audio, and the activation warning audio and production sound are output silently, and the error suggestion audio corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5". It is assumed that At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "4", and the current speaker volume is changed to "4". Ru. As a result, the above-mentioned error suggestion sound is outputted at the current speaker volume after the change, which is "4", but the activation warning sound and the production sound continue to be output without sound.
Further, for example, assume that when the activation warning sound is not being output, no error has occurred and the performance sound is being output at the current speaker volume of "3". At this time, when the upper key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "4", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "4". Ru. As a result, the effect sound is output at the current speaker volume after the change, which is "4".
For example, when the activation warning sound is not output, an error has occurred, the production sound is output silently, and the error suggestion sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "7". It is assumed that At this time, when the lower key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "6", and the current speaker volume is changed to "6". Ru. As a result, the above-mentioned error-suggesting sound is outputted at the current speaker volume of "6" after the change, but the production sound continues to be outputted in silence.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the activation notification state, when the activation notification audio is being output and no error has occurred, both the activation notification audio and the performance sound are output. Although it is output, the volume of the performance sound is lower than the volume of the activation warning sound. This makes it easier to hear the activation notice sound than the performance sound, so that even though the special game performance is being executed, the activation notice sound makes it easy to understand that the activation notice state has been set.
Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the activation warning sound is being output, when an error occurs, the activation warning sound and the performance sound will not be audible, and the error suggesting sound will be audible at the current speaker volume. Thereby, when an error occurs, it is possible to reliably recognize the error-suggesting sound, and from the error-suggesting sound, it is possible to reliably understand the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred.

In addition, in the activation notification state, the current speaker volume may not be changed while the activation notification audio is being output. By doing this, when the down key is pressed while the activation warning sound is being output, the current speaker volume will be reduced, making it difficult to hear the activation warning audio, and making it clear that the activation warning state has been set. It is possible to prevent situations where it becomes difficult to grasp the situation.
Furthermore, while the activation warning sound is being output, the activation warning sound may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. By doing so, it becomes easier to hear the activation warning sound, and it becomes easier to understand that the activation notification state has been set.
Further, while the activation warning sound is being output, it is sufficient that the activation warning sound is easier to hear than the performance sound, and the volume of the performance sound is not limited to 25% of the current speaker volume. For example, the performance sound may be output without any sound. Furthermore, the output of the performance sound itself may be stopped. Even in this case, even though the special game effect is being executed, it is easy to understand that the activation notification state has been set due to the activation notification sound.
Furthermore, in the same manner as the pre-activation warning state and the activation warning state, the current speaker volume may not be able to be changed during the occurrence of an error in the activation notice state as well. Furthermore, while an error occurs, the error suggestion volume may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. Further, when an error occurs, the output of the effect sound itself may be stopped instead of outputting the effect sound without sound.

(4) Activated state In the activated state, the variable performance and the special in-game performance are not executed, so no performance sound is output. Further, only the occurrence of a door opening error is determined, and when the error occurs, an error suggesting sound corresponding to the door opening error is output.
Further, once the activation state is set, the activation sound will be output until a power outage occurs.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the current speaker volume can be changed at any time during the period from when the activated state is set until it ends. Further, as in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, and activation warning state, the current speaker volume can be changed even during the occurrence of a door opening error.
Here, during the activation state, the volume setting image AG is not displayed even if the up key or down key is pressed. That is, during the activated state, only the current speaker volume is changed without displaying the volume setting image AG. When the up key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be increased within the settable range described above, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub RAM 303 is changed to By updating the speaker volume based on the operation, the current speaker volume increases. In addition, when the down key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be decreased within the above-mentioned settable range by the pressing operation, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is By updating the speaker volume to the one based on the operation, the current speaker volume decreases.

Then, when a door open error has not occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 corresponding to the difference pitch stop control voice remains at "2" which is set as the initial value. Further, as described above, during the activation state, no effect sound is output, so all channel adjustment values of the effect sound channels remain at "2" which is set as the initial value. Note that the channel adjustment value of this effect sound channel may be changed to "0" instead of remaining at "2".
On the other hand, when a door opening error occurs, the channel adjustment value of channel 1 corresponding to the error suggesting sound always remains at "2" which is set as the initial value in the activated state.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the activation sound is being output and a door opening error has not occurred, only the activation sound is output, but this activation sound is output regardless of the current speaker volume. , is always output at the maximum speaker volume ("7").
Additionally, when the activation voice is being output and a door opening error occurs, the activation voice and the error suggestion voice corresponding to the door opening error will be output at the same time, but the activation voice will be output silently and the door opening error will be output. The error-suggesting sound corresponding to 1 is always output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume.

Specifically, for example, when the current speaker volume is "5", when the activation sound is being output and a door opening error has not occurred, the activation sound is output at the speaker volume "7".
For example, if the current speaker volume is "5" and the activation sound is being output and a door opening error has occurred, the activation sound will be output silently, but the activation sound will be output in response to the door opening error. The error suggestion sound is output at a speaker volume of "7".
Further, for example, assume that when the current speaker volume is "3", no door opening error has occurred and the activation sound is output at the speaker volume "7". At this time, when the upper key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "4". As a result, although the current speaker volume is changed to "4", the activation sound continues to be output at the speaker volume "7".
Further, for example, assume that a door opening error has occurred when the current speaker volume is "7", and an error suggestion sound corresponding to the door opening error is output at a speaker volume of "7". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume data stored in the sub RAM 303 is updated to "6". As a result, although the current speaker volume is changed to "6", the error suggestion sound corresponding to the door opening error continues to be output at the speaker volume "7".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the door opening error does not occur in the activation state, the activation sound is output, but the activation sound is output regardless of the current speaker volume. It is always output at the maximum speaker volume of "7". As a result, the activation sound can be reliably audible, so that it is possible to reliably understand that the activation state has been set based on the activation sound.
Additionally, when a door opening error occurs, the activation sound is not audible, and the error suggestion sound corresponding to the door opening error is always output at the maximum speaker volume "7", regardless of the current speaker volume. Ru. Thereby, when a door opening error occurs, the error suggesting sound can be reliably heard, and the occurrence of the door opening error can be reliably grasped from the error suggesting sound.

Note that in the activated state, the current speaker volume may not always be able to be changed, regardless of whether a door opening error has occurred. By doing so, the processing load on the sub CPU 301 and the like in the activated state can be reduced.
Further, the activation voice does not necessarily need to be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") as long as it can be reliably audible. For example, the output may be made at a speaker volume ("6") that is one level lower than the maximum speaker volume.
Further, the error-suggesting sound corresponding to the door opening error does not necessarily need to be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7"). For example, the output may be made at a speaker volume one step lower than the maximum speaker volume ("6"), or may be output at the current speaker volume.
Further, during the occurrence of a door opening error, the output of the activation sound itself may be stopped instead of outputting the activation sound silently.

(Summary of position correction process for displacing the accessory production device YS to the initial position)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, during the reach development performance in the variable performance, the role object presentation device YS is displaced to the movable position to perform the role object rotation effect, and this role object rotation effect ends. Then, the accessory performance device YS is displaced from the movable position to the initial position. At this time, for example, if the accessory presentation device YS is caught on a structure on the game board 11, the accessory presentation device YS cannot be displaced to the initial position and stops at the movable position or in front of the initial position. Such a situation may occur. When the accessory presentation device YS is stopped at a movable position, etc., the accessory presentation device YS overlaps the display section 21a of the presentation display device 21, and the visibility of various displays and various suggestions performed on the display section 21a becomes poor. There is a risk. In addition, since the accessory production device YS is stopped at a position different from the normal position, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that it is giving some kind of suggestion regarding the jackpot lottery result or the like.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position at the start of the variable presentation (at the start of the variable display of special symbols), the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position. Position correction processing (hereinafter also referred to as fluctuation start position correction processing) for displacing the device YS to the initial position is executed.

In this fluctuation start position correction process, first, upon receiving the fluctuation mode command and the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 100, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position. .
Although not particularly illustrated, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment includes an initial position detection sensor for detecting the accessory performance device YS located at the initial position. When the initial position detection sensor is performing detection, a predetermined detection signal is input to the sub control board 300. The sub CPU 301 determines that the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position when the detection signal is input, and determines that the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position when the detection signal is not input. It is determined that
When the sub CPU 301 determines that the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position, the sub CPU 301 controls the drive motor M to displace the accessory presentation device YS to the initial position, and maintains the drive motor M for a predetermined confirmation time (in this embodiment). After a period of 300 ms) has elapsed, an initial process is executed to determine whether or not the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position.
In this initial process, if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position, it means that the accessory presentation device YS has been displaced to the initial position. On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position, the accessory presentation device YS will not be displaced to the initial position yet.
If it is determined that the accessory production device YS is not located at the initial position, the sub CPU 301 executes a retry process having the same content as the above-mentioned initial process. This retry process is repeated a predetermined number of times (two times in this embodiment) at maximum, and if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position even after the retry process is executed a predetermined number of times, the sub CPU 301 It is determined that a problem related to the displacement of the accessory presentation device YS has occurred. If it is determined that a malfunction related to the displacement of the accessory production device YS has occurred, the position correction process at the start of fluctuation for the accessory production device YS is executed at the start of subsequent fluctuation production until a power outage occurs. Not done.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the activated state is set, the variable performance being executed is forcibly terminated. Therefore, if the activation state is set while the accessory rotation effect is being performed by the accessory performance device YS, the accessory rotation effect that is currently being executed will also be forcibly terminated.
Then, when the activation state is set, if the accessory production device YS is not located at the initial position, the position correction is performed to displace the accessory production device YS to the initial position, similar to when starting the variable production. Processing (hereinafter also referred to as activation state setting position correction processing) is executed.
In addition, in this activation state setting position correction process, even if it is determined that a problem related to the displacement of the accessory production device YS has occurred, as described above, the accessory production device YS is Processing for displacing it to the initial position is executed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the role object rotation performance is being performed by the role object performance device YS when the activation state is set, the role object rotation performance is forcibly terminated. Further, when setting the activation state, a position correction process is also executed to displace the accessory performance device YS to the initial position.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the accessory production device YS overlaps the display section 21a of the production display device 21 and the visibility of the activation suggestion displayed on the display section 21a during the activation state becomes poor. In addition, the game may be progressing even though the activation state is set because the performance by the accessory production device YS is being executed or the accessory production device YS is not located at the initial position. This can prevent such misunderstandings from occurring.

In addition, although the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is provided with only one accessory performance device used in various performances, it is not limited to this, and may be movable within different ranges, Two or more role-playing devices may be provided that can operate in different ways. Even when two or more accessory presentation devices are provided, the same position correction processing at the start of fluctuation, position correction processing at activation state setting, etc. as described above may be executed for these accessory presentation devices. good.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as a premise for executing the position correction process, it is determined whether or not the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position, but this is not limited to this. It is not something that will be done. For example, the position correction process may be executed without determining whether or not the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position.
Further, the execution timing of the position correction process is not limited to the start of the variable performance or the setting of the activated state, and may be executed, for example, at the end of the variable performance or the end of the special game.

(Summary of processing during standby state)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, during the pre-warning state or during the warning state in the playable state, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are When none of them are stored, the game stays in a standby state in which no game is played.
Specifically, during the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, when the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops and the above-mentioned symbol confirmation time has elapsed, both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number When it is not stored, a standby state is initiated. As described above, when the standby state is started, the main CPU 101 sends a standby state start command to the sub control board 300 indicating that the standby state has started. This makes it possible for the sub-control board 300 to also recognize the start of the standby state. Then, when the first special pattern random number or the second special pattern random number is acquired and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the standby state ends.

Then, when the sub CPU 301 receives the standby state start command (when the standby state starts), the sub control board 300 starts measuring the no-operation time, which is the time during which no operation is performed by the player. .
This non-operation time is measured by a non-operation time timer counter, which is an addition timer (count-up timer) provided on the sub-control board 300. In addition, after the measurement of the non-operation time has started, the measurement is continued until the standby state ends, and the measurement is continued until the standby state ends. When any one of the 25 press operations is performed, the count value of the no-operation time timer counter is reset.
Specifically, when the standby state start command is received and the measurement of the non-operation time is started, the non-operation time timer counter is counted up in the order of 0 seconds → 1 second → 2 seconds → etc., and the operation handle is Each time a rotating operation of 5, a pressing operation of the operation button 9b, or a pressing operation of the cross key 25 is detected, the no-operation time timer counter restarts counting up from 0 seconds. When the standby state ends, the count-up of the no-operation time timer counter also ends.
Note that when the standby state starts, measurement of the no-operation time starts, but at this point, for example, if the rotation operation of the operating handle 5 is continued, the count value of the no-operation time timer counter will change. continues to be reset. Therefore, in practice, when the standby state start command is received, on the condition that none of the rotation operation of the operation handle 5, the pressing operation of the operation button 9b, and the pressing operation of the cross key 25 are performed. Measurement of the non-operation time will begin.

Then, when the non-operation time reaches a predetermined demonstration start time (30 seconds in this embodiment) (that is, when the count value of the non-operation time timer counter reaches the value of the demonstration start time), the sub CPU 301 starts displaying a predetermined demo display. Execute the process that performs. Note that even after the demonstration display starts, the measurement of the non-operation time is continued. Then, regardless of the measured non-operation time, when a predetermined demonstration display time elapses or the standby state ends, a process for terminating the demo display is executed.

Then, when the demo display ends after the above-mentioned demo display time has elapsed, a process of shifting to a power saving state for suppressing power consumption during the standby state is performed. Although not particularly shown, in the power saving state, processes such as turning off various lamps, reducing the brightness of the effect display device 21, and stopping the output of audio etc. are performed, and the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 A message indicating that the device is in a power saving state is displayed. This will reduce power consumption.
In addition, the power saving state is a command transmitted from the main control board 100 as the game progresses (for example, a starting winning command based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16). , a variation mode command based on the start of variation of a special symbol, a variation pattern command, etc.) are received on the sub-control board 300, and the rotation operation of the operation handle 5, the depression operation of the operation button 9b, or the depression operation of the cross key 25 is performed. It is designed to be terminated by being turned on.

(Summary of demonstration display during pre-activation warning state or activation warning state)
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a first demonstration mode and a second demonstration mode as demo display modes.
In the first demonstration mode, when the demonstration display is started, the illumination display of the latent image on the light guide plate GB is superimposed on this display while maintaining the display on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 at the time. The illumination display is executed for a time (for example, 3 seconds), and when the first display time has elapsed, the illumination display ends, and on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21, a story about the characters appearing in various effects, a video explaining the model, etc. This is a mode in which the configured demo image is set to be displayed for a second display time (for example, 12 seconds).
In the second demonstration mode, when the demonstration display is started, the above-mentioned illumination display is not executed, and the display on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 at that time is maintained for the above-mentioned first display time, and the above-mentioned illumination display is not executed. When one display time has elapsed, the above-mentioned demo image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 for the above-mentioned second display time.
That is, both the first demonstration mode and the second demonstration mode are executed over the same demonstration display time (15 seconds). When the demo display is executed in the first demo mode, the illumination display described above is executed from the start of the demo display until the first display time described above elapses, thereby providing guidance. Since the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 located behind the light plate GB is covered, the display contents of the display section 21a are difficult or impossible to see. On the other hand, when the demo display is executed in the second demo mode, the illumination display is not executed from the start of the demo display until the first display time elapses. The display section 21a of the effect display device 21 is not covered, and the display contents of the display section 21a can be viewed through the light guide plate G.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, once the activation warning state is set, the activation warning character image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 (activation warning suggestion) until the above-mentioned termination condition is satisfied. will be held. Therefore, as long as the above-mentioned termination conditions are not met, the activation warning character image continues to be displayed even after the standby state has started or while the demonstration display is being executed.
However, when the demonstration display is executed in the first demonstration mode while the activation warning character image is displayed, as described above, from the start of the demonstration display until the first display time elapses, Due to the illumination display, the display contents of the display section 21a become difficult or impossible to see, and as a result, the activation warning character image also becomes difficult or impossible to see. The activation warning text image suggests that the activation state is about to be set, but if it is difficult to see or cannot be seen, the player may start playing without realizing that the activation state is about to be set. , there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, when the demonstration display is executed in the second demonstration mode, the illumination display is not executed, so the activation warning character image does not become difficult or impossible to see.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when performing a demonstration display during the activation warning state where the activation warning character image is displayed, by selecting the second demonstration mode, the activation warning character image can be visually recognized. The demonstration display is restricted in a manner that may interfere with the user's performance. On the other hand, when the demonstration display is executed during the pre-activation warning state where the activation warning characters are not displayed, the first demonstration mode is selected. That is, in this case, execution of the demonstration display in a manner that may impede the visibility of the activation warning character image is not restricted.
By doing the above, when the demonstration display is executed while the activation warning character image is being displayed, it is possible to reliably prevent the above-mentioned disadvantage to the player from occurring, and If the demonstration display is executed when the activation warning character image is not displayed, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the demonstration display.

Although not particularly illustrated, various images in this embodiment are displayed in multiple display layers that are virtually arranged one on top of the other at a predetermined distance. The display layer where the activation warning text image is displayed is located in front of the display layer where the demo image is displayed, so when the activation warning text image is displayed, the demo image is Even if it is displayed, the activation warning character image is not covered up by the demonstration image, and the activation warning character image becomes visible.

(Variations regarding demonstration display during pre-activation warning state or activation warning state)
The first demonstration mode and the second demonstration mode are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.
For example, the first demonstration mode is the same mode as described above (when the demonstration display is started, the illumination display is superimposed on this display while maintaining the display on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 at the time). It is executed for a display time (3 seconds), and when the first display time has elapsed, the illumination display ends, and the demonstration image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 for a second display time (12 seconds). set mode). On the other hand, the second demo mode is a mode in which the display of the demo image is started when the demo display is started, and the display of the demo image is set to be executed for the second display time (12 seconds). do. That is, the demo display time is set to be different between the first demo mode and the second demo mode (the demo display time of the first demo mode is 15 seconds, and the demo display time of the second demo mode is 12 seconds). Then, when the demo display is executed in the first demo mode, as described above, the display contents of the display section 21a are However, when the demo display is executed in the second demo mode described above, the illumination display described above is not executed during the demonstration display, and the display content of the display section 21a is becomes visible.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved.

In addition, in the demonstration display, an accessory rotating effect may be executed, and as a mode of this demonstration display, when the accessory rotating effect is executed, the activation warning character image is displayed by the accessory effect device YS. There may be provided a first demonstration mode in which the object is difficult to see or cannot be seen, and a second demonstration mode in which the rotation effect of the accessory is not performed and the activation warning character image is neither difficult to see nor invisible. When performing the above-mentioned demonstration display during the activation warning state where the activation warning character image is displayed, by selecting the second demonstration mode, the demonstration is performed in a manner that may obstruct the visibility of the activation warning character image. When display execution is restricted and a demonstration display is executed during a pre-activation warning state where activation warning characters are not displayed, selecting the first demonstration mode may impede the visibility of the activation warning character image. Execution of demonstration display may not be restricted depending on the mode.
For example, in the first aspect, when the demonstration display is started, the accessory rotation effect is executed for a first display time while maintaining the display on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 at the time, and When , the rotation effect of the accessory ends, and the demonstration image is set to be displayed for the second display time on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. In addition, in the second demonstration mode, when the demonstration display is started, the display on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21 at that point in time is maintained for the first display time without executing the rotation performance of the accessory. When one display time has elapsed, the demo image is set to be displayed for a second display time on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. Note that the second demonstration mode may be configured such that the display of the demo image is started when the demonstration display is started, and the display of the demo image is executed for a second display time.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the activation warning character image is displayed, a mode of demonstration display is selected that does not perform illumination display or rotating role effects that may obstruct the visibility of the activation warning character image. As a result, execution of the demonstration display in a manner that may impede the visibility of the activation warning character image is restricted, but the restriction method is not limited to this.
For example, a mode is provided in which the illumination display or the movement of the accessory production device YS is performed in a range where the activation warning character image is difficult or invisible (for example, at a position that does not overlap with the activation warning character image), and the activation is performed. When the warning character image is displayed, a demonstration display may be performed in this manner.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the display layer where the activation warning character image is displayed is different from the display layer where the demo image is displayed (the display layer where the activation warning character image is displayed is different from the display layer where the demonstration image is displayed). However, it is not limited to this, even if the activation warning text image and demo image are displayed on the same display layer. good. In this case, for example, when displaying a demonstration while the activation warning character image is displayed, the demonstration image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the activation warning character image on the display section 21a. When displaying the demonstration image when the activation warning character image is not displayed, the demonstration image may be set to be displayed on the entire surface of the display section 21a.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved.

(Summary of processing when activated state is set during standby state)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, while staying in the standby state that started during the activation warning state, for example, the game ball that was launched before the start of the standby state or the ball that was launched even after the start of the standby state is There is a case where the game ball that was launched enters the general winning hole 14, and as a result, the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value (195000) while remaining in the standby state. In this case, the activation warning state ends and the activation state is set while remaining in the standby state.
Even when the activation state is set during the stay in the standby state, the above-mentioned activation suggestion (display of the activation character image) is performed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21.

Here, as described above, when the standby state is started, the no-operation time timer counter starts measuring the no-operation time, but in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the activated state is not activated while the standby state is staying. Even if it is set, the measurement of the inactivity time is continued. As a result, even during this activation state, the non-operation time being measured may reach the above-mentioned demonstration start time. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, even when the non-operation time being measured during the activation state reaches the demonstration start time, the process of displaying the demonstration in the above-mentioned second demonstration mode is executed. ing. When the process is executed, the demonstration image is internally displayed, and the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 displays the activation character image based on the activation state setting (activation suggestion). A situation may occur in which both the display of the demo image and the display of the demo image are executed redundantly.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the execution priority is determined in advance for displaying the activation character image and displaying the demonstration image, and displaying the activation character image is higher than displaying the demonstration image. It is a priority. Therefore, internally, although the display of the activated character image and the display of the demo image are being executed at the same time, the display of the demo image is restricted, and the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 is In this case, the demo image will not be displayed, and only the activated character image will be displayed. That is, even if the non-operation time reaches the demonstration start time during the activation state and the process of displaying the demonstration in the second demo mode is executed, the activation character image continues to be displayed, so that the effect display device 21 The appearance on the display section 21a does not change, and it is not possible to know from the display on the display section 21a that a demo display is being executed internally.

Furthermore, if the process of displaying a demo is executed during the activation state, as described above, the demonstration image is being displayed internally, so the elapsed time of the demo display is Judgments are also made. Then, when the demo display time has elapsed, a process to end the demo display is executed, and the state in which the demo image is displayed internally ends, and even if the demo image is being displayed, the process shifts to the power saving state. will be held. When this process is performed, it means that the power saving state is internally maintained, and the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 displays the activated character image and the display that it is in the power saving state. A situation arises where both of these are executed redundantly.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the priority order of execution is determined in advance for the display of the activation character image and the display that the power saving state is in progress, and the display that the power saving state is in progress is determined in advance. The display of the activated character image has a higher priority than the above. Therefore, internally, the display of the activated character image and the display that the power saving state is in progress are being executed at the same time, but the display that the power saving state is in progress is restricted. On the display section 21a of the effect display device 21, the fact that the power saving state is in effect is not displayed, and only the activation character image is displayed. That is, even if the demonstration display in the second demonstration mode ends and the process of transitioning to the power saving state is executed during the activation state, the activation character image continues to be displayed, so that the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 The appearance does not change, and it is not possible to know from the display on the display unit 21a that the device is staying in the power saving state internally.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the process of transitioning to the power saving state is performed during the activation state and the power saving state is internally stayed, various lamps are turned off and the effect display is displayed. Processes such as lowering the brightness of the device 21 and stopping the output of audio and the like are not executed (restricted).
Therefore, in this case, the various lamps are lit in the same manner as before the process of transitioning to the power saving state described above, the brightness of the effect display device 21 remains unchanged, and the output of audio, etc. continues. It will be executed accordingly.

As described above, in the power saving state, commands (start winning command, variable mode command, variable pattern command, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 100 as the game progresses are received by the sub control board 300. The process ends when the operation handle 5 is rotated, the operation button 9b is pressed, or the cross key 25 is pressed.
Here, in the activated state, the game does not progress and the game balls are not fired, so commands associated with the progress of the game described above are not transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300. do not have. On the other hand, even in the activated state, the rotation operation of the operation handle 5, the depression operation of the operation button 9b, and the depression operation of the cross key 25 can be grasped on the sub-control board 300.
Therefore, in the power saving state (the power saving state that remains internally) that has shifted to the active state, the commands sent from the main control board 100 as the game progresses are received by the sub control board 300. The process does not end when the operation handle 5 is rotated, the operation button 9b is pressed, or the cross key 25 is pressed.
Even if this power-saving state ends, the display of the activated character image continues, so the appearance on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 does not change, and the power-saving state in which it remained internally remains. It is not possible to know from the display on the display unit 21a that the process has ended.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the activation state may be set when the differential ball count value reaches the second reference value while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the activation warning state. be. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols being executed is forcibly ended and the game is stopped, a standby state is not started and the main CPU 101 does not send a standby state start command to the sub control board 300.
Similarly, even when the activation notice state ends and the activation state is set, the special game in progress ends and the game stops, so the standby state is not started and the main CPU 101 is on standby. A state start command is not sent to the sub control board 300.
Therefore, in these cases, measurement of the non-operation time is not started in the sub-control board 300, and demonstration display and transition to the power saving state are not performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, even if the activation state is set during the standby state, the measurement of the no-operation time that starts based on the start of the standby state continues to be performed. be done.
Thereby, even in the activation state set during the standby state, processing based on the non-operation time (demonstration display in the second demonstration mode, transition to the power saving state) can be executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the activated state is set during the standby state, when the no-operation time reaches the demonstration start time, the process of displaying the demo in the second mode is executed. The display of the demo image is limited, and only the activated character image is displayed. Further, when the demonstration display time has elapsed, a process of shifting to the power saving state is performed, but the display indicating that the power saving state is in effect is limited, and only the activated character image is displayed.
Thereby, in the activation state set during the standby state, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the activation suggestion from becoming poor, and it is possible to reliably recognize that the activation state is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the activated state is set during the standby state, the second Although the demonstration display in the demo mode and the display indicating that the power saving state is in effect are limited, the mode of limitation is not limited to these. For example, the display may be performed in a smaller range than when a demonstration image or a message indicating that the power saving state is in effect is displayed during the pre-warning state. Furthermore, the display may be performed for a shorter period of time than in this case.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the process of resetting the no-operation timer counter and ending the power saving state is performed by rotating the operating handle 5; The present invention is not limited to this, and these processes may be executed simply by touching the operation handle 5. Specifically, by transmitting to the sub-control board 300 that the touch sensor 5a has detected (detects that the operating handle 5 has been touched), the sub-control board 300 can also notify that the operating handle 5 has been touched. When it is determined that the operation handle 5 has been touched on the sub-control board 300 while the no-operation timer counter is measuring or staying in the power saving state, the no-operation timer counter is reset. Alternatively, the power saving state may end.

Next, control processing in the sub-control board 300 for executing various processing as described above will be explained.
First, the main processing of the sub control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
In step 10000, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 302, and initialization and setting processing of flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 303 is executed. Then, the process advances to the next step 10001.
In step 10001, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of updating each performance random number (variable performance random number), and thereafter repeatedly executes the process of step 10001 until an interrupt process is performed. Here, each performance random number is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 55.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not particularly shown) that generates clock pulses at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds). Upon generation of the clock pulse by this reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 301 reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 55.

In step 10100, sub CPU 301 executes updating processing of various timer counters used in sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 10101.
Note that the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer as a timer counter other than the no-operation time timer counter, and the timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 is executed. and when it reaches 0, the subtraction is stopped.
In step 10101, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 303, and executes various processes according to the received command. Specifically, in the sub control board 300, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 100, a command reception interrupt process is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 100 is stored in the reception buffer. Then, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer by command reception interrupt processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 10102.

In step 10102, the sub CPU 301 executes a standby state operation control process that is performed based on the press operation of the cross key 25 or the press operation of the operation button 9b during the standby state. Then, the process advances to the next step 10103.
In step 10103, the sub CPU 301 executes demo display control processing, which is processing related to demo display. Then, the process advances to the next step 10104.

In step 10104, the sub CPU 301 executes power saving state control processing, which is processing related to the power saving state. Then, the process advances to the next step 10105.
In step 10105, the sub CPU 301 executes current speaker volume control processing, which is processing related to the current speaker volume. Then, the process advances to the next step 10106.

In step 10106, the sub CPU 301 executes pre-warning volume adjustment processing, which is processing related to volume adjustment in the pre-warning state. Then, the process advances to the next step 10107.
In step 10107, the sub CPU 301 executes an activation warning/notice volume adjustment process, which is a process related to volume adjustment in an activation warning state or an activation notice state. Then, the process advances to the next step 10108.

In step 10108, the sub CPU 301 executes a volume adjustment process during activation, which is a process related to volume adjustment in the activation state. Then, the process advances to the next step 10109.
In step 10109, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 9 can be accepted according to the progress status of the variable effect being executed, etc., and receives operation signals from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. Determine whether or not has been input. If the production operation device 9 is accepting an operation when an operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the press operation detection sensor 9d, an image indicating that the production operation device 9 has been operated is displayed. Commands are sent to the transmission buffer to be sent to various control boards such as a control board (not particularly shown), an audio control board (not shown), and an illumination control board (not shown). Store. Then, the process advances to the next step 10110.
In step 10110, the sub CPU 301 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 303 to various control boards such as an image control board, an audio control board, and an illumination control board. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the sub control board 300 ends.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above, the standby state start command reception process that is executed when the standby state start command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. The standby state start command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 811 of the special symbol variation start process, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in the process of step 212.
In step 10200, the sub CPU 301 starts measuring the non-operation time using the non-operation time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 10201.
In step 10201, the sub CPU 301 turns on the measurement flag indicating that the no-operation time is being measured (that is, the device is in a standby state). Then, the standby state start command reception process ends.

Next, of the command analysis processing in step 10101 described above, the start winning command receiving process that is executed when the starting winning command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57. The starting winning command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 509 of the first starting winning opening detection process or step 609 of the second starting winning opening detection process, and then stored in the sub control board 300 by the process of step 212. Sent.
In step 10300, sub CPU 301 determines whether the measurement flag is on. If it is determined that the counting flag is not on (that is, off), the start winning command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement flag is on, the process advances to the next step 10301.
In step 10301, the sub CPU 301 ends the measurement of the non-operation time using the non-operation time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 10302.

In step 10302, the sub CPU 301 turns off the measurement flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 10303.
In step 10303, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the demo flag indicating that the demo display is being executed is on, that is, whether the demo display is being executed. If it is determined that the demonstration flag is not on (that is, off), the process advances to step 10306. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo flag is on, the process advances to the next step 10304.

In step 10304, the sub CPU 301 sets a demo clear command to end the demo display being executed in the transmission buffer. The demo clear command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and the image control board controls ( (control to end the demonstration display) will be performed. Then, the process advances to the next step 10305.
In step 10305, the sub CPU 301 turns off the demo flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 10306.

In step 10306, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the power saving flag indicating that the power saving state is being stayed is on, that is, whether or not the power saving state is being stayed. Then, when it is determined that the power saving flag is not on (that is, off), the start winning command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag is on, the process advances to the next step 10307.
In step 10307, the sub CPU 301 sets a power saving state release command to end the power saving state during stay in the transmission buffer. The power saving state cancellation command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards control the brightness of the effect display device 21 and the various lamps based on the received power saving state cancellation command. Control is performed to return the lighting and audio output by the audio output device 10 to the original state before transitioning to the power saving state. Then, the process advances to the next step 10308.

In step 10308, the sub CPU 301 turns off the power saving flag. Then, the start winning command reception process ends.
Note that the processing from step 10300 to step 10308 is not performed based on the reception of the start winning command, but based on the reception of the fluctuation mode command or fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100 at the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. It may be done based on.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above, the rotation operation command reception process executed when a rotation operation command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58. The rotation operation command is stored in step 216 of the timer interrupt process in the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in the process of step 212.
In step 10400, sub CPU 301 determines whether the measurement flag is on. If it is determined that the measurement flag is not on, the rotation operation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement flag is on, the process advances to the next step 10401.
In step 10401, the sub CPU 301 resets the count value of the no-operation time timer counter. As a result, the count value of the no-operation time timer counter becomes 0 (the no-operation time returns to 0 seconds). Then, the process advances to the next step 10402.

In step 10402, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the power saving flag is on. If it is determined that the power saving flag is not on, the rotation operation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag is on, the process advances to the next step 10403.
In step 10403, the sub CPU 301 sets a power saving state cancellation command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 10404.

In step 10404, the sub CPU 301 turns off the power saving flag. Then, the rotation operation command reception process ends.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above, the variation command reception process that is executed when a variation mode command and a variation pattern command are received will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 59. As described above, the variable mode command and the variable pattern command are stored in step 911 of the variable effect pattern determination process in the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in step 212.

In step 10500, the sub CPU 301 obtains the variable effect random number updated in step 10001 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 10501.
In step 10501, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the first reference value attainment flag (flag provided on the sub control board 300) indicating that the difference pitch count value has reached the first reference value is on. That is, it is determined whether the difference pitch count value has reached the first reference value. If it is determined that the first reference value attainment flag is on (that is, the difference pitch count value has reached (or has reached) the first reference value), the process advances to step 10504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first reference value attainment flag is not on (that is, the difference pitch count value has not reached the first reference value), the process advances to the next step 10502.

In step 10502, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the determined special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the symbol determination command set in step 807 and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 includes information on the type of the determined special symbol. The sub CPU 301 can perform the above-mentioned determination based on the information on the special symbol included in the received symbol determination command. If it is determined that it is not the jackpot symbol X1, the process proceeds to step 10504. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the jackpot symbol X1, the process proceeds to the next step 10503.
In step 10503, the sub CPU 301 selects the variable effect determination table B as the variable effect determination table 121 to be referred to in order to determine the mode of the variable effect. Then, the process advances to step 10505.

Further, in step 10504, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the first reference value attainment flag is on in the above-mentioned step 10501, or when it is determined that the jackpot symbol X1 is not the jackpot symbol The variable effect determination table A is selected as the variable effect determination table 121 to be referred to in order to determine. Then, the process advances to the next step 10505.
In step 10505, the sub CPU 301 uses the variation effect random number obtained in step 10500 described above, the variation mode number corresponding to the received variation mode command, the variation pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the variation effect random number obtained in step 10503 or 10504 described above. Based on the selected variable effect determination table 121, the mode of the variable effect is determined. Then, the process advances to the next step 10506.

In step 10506, the sub CPU 301 sets a variable effect execution command corresponding to the variable effect mode determined in step 10505 described above in the transmission buffer. The variable effect execution command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to execute the variable effect based on the received variable effect execution command. That will happen. Then, the process advances to the next step 10507.
In step 10507, the sub CPU 301 executes a position correction process at the start of fluctuation. Then, the variation command reception process ends.

Next, the fluctuation start position correction processing in step 10507 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60.
In step 10600, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a defect flag indicating that a defect related to the displacement of the accessory production device YS is on is on. If it is determined that the malfunction flag is on, the fluctuation start position correction process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the defect flag is not on (that is, off), the process advances to the next step 10601.
In step 10601, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the accessory production device YS is located at the initial position. Then, when it is determined that the accessory production device YS is located at the initial position, the fluctuation start position correction process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory production device YS is not located at the initial position, the process advances to the next step 10602.

In step 10602, sub CPU 301 executes initial processing. Specifically, the drive motor M is controlled to displace the accessory production device YS to the initial position, and after a predetermined confirmation time (300 ms) has elapsed, it is checked again whether or not the accessory production device YS is located at the initial position. Determine whether Then, the process advances to the next step 10603.
In step 10603, the sub CPU 301 checks the determination result in step 10602 described above, and if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position, ends the fluctuation start position correction process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position, the process advances to the next step 10604.

In step 10604, sub CPU 301 executes retry processing. Specifically, similar to the initial processing, the drive motor M is controlled to displace the accessory presentation device YS to the initial position, and after a predetermined confirmation time (300 ms) has elapsed, the accessory presentation device YS is moved to the initial position again. Determine whether it is located at . Then, the process advances to the next step 10605.
In step 10605, the sub CPU 301 checks the determination result in step 10604 described above, and if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position, ends the fluctuation start position correction process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position, the process advances to the next step 10606.

In step 10606, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the number of times the retry process has been executed has reached a predetermined number (two times). If it is determined that the predetermined number of times has not been reached, the process returns to step 10604. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined number of times has been reached, the process advances to the next step 10607.
In step 10607, the sub CPU 301 turns on the defect flag. Note that this malfunction flag is turned off when the power is restored from the power outage. Then, the fluctuation start position correction process is ended.

Next, among the command analysis processing in step 10101 described above, the command is executed when the first difference ball operation stop control designation command, the second difference ball action stop control designation command, or the third difference ball action stop control designation command is received. The difference pitch related command reception process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61. The first difference ball action stop control designation command, the second difference ball action stop control designation command, and the third difference ball action stop control designation command are stored in step 1872 of the difference ball related command set processing in the main control board 100. Thereafter, it is transmitted to the sub control board 300 through the process of step 212.
In step 10700, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the first difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first differential ball operation stop control designation command has not been received, the process advances to step 10702. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first differential ball operation stop control designation command has been received, the process advances to the next step 10701.
In step 10701, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an execution command that indicates that the activation warning state has been set. The execution command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to execute the suggestion that the activation warning state is set based on the received execution command. will be exposed. Further, as described above, the sub control board 300 is provided with a first reference value attainment flag, and the sub CPU 301 turns on this first reference value attainment flag. Note that this first reference value attainment flag is turned off when the difference pitch count value is reset. Then, the process advances to the next step 10702.

In step 10702, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not a second difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second differential ball operation stop control designation command has not been received, the process advances to step 10704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second differential ball operation stop control designation command has been received, the process advances to the next step 10703.
In step 10703, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an execution command that indicates that the activation notice state has been set. The execution command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to execute the suggestion that the activation notice state is set based on the received execution command. will be exposed. Then, the process advances to the next step 10704.

In step 10704, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the third difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received. Then, if it is determined that the third differential pitch operation stop control designation command has not been received, the differential pitch related command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the third differential ball operation stop control designation command has been received, the process advances to the next step 10705.
In step 10705, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an execution command to execute the suggestion that the activated state has been set. The execution command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to execute the suggestion that the activation state is set based on the received execution command. It happens. Note that the activation sound is output from the audio output device 10 at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. Then, the process advances to the next step 10706.

In step 10706, the sub CPU 301 executes an activation state setting accessory control process, which is a process related to the accessory production device YS when setting an activation state. Then, the difference pitch related command reception process ends.

Next, the activation state setting accessory control process in step 10704 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 62.
In step 10800, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the accessory rendering device YS is currently performing the accessory rotation performance. If it is determined that the accessory rotating effect is not being executed, the process advances to step 10802. On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory rotating effect is being executed, the process advances to the next step 10801.
In step 10801, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an accessory rotation performance stop command for stopping the accessory rotation performance. The accessory rotating performance stop command set here is sent to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and the operation control board performs control to stop the accessory rotating performance based on the received accessory rotating performance stop command. It will be carried out. Then, the process advances to the next step 10802.

In step 10802, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the accessory presentation device YS is located at the initial position. If it is determined that the accessory performance device YS is located at the initial position, the activation state setting accessory object control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory presentation device YS is not located at the initial position, the process advances to the next step 10803.
In step 10803, the sub CPU 301 executes position correction processing when setting the activation state. Specifically, similarly to the initial processing and retry processing, the drive motor M is controlled to displace the accessory performance device YS to the initial position. Then, the accessory control process when setting the activation state is ended.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above, the prize ball designation command reception process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63. As described above, the prize ball designation command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 208 of the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in the process of step 212. Although not particularly illustrated, at the start of a special game based on winning a jackpot during the normal game state, the sub CPU 301 initializes the display of the number of won prize balls in the lower right corner of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. Executes display (for example, displaying a character image of 0pt, etc.).
At step 10900, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the special game or the high probability time saving game state is in progress. If it is determined that the game is neither in the special game nor in the high probability time saving game state (that is, in the normal game state), the prize ball designation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special game is in progress or the high probability time-saving game state is in progress, the process advances to the next step 10901.

In step 10901, the sub CPU 301 receives the value of an acquired prize ball display counter that is configured by a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303 and accumulates the number of game balls acquired during the special game and the high probability time saving game state. Increment by the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball designation command given. That is, when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the general winning hole 14 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls that are paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 14. and when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the first starting winning hole 15 is received, the value of the acquired winning ball display counter is the winning ball that is paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15. When a prize ball designation command corresponding to the second starting winning hole 16 is received, the value of the acquired winning ball display counter is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16. It is incremented by the number of prize balls to be paid out, and when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the big winning hole 18 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 18. It is incremented by the number of prize balls that are paid out.
The value of this acquired prize ball display counter is reset when the high probability time saving game state ends, and becomes 0 at the start of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot during the normal game state.
Then, the process advances to the next step 10902.

In step 10902, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference ball arrival display (display of the difference ball arrival image) is being executed. If it is determined that the difference ball arrival display is being executed, the prize ball designation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the difference pitch arrival display is not being executed, the process advances to the next step 10903.
In step 10903, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is equal to or greater than the number of difference balls that causes the game to stop (that is, 95,000, which is the number of balls that stop operating). . If it is determined that the number is not equal to or greater than the number of deactivated objects (that is, it is less than the number of deactivated objects), the process advances to step 10905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is equal to or greater than the number of deactivated units, the process advances to the next step 10904.

In step 10904, the sub CPU 301 sets an execution command to execute the difference pitch arrival display in the transmission buffer. The execution command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to execute the difference pitch arrival display based on the received execution command. Then, the prize ball designation command reception process ends.
Further, in step 10905, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 10903 that the number is not equal to or greater than the number of stopped activation balls, the sub CPU 301 executes an update display to update the number of acquired prize balls being displayed to the value of the acquired prize balls display counter at the current time. Set the command to the send buffer. The execution command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to execute the above-mentioned update display based on the received execution command. Then, the prize ball designation command reception process ends.
Although not particularly shown, when the high probability time saving game state ends without winning the jackpot, the sub CPU 301 clears the display of the number of prize balls acquired.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above, the error suggestion command reception process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. As described above, the error suggestion command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 207 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in the processing of step 212. Although not particularly illustrated, the sub-control board 300 of this embodiment is provided with an error flag indicating that an error has occurred for each type of error that may occur.
In step 11000, sub CPU 301 determines whether the error flag corresponding to the error (occurred error) indicated by the received error suggestion command is on. If it is determined that the error flag is on, the error suggestion command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the error flag is not on (that is, off), the process advances to the next step 11001.
In step 11001, the sub CPU 301 turns on the error flag corresponding to the error indicated by the received error suggestion command. Then, the error-suggesting command reception process ends.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above, the error release command reception process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65. As described above, the error release command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 207 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in the processing of step 212. In step 11100, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the error flag corresponding to the error (cleared error) indicated by the received error release command is on. Then, if it is determined that the error flag is not on, the error cancellation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the error flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11101.
In step 11101, the sub CPU 301 turns off the error flag corresponding to the error indicated by the received error cancellation command. Then, the error release command reception process ends.

Next, the standby state operation control processing in step 10102 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66.
In step 11200, sub CPU 301 determines whether the measurement flag is on. If it is determined that the measurement flag is not on, the standby state operation control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11201.
In step 11201, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the cross key 25 is pressed or the operation button 9b is pressed, that is, the cross key detection sensor 25a detects the pressed operation of the cross key 25 or the pressed operation is detected. It is determined whether or not the sensor 9d detects the pressing operation of the operation button 9b. If it is determined that neither the cross key 25 nor the operation button 9b has been pressed, the standby state operation control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cross key 25 has been pressed or the operation button 9b has been pressed, the process advances to the next step 11202.

In step 11202, the sub CPU 301 resets the count value of the no-operation time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 11203.
In step 11203, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the power saving flag is on. If it is determined that the power saving flag is not on, the standby state operation control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11204.

In step 11204, the sub CPU 301 sets a power saving state cancellation command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 11205.
In step 11205, the sub CPU 301 turns off the power saving flag. Then, the standby state operation control process ends.

Next, the demonstration display control process in step 10103 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 67.
In step 11300, sub CPU 301 determines whether the measurement flag is on. If it is determined that the measurement flag is not on, the demonstration display control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11301.
In step 11301, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the demo flag is off. If it is determined that the demo flag is not off (that is, it is on), the demo display control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration flag is off, the process advances to the next step 11302.

In step 11302, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the no-operation time has reached the demonstration start time, that is, whether the count value of the no-operation time timer counter has reached a value corresponding to the demonstration start time. If it is determined that the non-operation time has not reached the demonstration start time, the demonstration display control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the no-operation time has reached the demonstration start time, the process advances to the next step 11303.
In step 11303, if the sub CPU 301 is in the pre-activation warning state, the sub CPU 301 sets a demo display command for executing the demonstration display according to the first aspect in the transmission buffer, and If so, a demo display command for executing demo display according to the second aspect is set in the transmission buffer. The demo display command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and the illumination control board and image control board perform control to execute the demo display based on the received demo display command. becomes. Then, the process advances to the next step 11304.

In step 11304, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in an active state. If it is determined that the activation state is not in progress, the process advances to step 11306. On the other hand, if it is determined that the activation state is in effect, the process advances to the next step 11305.
In step 11305, the sub CPU 301 sets a demo display restriction command for restricting execution of the demo display according to the second mode in the transmission buffer. The demo display restriction command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and control to restrict the demo display is performed based on the received demo display restriction command. As a result, although a demo display is being executed internally, the demo image is not displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. Then, the process advances to the next step 11306.

In step 11306, the sub CPU 301 turns on the demo flag. Then, the demonstration display control process ends.

Next, the power saving state control processing in step 10104 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68.
In step 11400, sub CPU 301 determines whether the demo flag is on. Then, if it is determined that the demo flag is not on, the power saving state control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11401.
In step 11401, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the demo display has ended, that is, whether the demo display time has elapsed. Although not particularly shown, the sub-control board 300 in this embodiment is provided with a demo display time timer counter for measuring the demo display time, and when the demo display is started, the demo display time timer counter By setting the demo display time to , the demo display time is measured. If it is determined that the demonstration display has not ended, the power saving state control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration display has ended, the process advances to the next step 11402.

In step 11402, the sub CPU 301 sets a demo display end command for clearing the demo display in the transmission buffer, and also sets a power saving state control command for transitioning to the power saving state in the transmission buffer. The demo display end command and power saving state control command set here are sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to clear the demo display based on the received demo display end command. At the same time, control is performed to reduce the brightness of the effect display device 21, turn off various lamps, and stop the audio output device 10 from outputting audio based on the received power saving state control command. Then, the process advances to the next step 11403.
In step 11403, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in an active state. If it is determined that the activation state is not in progress, the process advances to step 11405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the activation state is in effect, the process advances to the next step 11404.

In step 11404, the sub CPU 301 enters a power saving state to limit control to reduce the brightness of the effect display device 21, turn off various lamps, and stop outputting audio by the audio output device 10 based on the transition to the power saving state. Set the limit command to the send buffer. The power saving state restriction command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and based on the received power saving state restriction command, the brightness of the effect display device 21 is reduced, various lamps are turned off, sound is Control is performed to limit the stoppage of audio output by the output device 10. As a result, although the power saving state is maintained internally, the brightness of the effect display device 21 is not reduced, the various lamps are turned off, and the audio output device 10 is not stopped from outputting audio. Then, the process advances to the next step 11405.
In step 11405, the sub CPU 301 turns off the demo flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 11406.

In step 11406, the sub CPU 301 turns on the power saving flag. Then, the power saving state control process ends.

Next, the current speaker volume changing process in step 10105 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69.
In step 11500, sub CPU 301 determines whether or not cross key 25 has been pressed. If it is determined that the cross key 25 has not been pressed, the current speaker volume changing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cross key 25 has been pressed, the process advances to the next step 11501.
In step 11501, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol confirmation period is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the state is after receiving the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 100 and before receiving the stop display command from the main control board 100. If it is determined that the symbol confirmation period is in progress, the current speaker volume change process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation period is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 11502.

In step 11502, when the up key is pressed, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the current speaker volume stored in the sub RAM 303 is the maximum speaker volume. On the other hand, if the down key is pressed, it is determined whether the current speaker volume stored in the sub RAM 303 is the minimum speaker volume. If it is determined that the speaker volume is the maximum (or the minimum speaker volume), the current speaker volume changing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the speaker volume is not the maximum (or the minimum speaker volume), the process advances to the next step 11503.
In step 11503, when the up key is pressed, the sub CPU 301 changes the current speaker volume stored in the sub RAM 303 to the speaker volume one step higher, and when the down key is pressed, , changes the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 to a speaker volume one step lower. Then, the current speaker volume changing process ends.

Next, the pre-warning volume adjustment process in step 10106 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.
In step 11600, sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pre-warning state is in effect. If it is determined that the pre-activation warning state is not in effect, the pre-activation warning volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is in the pre-warning state, the process advances to the next step 11601.
In step 11601, the sub CPU 301 sets an error adjustment flag indicating that the channel adjustment value of the target channel (direction sound channel, channel 2 corresponding to difference ball stop control sound, etc.) is being changed based on the occurrence of an error. Determine whether it is on. If it is determined that the error adjustment flag is not on (that is, off), the process advances to step 11605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the error adjustment flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11602.

In step 11602, the sub CPU 301 determines whether any error flag is on. If it is determined that any error flag is on, the pre-warning volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the process advances to the next step 11603.
In step 11603, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an error adjustment cancellation command for canceling the change in the channel adjustment value for the target channel. The error adjustment cancellation command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and based on the received error adjustment cancellation command, the audio control board adjusts the channel adjustment value of the target channel. Control will be performed to return it to the initial value (that is, change it to the initial value "2"). Then, the process advances to the next step 11604.

In step 11604, the sub CPU 301 turns off the error adjustment flag. Then, the pre-warning volume adjustment process ends.
Further, in step 11605, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 11601 that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub CPU 301 determines whether any error flag is on. If it is determined that none of the error flags is on, the pre-warning volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that any error flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11606.

In step 11606, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an error adjustment command for changing the channel adjustment value for the target channel. The error adjustment command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and based on the received error adjustment command, the audio control board performs control to change the channel adjustment value of the target channel. It will be carried out. Then, the process advances to the next step 11607.
In step 11607, the sub CPU 301 turns on the error adjustment flag. Then, the pre-warning volume adjustment process ends.

Next, the activation warning/notice volume adjustment process in step 10107 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71.
In step 11700, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the activation warning state or the activation notice state is in progress. If it is determined that the activation warning/notification state is neither in the activation warning state nor the activation warning state, the activation warning/notification volume adjustment process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the activation warning state or the activation warning state is in progress, the process advances to the next step 11701.
In step 11701, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the error adjustment flag is on. If it is determined that the error adjustment flag is not on, the process advances to step 11705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the error adjustment flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11702.

In step 11702, the sub CPU 301 determines whether any error flag is on. If it is determined that any error flag is on, the process advances to step 11708. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the process advances to the next step 11703.
In step 11703, the sub CPU 301 sets an error adjustment cancellation command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 11704.

In step 11704, the sub CPU 301 turns off the error adjustment flag. Then, the process advances to step 11708.
Further, in step 11705, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 11701 that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub CPU 301 determines whether any error flag is on. If it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the process advances to step 11708. On the other hand, if it is determined that any error flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11706.

In step 11706, the sub CPU 301 sets the error adjustment command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 11707.
In step 11707, the sub CPU 301 turns on the error adjustment flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 11708.
In step 11708, the sub CPU 301 determines whether any error flag is on. If it is determined that any of the error flags is on, the activation warning/notice volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the process advances to the next step 11709.

In step 11709, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the activation warning sound (or the activation warning sound if the activation notification state is in progress) is being output. If it is determined that the activation warning sound (activation notice sound) is not being output, the process advances to step 11713. On the other hand, if it is determined that the activation warning sound (activation notice sound) is being output, the process advances to the next step 11710.
In step 11710, the sub CPU 301 turns on an output adjustment flag indicating that the channel adjustment value of the target channel (effect sound channel) is being changed based on the fact that the activation warning sound (activation notice sound) is being output. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the output adjustment flag is on, the activation warning/notification volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output adjustment flag is not on (that is, off), the process advances to the next step 11711.

In step 11711, the sub CPU 301 sets an output adjustment command for changing the channel adjustment value of the target channel in the transmission buffer. The output adjustment command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and based on the received output adjustment command, the audio control board performs control to change the channel adjustment value of the target channel. It will be carried out. Then, the process advances to the next step 11712.
In step 11712, the sub CPU 301 turns on the output adjustment flag. Then, the activation warning/notice volume adjustment process is completed.

Further, in step 11713, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 11709 that the activation warning sound (activation notice sound) is not being output, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the output adjustment flag is on. If it is determined that the output adjustment flag is not on, the activation warning/notification volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output adjustment flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11714.
In step 11714, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an output adjustment cancellation command for canceling the change in the channel adjustment value for the target channel. The output adjustment cancellation command set here is sent to the various control boards in step 10110 described above, and based on the received output adjustment cancellation command, the audio control board adjusts the channel adjustment value of the target channel. Control will be implemented to return it. Then, the process advances to the next step 11715.

In step 11715, the sub CPU 301 turns off the output adjustment flag. Then, the activation warning/notice volume adjustment process is completed.

Next, the volume adjustment process during activation in step 10107 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.
In step 11800, sub CPU 301 determines whether it is in an active state. If it is determined that the activation state is not in effect, the activation volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the activation state is in effect, the process advances to the next step 11801.
In step 11801, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the error adjustment flag is on. If it is determined that the error adjustment flag is not on, the process advances to step 11805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the error adjustment flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11802.

In step 11802, the sub CPU 301 determines whether any error flag is on. If it is determined that any error flag is on, the active volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the process advances to the next step 11803.
In step 11803, the sub CPU 301 sets an error adjustment cancellation command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 11804.

In step 11804, the sub CPU 301 turns off the error adjustment flag. Then, the active volume adjustment process ends.
Furthermore, in step 11805, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 11801 that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub CPU 301 determines whether any error flag is on. If it is determined that none of the error flags is on, the active volume adjustment process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that any error flag is on, the process advances to the next step 11806.

In step 11806, the sub CPU 301 sets the error adjustment command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 11807.
In step 11807, the sub CPU 301 turns on the error adjustment flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 11808.

In step 11808, the sub CPU 301 executes control to output the corresponding error suggestion sound at the maximum speaker volume, regardless of the current speaker volume. Then, the active volume adjustment process ends.

Next, a modification of the above embodiment will be described.
In the above-described embodiment, after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the rainbow cut-in image is executed in the first half of the variable effect and suggests that a jackpot has been won and the jackpot symbol X1 has been determined. Although the display of CP1-3 is restricted, the effects whose execution is restricted are not limited to this.
For example, in the second half of the variable effect, if it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that jackpot symbol X1 has been determined (for example, displaying a specific character image, etc.), the execution of the suggestive effect is restricted. You may also do so. In addition, when the reserved special pattern random number is determined to win a jackpot and jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a specific reserved image 52 (for example, a rainbow-colored reserved image 52, etc.) If display is possible, display of the pending image 52 may be restricted. In addition, when the stored special pattern random number is one that is determined to win a jackpot and jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a specific pre-read image (for example, a rainbow-colored band image, etc.) is displayed. If it is possible to execute a pre-read effect, the execution of the pre-read effect may be restricted.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be achieved.

Further, the performance that restricts execution is not limited to the performance that suggests that a jackpot has been won and the jackpot symbol X1 has been determined.
For example, it may be possible to restrict execution of a performance that suggests that the player has won a jackpot. Also, for example, if it is possible to set the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state after the special game ends depending on the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol) determined at the time of winning the jackpot, the high probability It may be possible to restrict execution of a performance that suggests that a jackpot symbol for which a time-saving gaming state is set has been determined.
That is, when it is possible to execute a performance that suggests that it has been decided to award a gaming profit advantageous to the player, the execution of the performance may be restricted.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be achieved.

Further, the performance whose execution is to be restricted is not limited to a performance that suggests that it has been decided to award a gaming profit advantageous to the player. For example, it may also be possible to restrict the execution of performances in which the player has a high expectation of determining the award of gaming profits advantageous to the player.
Further, the method of restricting the execution of the performance is not limited to preventing the target performance from being performed. For example, the setting may be such that after the restriction, the possibility of executing the target performance is extremely lower than before the restriction.
Furthermore, the execution of the performance may be restricted as follows.
For example, even after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the target effect is executed, but when the target effect is executed, the target effect is made invisible. good. Specifically, even after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed, and when the display is executed, the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed. By displaying the image CP1-3 as a transparent image with extremely high transparency to the extent that it is not visible or almost invisible, it is possible to confirm that the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is being displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. You may make it unrecognizable.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.
In addition, for example, in a variable effect or a look-ahead effect, a special image whose visibility is lowered by making the display size smaller than the effect pattern 50 or a pending image (for example, when a predetermined character is shown and a jackpot is won) In addition to displaying a mini-character image (such as a mini-character image that is displayed only in
Specifically, for example, similarly to the embodiment described above, the display of the special image described above may not be executed after the difference pitch count value reaches the first reference value.
For example, before the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the display position of the above-mentioned special image is set at the center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21, but the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value. After the value is reached, the display of the special image is restricted by changing the display position of the above-mentioned special image to one of the four corners of the display section 21a, which is less visible than before the first reference value is reached. You can do it like this.
In addition, for example, before the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the display priority of the above-mentioned special image is set to be the highest, and for example, the special image is displayed without being covered by any of the images currently being displayed. is displayed, but after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the display priority of the above-mentioned special image is changed to lower, for example, the special image is displayed on the production pattern 50 or the background image. Display of the special image may be restricted by displaying the special image in a covered state.
For example, if the above-mentioned special image is displayed before the difference pitch count value reaches the first reference value, the special image is displayed alone without any other images added, but the difference When the above-mentioned special image is displayed after the ball count value reaches the first reference value, the special image is displayed with another image added that partially or completely covers the special image. Display of the special image may be restricted by displaying the special image.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, jackpot winning or losing was provided as the lottery result derived from the jackpot lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to winning the jackpot, a small winning game may be provided in which a small winning game is executed in which the large prize opening 18 is opened, which is a game different from the special game.
When a small win is provided, the difference ball operation stop control similar to the special game in the above-described embodiment is performed for the small win game based on the small win in the jackpot lottery. It may be executed. Specifically, when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, an activation warning state is set, and if the small winning game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value. An activation notice state may be set, and the activation state may be set when the small winning game being executed ends.
In addition, a pachinko machine P is provided with a special area in which a game ball can enter inside the big prize opening 18, and is set so that a special game is executed when a game ball enters the special area during a small winning game. (So-called pachinko machines that mix 1 and 2 types), when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, an activation warning state is set, and when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the activation warning state is set. If a winning game is being executed, an activation notice state is set, and when the small winning game that is being executed ends without the game ball entering the special area, the activation state is set when the small winning game ends, When a game ball enters the special area during a small winning game and a special game is executed after the small winning game ends, the activated state may be set when the special game ends.
In this case, even if the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value during a small winning game or a special game executed via a small winning game, these small winning games or special games will not be executed. Since the game continues until the game ends, the player's interest can be maintained.

In the embodiment described above, the differential pitch operation stop control is executed based on the number of differential pitches, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same control as the difference ball operation stop control of the above-described embodiment may be executed based on the cumulative number of paid out prize balls (namely, the number of won prize balls acquired). For example, when the number of acquired prize balls reaches the warning execution number (the number of acquired prize balls that is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) less than the number of activated prize balls that will cause the game to stop), an activation warning state is set, and the number of acquired prize balls is When the number reaches the stop number (the number of won prize balls that causes the game to stop) and a special game is being executed at the time of reaching the stop number, an activation notice state is set, and the special game ends or the won prize is executed. If the special game is not being executed when the number of balls reaches the number of balls to stop operating, the activated state may be set. Further, regarding the number of won prize balls displayed during the special game or the high probability time saving game state, the number of stopped balls that would cause the game to stop may not be displayed.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the embodiment described above, there are four control states of the pachinko machine P: a game stop state, a settings change state, a settings confirmation state, and a playable state, and the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value. The activation state set based on this is one state in the playable state and various controls are performed, but the activation state is not limited to this. For example, as a control state of the pachinko machine P, an activated state is provided in addition to the above four, and this activated state is a control state that can be set separately from the playable state, and various controls similar to those in the above embodiment are performed. You may also do so.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, if the activation state is set during the standby state, the measurement of the non-operation time that starts based on the start of the standby state is set to continue, but after the activation state is set. However, the time during which measurement is continued is not limited to the no-operation time. For example, the fluctuation time when measurement starts from the start of the fluctuation, the performance start time which is the time from the predetermined start point during the execution of the fluctuation performance until the predetermined performance is executed, and the start of a special game. Opening time when measurement starts from the time of opening time, opening time of grand prize opening 18 where measurement starts from the start of round games, ending time when measurement starts from the end of all round games, opening of movable piece 16b The measurement of the opening time of the movable piece 16b, etc., for which measurement starts from the hour, may also be continued even after the activation state is set.
Even in this case, since there is no need to provide different programs depending on whether or not the activation state is set, the storage capacity in the main ROM 102 and sub-ROM 302 can be reduced.
In the above-described embodiment, only one grand prize opening 18 was provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of grand prize openings 18 may be provided. When a plurality of big winning holes 18 are provided, a different big winning hole 18 may be opened for each round game.
Further, in this case, the opening/closing door 18b of any of the big prize openings 18 may be closed in a control state in which the game does not proceed (game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, activation state).
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, the high probability time saving game state is set after the end of the special game, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, by providing a special area into which the game ball that entered the big prize opening 18 can enter, and a special area movable piece that can open and close the special area, it is possible to check whether the game ball has entered the special area during the special game. A different game state may be set after the end of the special game based on whether the special game is completed or not. In this case, similarly to the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18, the operation of the above-mentioned special area movable piece is restricted in the control state in which the game does not proceed. It is also possible to do so.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the problem of causing the game ball to enter the special area described above in the control state in which the game does not proceed.

In the embodiment described above, the current speaker volume can be changed by pressing the cross key 25, but settings of the pachinko machine P other than the speaker volume may be changed by a predetermined operation. For example, it may be possible to change the amount of light from the lamp 23 or the like by a predetermined operation. If the amount of light can be changed, it may be possible to change the amount of light outside the symbol change period, similar to changing the current speaker volume. Furthermore, the light intensity is controlled in the same manner as the current speaker volume (for example, during activation, the lamp 23, etc. is always turned on at the maximum light intensity, regardless of the set light intensity). Good too. Further, during the activation state, although the current speaker volume can be changed, the light amount may not be changed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P, when a door opening error and an unauthorized winning error occur simultaneously, the error notification of the unauthorized winning error is given priority over the error notification of the door opening error (i.e., the error notification of the unauthorized winning error is given priority over the error notification of the door opening error. In addition, if the system is set so that the occurrence of a door open error can be determined even during the activated state, while the error suggestion of a fraudulent winning error is being made. For example, when the activation state is set because the front door 3 is opened and a game ball illegally enters the grand prize opening 18, the error suggestion for the illegal winning error is not executed, and the error suggestion for the door opening error is not executed. It may also be executed.

Further, even when the demonstration display is executed when the activation notice state is set and the activation notice character image is displayed on the display section 21a, the second demonstration mode is selected, so that the demonstration image can be displayed. It is also possible to prevent the display from becoming difficult or impossible to see due to illumination display, and to continue displaying the activation notice character image while displaying the demonstration image.
In addition, while displaying the demo images, warning images (for example, images to remind players not to forget to take out their cards (such as a text image saying "Please be careful not to forget to take out your prepaid card"), etc.) Images that remind players not to get too involved (such as text images that say ``Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation''), and images that remind players that they are managed gaming machines (described later) (such as images that remind players that ``This pachinko machine is a sumapachi'') (text images, etc.)), and if you continue to display the activation warning character image while displaying the demonstration image, the activation warning character image and the alert image will be displayed. may be configured so that they are not displayed repeatedly. For example, in the display section 21a, the warning image may be displayed at a display position that does not overlap with the activation warning character image, or the display timing of the activation warning character image and the display timing of the warning image may be made different. It's okay.
Additionally, the above-mentioned effect also applies when the above-mentioned warning image is set to be displayed while the demo image is being displayed, and when the activation warning text image is continued to be displayed while the demo image is being displayed. Similarly, the activation warning character image and the attention-calling image may be prevented from being displayed overlappingly.

In the embodiment described above, the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the large prize opening 18 were operated by a solenoid, but the device for performing these operations is limited to a solenoid. For example, a motor or the like may be used. Then, in a control state in which the game is not progressing, the operation of this motor may be restricted.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the embodiment described above, the firing and payout control board 200 controls both the firing of game balls and the paying out of prize balls, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, a board for controlling the firing of game balls (a firing control board) and a board for controlling the payout of prize balls (a payout control board) may be provided separately. In this case, in the control state where the game does not proceed, only the control of the game ball launch by the launch control board is stopped, but the control of the payout of prize balls by the payout control board is not stopped. good.
By doing so, the burden of control on each board can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the firing and payout control board 200 controls the payout of prize balls, and in the game stop state where the game does not progress and the activated state, the main control board 100 controls the game progress (each winning hole). Even if detection of game balls entering the ball, jackpot lottery, variable display of special symbols, lottery of normal symbols, variable display of normal symbols, etc.) stops, the payout of prize balls is controlled by the firing and payout control board 200. However, the manner of controlling the payout of prize balls is not limited to this.
For example, the main control board 100 directly controls the payout of prize balls, and in the game stop state and activation state where the game is not progressing, the control related to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 is stopped. The main control board 100 may continue to control the payout of prize balls.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the main CPU 101 does not detect the entry of game balls into each winning hole in the control state in which the game does not proceed, but the main CPU 101 is not limited to this.
For example, even if a control state is set in which the game does not proceed, the main CPU 101 controls each winning hole until a specific time period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during which the launched game ball can reach the out hole 19. By making it possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a game ball, it is possible to detect whether a game ball that was launched before the control state in which the game does not proceed is set, and if the ball enters any winning hole after the control state in which the game does not proceed is set. In this case, the entering ball may be detected and the payout of the prize ball based on the entering ball may be executed in a control state in which the game does not proceed.
In this case, it is possible to further reduce disadvantages that may occur to the player due to the setting of a control state in which the game does not proceed.

In the embodiment described above, the control state in which the power was interrupted immediately before the power outage occurred, the setting switch 108 on or off at the time of power outage recovery, the RAM clear switch 109 on or off, and the body frame open detection sensor 2a on or off The control state at the time of recovery from a power failure was set depending on whether a power off, backup error occurred, or whether a RAM error occurred, but these are the conditions for determining the control state. It is not limited to. For example, turning on or turning off another sensor such as the front door open detection sensor 3a may be added as a judgment condition. Moreover, any one of the above-mentioned judgment conditions (for example, whether the main body frame opening detection sensor 2a is turned on or off) may be excluded.
Further, even if the main body frame opening detection sensor 2a is turned off in the settings confirmation state or settings change state, the settings confirmation state or settings change state may be continued.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting confirmation state and setting change state are set only when the power is restored, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine P is turned on, the setting confirmation state or the setting change state may be set by performing a predetermined operation.
Furthermore, the above-described modifications can be combined with each other to the extent possible.

Furthermore, the various controls in the embodiments described above can also be applied to other pachinko machines and gaming machines other than pachinko machines. For example, in a pachinko machine (so-called Hanemono) in which a special game is executed when a game ball enters a special area (so-called V zone) provided in a big prize opening, the differential ball operation stop control is performed based on the number of differential balls. Various states (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, activation state) are set, and even if the game does not proceed (game stop state, activation state), the opening/closing of the grand prize opening can be set. The operation of the door may be restricted, the payout of game balls may be continued, various controls may be executed regarding the output of test signals, and various controls may be executed regarding demonstration display. In addition, in a slot machine in which a game is played using game medals as a game medium, the difference ball operation stop control is performed based on the difference number (the difference between the number of game medals inserted and the number of game medals paid out). Various states (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, activation state) are set, and even if a state in which the game does not proceed (game stop state, activation state) is set, the start switch, stop switch, etc. and the movement of predetermined performance accessory devices, continuing to pay out game medals, executing various controls regarding output of test signals, and executing various controls regarding demonstration display. Good too.
Furthermore, the various controls in the above-described embodiments may be adopted in the managed gaming machine as well. Here, a managed gaming machine means that (A) the player plays the game by hitting a game ball onto the board of the managed gaming machine, (B) there is no upper tray and lower tray, and the player can directly play the game. (C) Circulate the minimum number required for firing within the game machine; (D) Manage and display the number of game balls and acquired game balls as numerical data on the managed game machine; (E) ) When the game ends, the number of game balls managed by the managed game machine can be transferred to a dedicated unit and managed by pressing the counting switch. Then, when the game ball is launched, the above numerical data is subtracted (incremented by 1), and when the game ball enters the winning slot, the value corresponding to the winning (value equivalent to the payout) By adding (giving a gaming value) to the above-mentioned numerical data, the differential ball operation stop control in the above-described embodiment and the control of the main CPU 101 in the state in which the game is not progressing in the above-described embodiment can be performed. , various controls related to the output of test signals, and various controls related to demonstration display may be executed.

In addition, the main control board 100 in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the game control means of the present invention. Moreover, the game ball in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the game value of the present invention. Furthermore, the dispensing motor 62 and the firing dispensing control board 200 in the embodiment described above correspond to the applying means of the present invention. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the time point when the difference pitch count value is reset corresponds to the predetermined calculation start time point of the present invention. Further, the number of deactivated units in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the first specific amount of the present invention. Further, the activated state in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the game-disabled state of the present invention. Moreover, the pachinko machine P in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the gaming machine of the present invention. Further, the number of pitch differences corresponding to the first reference value in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the second specific amount of the present invention. Further, the pre-activation setting state test signal in the embodiment described above corresponds to the test signal of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step 216 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the test signal control means of the present invention. Further, the security signal based on the setting of the activation state in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the external signal of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the process 209 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the external signal generation means of the present invention. Further, the display of the activation warning character image (activation warning suggestion) in the above-described embodiment corresponds to a specific suggestion of the present invention. Further, the effect display device 21, sub CPU 301, etc. in the above-described embodiment correspond to the suggestion means of the present invention. Further, the startup preparation period in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the preparation period of the present invention. Further, the unused area in which the difference pitch count value in the above-described embodiment is stored corresponds to a predetermined storage section of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 10 Audio output device 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
200 Launch payout control board 201 Payout CPU
202 Payout ROM
203 Payout RAM
300 Sub control board 301 Sub CPU
302 Sub ROM
303 Sub RAM

Claims (3)

a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
and a granting means for granting a predetermined amount of gaming value based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition,
The game control means determines that a difference amount, which is the difference between the amount of gaming value given by the giving means and the amount of gaming value used for the game from a predetermined calculation start point, reaches a first specific amount. A gaming machine that can set a game-disabled state in which the game cannot proceed based on the above,
comprising a test signal control means capable of outputting to the outside of the gaming machine and capable of generating a test signal indicating that the difference amount is at least a second specific amount smaller than the first specific amount;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the game-disabled state is set during generation of the test signal, the generation of the test signal is continued after the game-disabled state is set. comprising an external signal generating means capable of generating an external signal that is different from the test signal and can be output to the outside of the gaming machine;
The external signal generation means is capable of generating the external signal based on the gaming disabled state being set,
When the game-disabled state is set during the generation of the test signal, if a power outage occurs during the game-disabled state, the generation of the test signal is not restarted after recovering from the power outage,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when a power outage occurs during the game-disabled state, generation of the external signal is resumed after recovery from the power outage. Equipped with a suggestion means that can carry out a specific suggestion,
When a power outage occurs, the suggestion means is capable of executing the specific suggestion during a period from recovery from the power outage until a predetermined preparation period has elapsed;
The difference amount is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and when a power outage occurs before the gaming disabled state is set, the storage of the difference amount in the storage unit at the time of the power outage occurs is the same as that of the power outage. It may be maintained even after returning from a break,
If a power outage occurs while the test signal is being generated and before the game-disabled state is set, the test signal is 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of generating.

Images